JP2021171093A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of sufficiently attracting an interest of a player and achieving further enhancement of an interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: determination means for determining whether a special game advantageous to a player is to be executed; and performance control means capable of controlling a performance according to a result of the determination by the determination means. The performance control means executes a specific performance after executing a predetermined performance indicating establishment of a predetermined condition. The predetermined performance is executed at predetermined timing, and there is a case where the specific performance is executed at any one timing of first timing and second timing later than the first timing, and there is a case where the specific performance is executed both at the first timing and the second timing. A degree of expectation for the special game is different in the specific performance executed at the first timing, and in the specific performance executed at the second timing.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 65

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, a gaming machine has been provided in which an effect of changing an image such as a hold icon is performed to raise the player's expectation for a big hit and improve the interest. For example, Patent Document 1 below discloses a gaming machine that executes a hold change effect that suggests that the reliability of the jackpot has increased by changing the mode of the hold symbol.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-24710

However, the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 could not sufficiently attract the interest of the player, and further improvement of the interest was required.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of sufficiently attracting the interest of the player and further improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of the present invention provided to solve the above-mentioned problems can control a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player and an effect according to the determination result of the determination means. The effect control means has a predetermined effect, and the effect control means performs a predetermined effect indicating that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and then performs a specific effect. The predetermined effect is performed at a predetermined timing, and the specific effect is performed. When the effect is performed at either the first timing or the second timing after the first timing, or when the specific effect is performed at both the first timing and the second timing. The specific effect performed at the first timing and the specific effect performed at the second timing differ in the degree of expectation of the special game.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to add unexpectedness and variety to the gaming and improve the interest of the gaming. Further, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to give a player a sense of discomfort and improve the expectation for granting a privilege (special game). As a result, the gaming machine of the present invention can sufficiently attract the interest of the player and further improve the interest of the game.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of sufficiently attracting the interest of a player and further improving the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening and the 2nd starting opening provided in the right game area. It is a perspective view of the back side of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot determination table of a jackpot lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of the special symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting data table at the end of a big hit game. It is a figure which shows an example of the special electric accessory operation mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the big prize opening opening mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure variation pattern determination table of the 1st special symbol display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure variation pattern determination table of the 2nd special symbol display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the preliminary determination table of the jackpot lottery of the 1st special symbol display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the preliminary determination table of the jackpot lottery of the 2nd special symbol display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the table about a normal symbol and a startable movable piece. It is a figure which shows an example of various storage areas of a main RAM. It is a figure which shows the main process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st start port detection switch input process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd start port detection switch input process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol memory determination process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot determination processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol variation processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol stop processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot game processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot game end processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the general control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the normal symbol variation processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the auxiliary game processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the error detection processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the error clearing process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the main process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the command analysis processing in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the icon change effect determination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the icon color and the jackpot expectation degree. It is a figure which shows an example of the icon final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the change scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows the icon appearance effect determination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the icon appearance effect decision table. It is a figure which shows the winning flash effect determination process in the effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning flash production decision table. It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the action determination process at the time of a change start in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the action decision table at the start of fluctuation. It is a figure which shows the dialogue notice determination processing in a production control unit. (A) is an example of a serif advance notice execution determination table, (b) is an example of a serif display color determination table, and (c) is an example of a serif pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the timer effect determination process in an effect control unit. (A) is an example of a timer count determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a timer type determination table. (A) is an example of a suggestion event determination table for one timer, and (b) is an example of a suggestion event determination table for two timers. It is a figure which shows the stock production determination processing in the production control unit. (A) is an example of a stock effect execution decision table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a stock activation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the cut-in determination process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the cut-in pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the error notification start processing in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the error notification end determination processing in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the icon appearance effect redetermination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the background image of a mode selection screen and an effect mode. It is a figure which shows the update mode of the hold number. It is a figure which shows an example of the movement of an icon. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of the icon appearance effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a normal display. It is a figure which shows an example of a delay display. It is a figure which shows an example of redisplay. It is a figure which shows the modification of the icon appearance effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a winning flash production. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of a winning flash effect. It is a figure which shows the modification of the winning flash effect. It is a figure which shows the timing when the update display of the hold number is performed. It is a figure which shows the timing when the color change of a hold icon is performed. It is a figure which shows an example of the color change of a hold icon. It is a figure which shows the update timing of the hold number at the start of fluctuation. It is a figure which shows the operation of the effect symbol from the fluctuation start to the fixed stop. It is a figure which shows the action at the start of a change, and the execution timing of a dialogue notice. It is a figure which shows an example of the action at the start of fluctuation. It is a figure which shows an example of a dialogue notice. It is a timing chart when pseudo 2 (pseudo-repeated number of times 1) is performed. It is a timing chart when pseudo 3 (pseudo-repeated number of times 2 times) is performed. It is a figure which shows an example of a normal pseudo. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo after reach. It is a figure which shows an example of pseudo 3. It is a figure which shows an example of pseudo 3. It is a figure which shows an example of a timer effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a stock production. It is a figure which shows an example of a cut-in display. It is a figure which shows an example of the hit notification effect (big hit mode). It is a figure which shows an example of the hit notification effect (loss mode). It is a figure which shows an example of the hit notification effect (loss mode). It is a figure which shows an example of the hit notification effect (recovery mode). It is a figure which shows an example of the production during a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the normal display in a time saving game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the delay display in the time saving game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the redisplay in the time saving game state. It is a figure which shows the type of an error, a detection condition and a cancellation condition. It is a figure which shows the notification start condition and the notification end condition of an error. It is a figure which shows an example of a RAM clear notification. It is a figure which shows an example of the power restoration notification. It is a figure which shows an example of the abnormality winning error notification. It is a figure which shows an example of magnetic detection error notification. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning frequency abnormality error notification. It is a figure which shows an example of a door opening error notification. It is a figure which shows an example of the switch non-connection error notification. It is a figure which shows an example of the dish full tank error notification. It is a figure which shows another example of the image for exclusive use of error notification. It is a figure which shows an example of an external terminal board. It is a figure which shows an example of the output mode of each signal. It is a figure which shows an example of the case where two signals are output in duplicate. It is a figure which shows an example of the case where two signals are output in duplicate. It is a figure which shows an example of the case where a minor error overlaps with other effects. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the effect when the security signal and the signal related to other effect overlap. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the effect when the security signal and the signal related to the other effect do not overlap (when the other signal comes first). It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the effect when the security signal and the signal related to the other effect do not overlap (when the other signal comes first). It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the effect when the security signal and the signal which concerns on another effect do not overlap (when the other signal is later). It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the icon appearance effect at the time of power restoration.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine 1)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention. Further, FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a large winning opening 16 and a second starting opening 15 provided in the right gaming area. Further, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back surface side of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention.

The gaming machine 1 is provided with an outer frame 60 attached to the island equipment of the game store, the outer frame 60, and a glass frame 50 rotatably supported (see FIG. 1). Further, the outer frame 60 is provided with a game board 2 in which a game area 6 into which the game ball Q flows down is formed.

The glass frame 50 includes an audio output device 32 composed of speakers, a frame lighting device 34b having a plurality of lamps (LEDs), an effect button 35 for changing an effect mode by a pressing operation, and at least two directions (books). In the embodiment, an operation lever 36 capable of operating in four directions) is provided.

The audio output device 32 outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), and the like, and produces a sound effect. Further, the decorative lighting devices 34 such as the frame lighting device 34b and the heso lamp 34c are provided at a plurality of positions so as to produce an effect by lighting by changing the irradiation direction and emission color of the light of each lamp. Has been done.

The effect button 35 is provided with an effect button detection switch 35a (see FIG. 4), and when the effect button detection switch 35a detects an operation of the player, a further effect is executed in response to this operation. .. Similarly, the operation lever 36 is also provided with a lever operation detection switch 36b (see FIG. 4) so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1 (FIG. 4). 4). In the present embodiment, the effect button 35 is configured to be movable in the vertical direction by the effect button drive motor 35b (see FIG. 4).

Further, the glass frame 50 is provided with an operation handle 3 for firing a game ball toward the game area 6 by being rotated, and a saucer 40 for storing a plurality of game balls. , The operation handle 3 has a downward slope so that the game ball flows down. A receiving port for receiving a game ball is provided at the end of the downward slope of the saucer 40, and the game ball received by the receiving port is driven by a ball feed solenoid 4b (see FIG. 4). , The game balls are fed one by one to the ball feed opening (not shown) provided on the back surface of the glass frame 50. Further, the saucer 40 is provided with a plate full tank detection switch 136 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the stored state of the game balls of the saucer 40 and detecting that the saucer 40 is in a full tank state. There is.

Then, the game ball sent out to the ball feed opening (not shown) is formed by a launch rail (not shown) having a downward inclination toward the launching member (not shown). Guided to the end of the downhill slope. A stopper (not shown) for stopping the game ball is provided above the end of the downward slope of the launch rail, and the game ball sent out from the ball feed opening is of the downward slope of the launch rail. One game ball will be parked at the end.

Then, when the player touches the operation handle 3, the touch sensor 3a (see FIG. 4) provided inside the operation handle 3 detects that the operation handle 3 and the player are in contact with each other. After that, when the player rotates the operation handle 3, the launch volume 3b (see FIG. 4) directly connected to the operation handle 3 also rotates, and the launch intensity of the game ball is adjusted and adjusted by the launch volume 3b. The launching member directly connected to the launching solenoid 4a (see FIG. 4) rotates at the same firing strength. When the launching member rotates, the launching member launches the game ball Q stored at the end of the downward slope of the launch rail, and the game ball is launched into the game area 6.

The game ball launched as described above reaches the game area 6 when it rises between the rails 5a and 5b (see FIG. 1) from the launch rail and exceeds the ball return prevention piece 5c, and then reaches the game area 6. Free fall inside. At this time, the game ball will fall unpredictably due to the plurality of nails and windmills provided in the game area 6.

As shown in FIG. 1, various winning openings (general winning opening 12, ordinary symbol gate 13, first starting opening 14, second starting opening 15, large winning opening 16) are included in the game area 6 of the game board 2. The first image display device 31a (main liquid crystal display) and the decorative frame 7 are provided so as to surround the display area of the first image display device 31a.

On the other hand, outside the game area 6 of the game board 2, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, the ordinary symbol display device 22, and the first special symbol hold display 23 , A second special symbol hold indicator 24, a normal symbol hold indicator 25, a round number indicator 26, and a right-handed indicator 27 are provided.

As shown in FIG. 1, in the lower left side of the game area 6, a game ball launched (so-called left-handed) toward the left side area of the game area 6 can be won (winning), and the game area 6 There are three general winning openings 12 in which a game ball launched toward the right side area (so-called right-handed) cannot win a prize, and a right-handed game ball wins a prize in the lower right side of 6 in the game area. There is one general winning opening 12 that is possible (entry) and cannot be won by a left-handed game ball.

Here, each general winning opening 12 is provided with a general winning opening detection switch 12a (see FIG. 4) for detecting the winning (winning) of the game ball. Then, when the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 12 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 game balls) are paid out from the payout device for paying out the game ball. ..

As shown in FIG. 1, in the lower center of the game area 6, a first starting port 14 is provided, which constitutes a starting area in which a left-handed game ball can win a prize and a right-handed game ball cannot win a prize. Has been done. Further, in the right side area of the game area 6, a second starting port 15 is provided which constitutes a starting area in which a right-handed game ball can win (win) a winning ball.

As shown in FIG. 2, the second starting port 15 includes a starting movable piece 15b constituting an ordinary electric accessory (starting port opening / closing device) for facilitating winning of a game ball into the second starting port 15. It has a start port opening / closing solenoid 15c (see FIG. 4). In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the starting movable piece 15b slides in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow in FIG. 2) by the operation of the starting port opening / closing solenoid 15c, and the starting movable piece 15b moves to the second starting port 15. A closed state (closed mode) in which the winning of the game ball is restricted, and an open state in which the starting movable piece 15b opens the opening of the second starting port 15 to allow the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 15. The conversion is controlled to (open mode).

Here, the first starting port 14 is provided with a first starting port detection switch 14a (see FIG. 4) for detecting the winning (winning ball) of the game ball, and the second starting port 15 is provided with the game ball. A second start port detection switch 15a (see FIGS. 2 and 4) for detecting a winning (winning ball) is provided. Then, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 14 and the second starting port 15 is detected, a random value for jackpot determination for performing the "big hit lottery (big hit determination)" described later is acquired.

Further, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 14 and the second starting port 15 is detected, in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot determination random number value, a special symbol determination random value for determining a special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined. , The reach determination random value and the special symbol fluctuation random value for determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol are also acquired. The jackpot determination random value, the special symbol determination random value, the reach determination random value, and the special figure variation random value are referred to as special symbol determination information.

Further, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 14 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three game balls) are paid out from the payout device. Further, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 15 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, one game ball) are paid out from the payout device. The number of prize balls paid out when the game ball wins in the first starting port 14 may be the same as the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball wins in the second starting port 15.

As shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area 6, a normal symbol gate 13 forming a normal area through which a game ball can pass is provided.

Here, the normal symbol gate 13 is provided with a gate detection switch 13a (see FIG. 4) for detecting the passage (entry) of the game ball. Then, when the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 13 is detected, a hit determination random value for performing the "win lottery (hit determination)" described later is acquired.

Further, when the passage of the game ball through the normal symbol gate 13 is detected, in addition to the above-mentioned hit determination random value, the normal symbol determination random value for determining the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are displayed. The random value for fluctuation of the normal map for determination is also acquired. The hit judgment random value, the normal symbol determination random value, and the normal symbol variation random value are referred to as normal symbol judgment information.

As shown in FIG. 1, in the area on the right side of the game area 6, a large winning opening 16 is provided in which a right-handed game ball can win (win) and a left-handed game ball cannot win. ing.

As shown in FIG. 2, the large winning opening 16 includes a large winning opening opening / closing door 16b constituting a special electric accessory (large winning opening opening / closing device) for facilitating the winning of a game ball into the large winning opening 16. , Has a large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c (see FIG. 4). The upper surface of the large winning opening opening / closing door 16b becomes a flow path for the game ball Q by inclining downward in the left-right direction (right side in FIG. 2), and can be moved in the front-rear direction (see the arrow in FIG. 2). ing. By operating the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c, the large winning opening opening / closing door 16b moves in the front-rear direction to regulate the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 16 (closed mode) and to the large winning opening 16. The conversion is controlled to an open state (open mode) that allows the winning of the game ball.

Here, the large winning opening 16 is provided with a large winning opening detection switch 16a (see FIGS. 2 and 4) for detecting the winning (winning) of the game ball. Then, when the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 16 is detected, a preset number of prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

As shown in FIG. 1, at the bottom of the game area 6, a game in which none of the general winning opening 12, the first starting opening 14, the second starting opening 15, and the large winning opening 16 wins (balls). An out port 11 for discharging the ball out of the game area is provided.

Here, an out-ball detection switch 11a is provided on the back surface of the game board 2 (see FIG. 4). The out-ball detection switch 11a is provided to detect all of the game balls fired in the game area of the game board 2. Here, the game ball detected by the out-ball detection switch 11a is discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 from the discharge port on the back surface side of the game machine 1.

A first image display device 31a (main liquid crystal display) configured by an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or the like is provided in the center of the game area 6, and the first image display device 31a (main liquid crystal display) is provided on both sides of the game area 6. ), A second image display device 31b (sub liquid crystal display) having a size and a display area smaller than that of the first image display device 31a is provided on each of the left and right sides.

In the following description, the first image display device 31a (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display device 31b (sub liquid crystal display) may be collectively referred to as “image display device 31”.

Further, in the following description, the areas formed by both or either of the first image display device 31a (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display device 31b (sub liquid crystal display) and in which the effect display is performed are collectively referred to as "effect". It may be described as "display area 70".

In the description of the following embodiments, the gaming machine of the present invention described as being displayed on the image display device 31 (displayed in the effect display area 70) is the first image display device 31a (main). It may be displayed on the liquid crystal display), may be displayed on the second image display device 31b (sub liquid crystal display), or may be displayed on the first image display device 31a (main liquid crystal display) and the second image. It may be displayed on both of the display devices 31b (sub liquid crystal display).

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the one described as being displayed on the first image display device 31a (main liquid crystal display) in the following description of the embodiment, and the second image display is not limited to this. It may be displayed on the device 31b (sub liquid crystal display). Further, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the one described as being displayed on the second image display device 31b (sub liquid crystal display) in the following description of the embodiment, and the first image display is not limited to this. It may be displayed on the device 31a (main liquid crystal display).

The image display device 31 displays a customer waiting effect image during standby when the game is not performed, or displays a game effect image according to the progress of the game. Among them, three effect symbols 38 (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot in the variable effect described later are displayed in a variable manner, and a combination of specific effect symbols 38 (for example, 777, etc.) is displayed. ) Is stopped and displayed as a jackpot lottery result, and a combination other than a specific effect symbol 38 (for example, 289, etc.) is stopped and displayed as a jackpot lottery result. ..

The effect symbol 38 starts the variable display in accordance with the start of the variable display of the special symbol executed based on the winning (winning) of the game ball to the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15. , The stop display is performed according to the stop display of the special symbol after the lapse of a predetermined fluctuation time. That is, the timing of the variable display between the effect symbol 38 and the special symbol and the timing of the stop display between the effect symbol 38 and the special symbol correspond to each other (they are at the same time).

In the present embodiment, different types of effect symbols 38 are displayed in a variable manner or stopped when the game ball enters the first start port 14 and when the game ball enters the second start port 15. It is configured to. In the gaming machine of the present invention, even when the game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 14 or when the game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 15. , The effect symbol 38 of the same type may be configured to be variable display or stop display in the variable effect.

Further, on the upper right end side of the effect display area 70 (image display device 31), three small effect symbols 48 for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot in the variable effect are in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in the present embodiment). It is displayed in a variable manner by scrolling to (see FIG. 75).

The variable display of the small effect symbol 48 is started in response to the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and corresponds to the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. And stop.
That is, the variable display of the small effect symbol 48 is performed in response to the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the first special symbol or the first special symbol or the variable display is performed depending on the variable state of the small effect symbol 48. , The execution state of the variation display of the second special symbol is notified (suggested) to the player.

As with the effect symbol 38, the small effect symbol 48 is composed of, for example, symbols indicating numbers from "1" to "9", and in the stop display of the small effect symbol 48, the small effect symbol 48 is displayed. It is designed to stop for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode (missing mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same small effect symbols 48 such as "777" or a combination of small effect symbols 48 having regularity such as "357", and the loss mode is that. It is an aspect other than.

Further, in the effect display area 70 (image display device 31), among the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 14, the jackpot lottery (big hit determination) has not been executed (undetermined). ), A game ball to the first hold icon display area 72a and the second start port 15 for displaying the first special symbol hold number (U1) indicating the number of special symbol determination information as an icon so that the player can easily grasp it. The player grasps the second special symbol hold number (U2) indicating the number of special icon judgment information for which the big hit lottery (big hit judgment) has not been executed (undetermined) among the special icon judgment information acquired based on the winning of. The second hold icon display area 72b for displaying the icon so that the player can easily understand it, and the information indicating the special figure determination information during the variable display (variable effect) is displayed as an icon so that the player can easily grasp it. The variable icon display area 73 is provided.

In the following description, the icons displayed in the first hold icon display area 72a and the second hold icon display area 72b are referred to as "hold icons (special figure judgment information for which jackpot judgment has not been executed)", and the variation thereof. The icon displayed in the icon display area 73 is referred to as "the variable icon (special figure determination information for which the jackpot determination has been executed and the variation display (variation effect) is being executed)".

In addition, the hold icon and the variable icon may be generically described as "icon".

The decorative frame 7 surrounding the display area of the image display device 31 is provided with a wall portion erected from the game board 2 on the outer periphery thereof so that the game ball does not pass in front of the display area of the image display device 31. Has been done.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of decorative lighting devices 34. The decorative lighting device 34 includes a panel lighting device 34a (not shown), a frame lighting device 34b, and a heso lamp 34c. The panel lighting device 34a has a plurality of lamps (LEDs and the like), and is provided on both the left and right sides of the decorative frame 7. Further, the frame lighting device 34b is provided above the first image display device 31a. Further, the heso lamp 34c is provided in the lower part of the first starting port 14. Further, a decorative member 33a (directing accessory) is provided on the upper part of the decorative frame 7.

The decorative member 33a is driven by a panel drive device 33 (see FIG. 4) composed of a solenoid, a motor, or the like, and can move in the vertical direction. The movement in the vertical direction causes a first image display. It can be moved to the front surface of the device 31a (main liquid crystal display).

A liquid crystal display may be provided on the decorative member 33a, and at least one of the hold icon display area and the variable icon display area may be provided on the liquid crystal display.

The first special symbol display device 20 displays the lottery result (determination result) of the jackpot lottery (big hit determination) executed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 14 over a predetermined time for the first special symbol. It is notified by stopping and displaying the first special symbol of the type corresponding to the lottery result after the variable display, and is composed of a plurality of lighting members such as LEDs.

The second special symbol display device 21 displays the lottery result (determination result) of the jackpot lottery (big hit determination) executed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 15 over a predetermined time. It is notified by stopping and displaying the second special symbol of the type corresponding to the lottery result after the variable display, and is composed of a plurality of lighting members such as LEDs.

The first special symbol display device 20 and / or the second special symbol display device 21 can also be configured by a 7-segment LED. For example, if a big hit is won, "7" may be stopped and displayed, and if it is lost, "-" may be stopped and displayed.

Here, the "big hit lottery" means that when a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15, a random value for jackpot determination is acquired, and the acquired jackpot determination is used. It refers to a process (big hit determination) of determining whether a random value is a random value corresponding to a "big hit".

Further, in the present embodiment, the "big hit" is a big hit game (big hit game) in the big hit lottery executed based on the winning (winning) of the game ball in the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15. It means that the player has acquired the right to perform a special game in favor of the player.

In the "big hit game", the round game in which the big winning opening 16 (special electric accessory) is opened is performed a predetermined number of times by operating the accessory continuous operation device for continuously operating the special electric accessory ( For example, 4 times or 10 times).

A predetermined time is set for the maximum opening time (operating time of the special electric accessory) of the large winning opening 16 in each round game, and a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9 pieces) are set in the large winning opening 16 during this period. ) Wins (balls), one round game ends. That is, the "big hit game" is a game in which a game ball wins (wins) in the big winning opening 16 and the player can acquire a prize ball corresponding to the winning ball. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpot games are provided, which will be described in detail later.

In addition, even if a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15 during a variable display of a special symbol or during a big hit game (special game), the big hit lottery cannot be performed immediately. In that case, the right to the jackpot lottery is reserved under certain conditions.

More specifically, the special figure determination information acquired when the game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 14 is stored as the first hold up to four, and the game is stored in the second starting port 15. The special figure determination information acquired when the ball wins (wins) is stored as the second hold, up to a maximum of four. The number of the first special symbol hold (U1), which is the number of the first hold, and the number of the second special symbol hold (U2), which is the number of the second hold, are the first special symbol hold indicator 23 and the second special, respectively. It is displayed on the symbol hold indicator 24.

The first special symbol hold indicator 23 of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment indicates the number of first holds by the lighting patterns of the two LEDs. For example, as shown in FIG. 61 (c), when the first hold is "0", the two LEDs of the first special symbol hold indicator 23 are turned off, and when the first hold is one, the two LEDs are turned off. , The LED on the upper side (left side) of the first special symbol hold indicator 23 is lit, and when there are two first hold, the two LEDs of the first special symbol hold indicator 23 are lit. When there are three first holds, the LED on the upper side (left side) of the first special symbol hold indicator 23 blinks and the LED on the lower side (right side) lights up, and when there are four first holds. The two LEDs of the first special symbol hold indicator 23 blink. Further, the second special symbol hold indicator 24 also displays the number of holds for the second hold in the same manner as described above.

Further, as shown in FIG. 61A, the image display device 31 (effect display area 70) has a first hold number display area 74a for displaying the number of first hold (first special symbol hold number) and a first hold number display area 74a. A second hold number display area 74b for displaying the number of 2 hold (second special symbol hold number) is provided.

In the first hold number display area 74a, the number of first hold is displayed as a number. For example, when the number of the second hold is "2", the number "2" is displayed in the first hold number display area 74a. Further, also in the second hold number display area 74b, the number of the second hold is similarly displayed as a number.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number indicating the number of the first hold is displayed in "blue" in the first hold number display area 74a, and the number of the second hold is displayed in the second hold number display area 74b. The number indicating is displayed in "red". As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of the first special symbol hold and the number of the second special symbol hold are displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to visually recognize and discriminate.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and the number indicating the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and the number indicating the second special symbol reservation number (U2) are the same color (for example,). It may be displayed in white or black, and the area color of the first hold number display area 74a and the area color of the second hold number display area 74b may be displayed in different colors (the numbers have the same color and are of numbers). The background color is different, etc.).

Further, the normal symbol display device 22 provided outside the game area 6 of the game board 2 is a lottery result (determination) of a winning lottery (hit determination) performed when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13. The result) is notified by displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner over a predetermined time and then stopping and displaying the normal symbol of the type corresponding to the lottery result, and is composed of a plurality of lighting members composed of LEDs and the like. Has been done.

Here, the "hit lottery" is a random value for hit determination when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13, and the acquired random value for hit determination corresponds to "hit". It refers to the process of determining whether or not (hit determination).

Further, in the present embodiment, "hit" means that the player has acquired the right to execute an auxiliary game that is advantageous to the player in the winning lottery that is executed based on the passage of the game ball through the normal symbol gate 13. say. In the "auxiliary game", the startable movable piece 15b of the second start port 15 is converted and controlled into an open state for a predetermined time. That is, the "auxiliary game" is a game in which a game ball wins (wins) a prize ball at the second starting port 15, and the player can acquire a prize ball corresponding to the prize. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of auxiliary games are provided, which will be described in detail later.

In addition, as with the special symbol, if the winning lottery cannot be performed immediately even if the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13 such as during the variable display of the normal symbol or during the auxiliary game, under certain conditions. The right to the winning lottery is reserved.

More specifically, the normal symbol determination information acquired when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13 is stored as the third hold, up to a maximum of four. The number of ordinary symbol hold indicators (G), which is the number of the third hold, is displayed on the ordinary symbol hold indicator 25 in the same manner as the first special symbol hold indicator 23 and the second special symbol hold indicator 24. Will be done.

Further, a round number display 26 and a right-handed display 27 are provided outside the game area 6 of the game board 2. The round number display 26 displays the number of rounds when the jackpot game described later is executed by the lighting patterns of a plurality of LEDs. The right-handed display 27 lights up the LED to notify the player to launch a game ball toward the right-handed game area during a jackpot game or an auxiliary game, which will be described later.

Further, the glass frame 50 supports a glass plate 52 that visually covers the game area 6 in front of the game board 2 (on the player side). The glass plate 52 is detachably fixed to the glass frame 50.

The glass frame 50 is connected to the outer frame 60 via the hinge mechanism 51 on one end side in the left-right direction (for example, the left side facing the gaming machine 1), and is connected to the outer frame 60 with the hinge mechanism 51 as a fulcrum in the left-right direction. The other end side (for example, the right side facing the game machine 1) can be rotated in the direction of opening from the outer frame 60. The glass frame 50 covers the game board 2 together with the glass plate 52, and rotates like a door with the hinge mechanism portion 51 as a fulcrum, so that the inner portion of the outer frame 60 including the game board 2 can be opened.

On the other end side of the glass frame 50 in the left-right direction, a lock mechanism for fixing the other end side of the glass frame 50 to the outer frame 60 is provided. The lock mechanism can be unlocked with a special key. Further, the glass frame 50 is also provided with a door opening switch 133 (see FIG. 4) for detecting whether or not the glass frame 50 is opened from the outer frame 60.

As shown in FIG. 3, a main control board 110, an effect control board 120, a payout control board 130, a power supply board 140, an external terminal board 30, and the like are provided on the back surface of the gaming machine 1. Further, the power supply board 140 is provided with a power plug 141 for supplying power to the gaming machine 1, a frame control board 180 (not shown), and a power switch.

(Overall block diagram of gaming machine 1)
Next, a control means for controlling the progress of the game will be described with reference to the entire block diagram of the game machine 1 of FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1.

The main control board 110 controls the basic operation (progress) of the game, inputs various detection signals such as the first start port detection switch 14a, and inputs the first special symbol display device 20, the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c, and the like. It is driven to control the game.

The main control board 110 is connected to the effect control board 120, the payout control board 130, and the power supply board 140. Communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 120 is configured so that data can be communicated in only one direction from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120, and the main control board 110 and the payout control board 130 Communication is configured so that data can be communicated in both directions. Further, the main control board 110 inputs the power supply voltage from the power supply board 140.

Further, the main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores various data and tables required for game control programs and game control, and a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing. It includes at least a built-in one-chip microcomputer 110m, an input port and an output port (not shown) for main control, and a RAM clear switch 111a.

The main control input port includes a payout control board 130, a RAM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for clearing the stored contents of the main RAM 110c, and a general for detecting that a game ball has entered the general winning opening 12. Winning port detection switch 12a, gate detection switch 13a for detecting that a game ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 13, first start port detection switch 14a for detecting that a game ball has entered the first start port 14, 2 Joins the second starting port detection switch 15a for detecting that a game ball has entered the starting port 15, the large winning opening detection switch 16a for detecting that a game ball has entered the large winning opening 16, and the game machine 1. A magnetic sensor 17 for detecting magnetism and an out-ball detection switch 11a for detecting all of the game balls fired in the game area of the game board 2 are connected. Various signals are input to the main control board 110 by the input port for main control.

Further, the output port for the main control operates the effect control board 120, the payout control board 130, the start port opening / closing solenoid 15c for opening / closing the starting movable piece 15b of the second starting port 15, and the large winning opening opening / closing door 16b. Grand prize opening opening / closing solenoid 16c, first special symbol display device 20 and second special symbol display device 21 for displaying special symbols, ordinary symbol display device 22 for displaying ordinary symbols, and first special for displaying the number of reserved special symbols. The symbol hold indicator 23 and the second special symbol hold indicator 24, the normal symbol hold indicator 25 that displays the number of hold of the normal symbol, the round number indicator 26 that notifies the number of rounds, and the right-handed signal that prompts the right strike. A display 27, an external terminal board 30 for outputting an external information signal, and the like are connected. Various signals are output by this output port for main control.

Based on the input signals from each detection switch and timer, the main CPU 110a reads the program stored in the main ROM 110b and performs arithmetic processing, directly controls each device and display, or produces the result of arithmetic processing. Send commands to other boards accordingly.

In the main ROM 110b, in addition to the game control program, the jackpot determination table used for the jackpot lottery (see FIG. 5), the special symbol determination table for determining the special symbol to be stopped and displayed (see FIG. 6), and the jackpot end. Big hit game end setting data table for determining the later game state (see FIG. 7), special electric accessory operating mode determination table for determining the opening / closing conditions of the large winning opening opening / closing door (see FIG. 8), large winning opening Opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9), special figure variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol (see FIGS. 10 and 11), pre-judgment table for jackpot lottery (see FIGS. 12 and 13), winning lottery. The hit determination table (see FIG. 14) and the like referred to in the above are stored. It should be noted that the above-mentioned table is merely a list of characteristic tables among the tables in the present embodiment as an example, and a large number of tables and programs (not shown) are provided in the progress of the game. ing.

In the main RAM 110c, a special figure special electric processing data storage area, a general figure general electric processing data storage area, a normal symbol holding number (G) storage area, a normal symbol holding storage area, a stopped normal symbol data storage area, and a first special symbol holding Number (U1) storage area, 2nd special symbol hold number (U2) storage area, 1st jackpot determination random value storage area, 2nd jackpot determination random value storage area, round game count (R) storage area, open count (K) Storage area, large winning opening winning ball counter (C) storage area, second starting opening winning ball counter (D), start opening count counter, high probability game flag storage area, time saving game flag storage area, high probability game Number of times (X) storage area, time saving game number of times (J) storage area, game state buffer, stop special figure data storage area, stop normal figure data storage area, transmission data storage area for production, special symbol time counter, special game timer counter , Auxiliary game timer counters and various other timer counters are provided. The above-mentioned storage area is only an example, and many other storage areas are provided.

The external terminal board 30 is a board for outputting an external information signal generated by the main control board 110 and the payout control board 130 to a hall computer or the like of a game store. The external terminal board 30 is connected to the main control board 110 by wiring, and is provided with a plurality of connectors (terminals) for connecting external information to a hall computer or the like of a game store.

The effect control board 120 mainly controls each effect such as during a game or on standby, and has an effect control unit 120 m that comprehensively manages the contents of the effect of the game, and an image control that controls the display of images in the image display device 31. The unit 150, the drive control unit 160 that controls the drive of the solenoid and the motor in the panel drive device 33, and the lamp control that controls the lighting of the LED and the like in the decorative lighting device 34 (panel lighting device 34a, heso lamp 34c, etc.). It is provided with a unit 170.

The effect control board 120 is connected to the main control board 110, the power supply board 140, and the frame control board 180. The communication between the effect control board 120 and the frame control board 180 is configured so that data can be communicated in both directions, and the effect control board 120 inputs the power supply voltage from the power supply board 140.

The effect control unit 120m includes a sub CPU 120a, a sub ROM 120b, and a sub RAM 120c.

The sub CPU 120a is stored in the sub ROM 120b based on a command received from the main control board 110 or an input signal from the effect button detection switch 35a, the lever operation detection switch 36b, etc. received from the frame control board 180 described later. The program is read out and arithmetic processing is performed, and based on the processing, instructions are given to the image control unit 150, the drive control unit 160, the lamp control unit 170, and the frame control board 180 to execute various effects. (Send data).

For example, when the sub CPU 120a receives a variation pattern designation command indicating a variation mode of a special symbol from the main control board 110, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the content of the received variation pattern designation command, and analyzes the contents of the received variation pattern designation command, and the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the panel. Drive device 33, decorative lighting device 34 (panel lighting device 34a, frame lighting device 34b, heso lamp 34c), and effect button drive motor 35b for effect data (variable effect pattern designation described later). Command etc.) is decided. Then, the determined effect data is transmitted to the image control unit 150, the drive control unit 160, the lamp control unit 170, and the frame control board 180 to perform control for executing the variation effect.

In the sub ROM 120b, in addition to the program for controlling the effect, a variable effect pattern determination table for determining the variable effect pattern for executing the variable effect is stored. It should be noted that the above-mentioned table is merely a list of characteristic tables among the tables in the present embodiment as an example, and a large number of tables and programs (not shown) are provided in the progress of the game. ing.

The sub RAM 120c functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the sub CPU 120a, and has a plurality of storage areas.

The image control unit 150 is connected to the image display device 31, and controls the display of the image in the image display device 31 based on various effect data transmitted from the effect control unit 120 m (sub CPU 120a). At this time, a general-purpose substrate 39 having a bridge function of converting the image data into a predetermined image format and outputting the image data is provided between the image control unit 150 and the image display device 31.

The general-purpose board 39 has a bridge function for converting into an image format corresponding to the performance of the image display device 31 that displays image data. For example, a 19-inch liquid crystal display device of SXGA (1280 dots x 1080 dots). Absorbs the difference in resolution between when the image display device 31 is connected and when a 17-inch liquid crystal display device of XGA (1024 dots × 768 dots) is connected as the image display device 31.

The image control unit 150 includes a liquid crystal control CPU 150a, a liquid crystal control RAM 150b, a liquid crystal control ROM 150c, a drawing control unit 151 (VDP: an abbreviation for Video Display Processor), a CGROM 152, a VRAM 153, and a crystal oscillator 154.

The liquid crystal control CPU 150a creates a display list composed of drawing control command groups based on the effect data (variable effect pattern designation command, etc.) transmitted from the effect control unit 120 m, and draws this display list 151. The image data stored in the CGROM 152 is instructed to be displayed on the image display device 31 by transmitting the data to the image display device 31.

Further, when the liquid crystal control CPU 150a receives the V blank interrupt signal or the drawing end signal from the drawing control unit 151, the liquid crystal control CPU 150a appropriately performs interrupt processing.

The liquid crystal control RAM 150b is built in the liquid crystal control CPU 150a, functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the liquid crystal control CPU 150a, and temporarily stores the data read from the liquid crystal control ROM 150c.

Further, the liquid crystal control ROM 150c is composed of a mask ROM or the like, and is a control processing program of the liquid crystal control CPU 150a, a display list generation program for generating a display list, and an animation of an effect using an image corresponding to the effect data. The animation pattern, animation scene information, etc. for displaying the image are stored.

This animation pattern is referred to when displaying the animation, and stores the combination of the animation scene information of the image corresponding to the production data, the display order of each animation scene information, and the like. In addition, the weight frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters (sprite display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, and effect image are displayed in the animation scene information. It stores information such as information that specifies the display device.

The CGROM 152 is composed of a flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie), etc., which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 pixels × 32 pixels). doing. The pixel information is composed of color number information for designating a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. The CGROM 152 is read out in image data units by the drawing control unit 151, and image processing is performed in image data units of this frame.

Further, the CGROM 152 stores the palette data in which the color number information for designating the color number and the display color information for actually displaying the color are associated with each other without compression. The CGROM 152 may be configured to compress only a part of the image data without compressing all the image data. Further, as the movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The crystal oscillator 154 outputs a pulse signal to the drawing control unit 151, and by dividing the pulse signal, the crystal oscillator 154 synchronizes with the system clock for controlling the drawing control unit 151 and the image display device 31. A signal or the like is generated.

The VRAM 153 is composed of an SRAM having a high speed of writing or reading image data. The VRAM 153 has a display list storage area for temporarily storing the display list output from the liquid crystal control CPU 150a, a frame buffer area corresponding to the image display device 31, and the like.

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further has a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" at each start of drawing.

The drawing control unit 151 is a so-called image processor, and draws the image data stored in the CGROM 152 in the “drawing frame buffer” of the frame buffer area of the VRAM 153 based on the instruction (display list) from the liquid crystal control CPU 150a. Further, the drawing control unit 151 reads image data from the "display frame buffer" in the frame buffer area. Then, based on the read image data, a video signal (LVDS signal, RGB signal, etc.) is generated and output to the image display device 31 for display.

The drive control unit 160 is connected to the panel drive device 33, and drives a solenoid, a motor, etc. in the panel drive device 33 based on various production data transmitted from the effect control unit 120m (sub CPU 120a). Take control. Then, by driving and controlling the board driving device 33, the decorative member 33a provided on the game board 2 is driven.

The lamp control unit 170 is connected to the decorative lighting device 34, and controls lighting of LEDs and the like in the decorative lighting device 34 based on various production data transmitted from the effect control unit 120m (sub CPU 120a). Then, by controlling the lighting of the decorative lighting device 34, the board lighting device 34a and the heso lamp 34c provided on the game board 2 are turned on and off in a predetermined mode (predetermined emission color and the like).

The frame control board 180 controls the effect of the sound output device 32 provided on the glass frame 50, the frame lighting device 34b, and the effect button 35.

The frame control board 180 is connected to the effect control board 120 and the power supply board 140, and as described above, the communication between the frame control board 180 and the effect control board 120 is configured so that data can be communicated in both directions. The frame control board 180 inputs the power supply voltage from the power supply board 140.

The frame control board 180 controls to output predetermined audio data to the audio output device 32 based on various effect data transmitted from the effect control board 120, and lights the LED or the like in the frame lighting device 34b. It controls and controls the drive of the effect button drive motor 35b. By the control of the frame control board 180, the sound output device 32 provided in the glass frame 50 outputs sound, the frame lighting device 34b is turned on and off, and the effect button 35 moves in the vertical direction. ..

Further, when the frame control board 180 inputs the input signals from the effect button detection switch 35a and the lever operation detection switch 36b, the frame control board 180 transmits the input signals to the effect control board 120. That is, the effect control board 120 inputs the input signals from the effect button detection switch 35a and the lever operation detection switch 36b via the frame control board 180.

The payout control board 130 includes a payout control unit 131 that controls payout of the game ball and a launch control unit 132 that controls the launch of the game ball.

The payout control board 130 is connected to the main control board 110 and the power supply board 140, and as described above, the communication between the payout control board 130 and the main control board 110 is configured so that data can be communicated in both directions. The payout control board 130 inputs the power supply voltage from the power supply board 140.

The payout control unit 131 is composed of a one-chip microcomputer composed of a payout CPU 131a, a payout ROM 131b, and a payout RAM 131c.

A door opening switch 133, a payout ball count detection switch 135, and a dish full tank detection switch 136 are connected to the input side of the payout control unit 131.

The payout CPU 131a reads the program stored in the payout ROM 131b and performs arithmetic processing based on the payout ball count detection switch 135 for detecting whether or not the game ball has been paid out, the door open switch 133, and the input signal from the timer. At the same time, the corresponding payout data is transmitted to the main control board 110 based on the process.

Further, a payout motor 134 of a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game balls from a storage portion of the game balls is connected to the output side of the payout control board 130. The payout CPU 131a reads a predetermined program from the payout ROM 131b and performs arithmetic processing based on the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, and controls the payout motor 134 of the payout device to play a predetermined game ball. Pay out. At this time, the payout RAM 131c functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the payout CPU 131a.

In the launch control unit 132, the touch sensor 3a and the launch volume 3b are connected to the input side, and the launch solenoid 4a and the ball feed solenoid 4b are connected to the output side. The firing control unit 132 inputs a touch signal from the touch sensor 3a and controls the firing solenoid 4a and the ball feed solenoid 4b to be energized based on the voltage supplied from the firing volume 3b.

The touch sensor 3a is provided inside the operation handle 3, and is composed of a capacitance type proximity switch that utilizes a change in capacitance when the player touches the operation handle 3. When the touch sensor 3a detects that the player touches the operation handle 3, the touch sensor 3a outputs a touch signal permitting the firing solenoid 4a to be energized to the firing control unit 132. As a major premise, the launch control unit 132 is configured so that the game ball Q is not launched into the game area 6 unless a touch signal is input from the touch sensor 3a.

The firing volume 3b is provided directly connected to a rotating portion in which the operation handle 3 rotates, and is composed of a variable resistor. The firing volume 3b divides the constant voltage (for example, 5V) applied to the firing volume 3b by a variable resistor and supplies the divided voltage to the firing control unit 132 (the voltage supplied to the firing control unit 132). Variable). The launch control unit 132 energizes the launch solenoid 4a based on the voltage divided by the launch volume 3b, and rotates the launch member (not shown) directly connected to the launch solenoid 4a to play a game. The ball Q is fired in the game area 6.

The launching solenoid 4a is composed of a rotary solenoid, and a launching member (not shown) is directly connected to the launching solenoid 4a. The launching solenoid 4a rotates to rotate the launching member.

Here, the rotation speed of the firing solenoid 4a is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 132. As a result, the number of firing games in one minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute) because one is fired for each rotation of the firing solenoid. That is, one game ball is fired about every 0.6 seconds.

The ball feed solenoid 4b is composed of a straight-moving solenoid, and feeds the game balls in the saucer 40 one by one toward the launching member directly connected to the launch solenoid 4a.

The power supply board 140 includes a backup power supply composed of a capacitor, supplies a power supply voltage to the gaming machine 1, monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, The power failure detection signal is output to the main control board 110. More specifically, when the power failure detection signal reaches a high level, the main CPU 110a is in an operable state, and when the power failure detection signal becomes a low level, the main CPU 110a is in an operation stopped state. The backup power supply is not limited to the capacitor, and may be, for example, a battery, or the capacitor and the battery may be used in combination.

(Explanation of game status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, the state relating to the jackpot lottery has a "low probability gaming state" and the "high probability gaming state", and the state relating to the startable movable piece 15b possessed by the second starting port 15 is a "non-time saving gaming state". It has a "time saving game state". The state related to the jackpot lottery (low-probability gaming state, high-probability gaming state) and the state related to the startable movable piece 15b (non-time-saving game state, time-saving game state) can be related to each other or can be made independent. can. in short,
(1) "Low-probability time-saving game state", which is a low-probability game state and time-saving game state,
(2) "Low-probability non-time-saving game state", which is a low-probability game state and non-time-saving game state,
(3) "High-probability time-saving game state", which is a high-probability game state and time-saving game state,
(4) It is possible to provide a "high-probability non-time-saving game state" which is a high-probability non-time-saving game state and a non-time-saving game state.
The game state when the game is started, that is, the initial game state of the game machine 1, is set to the "low probability non-time saving game state", and this game state is set to the "normal game state" in the present embodiment. I will call it.

In the present embodiment, the "low probability gaming state" means that the jackpot winning probability is the jackpot winning probability in the jackpot lottery conducted on the condition that the game ball enters the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15. For example, it refers to a gaming state set as low as 1/300. On the other hand, the "high probability gaming state" refers to a gaming state in which the jackpot winning probability is improved as compared with the low probability gaming state, and the jackpot winning probability is set as high as, for example, 1/60. Therefore, in the "high-probability gaming state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low-probability gaming state". The change from the low-probability gaming state to the high-probability gaming state is performed after the jackpot game, which will be described later, is completed.

In the present embodiment, the "non-time saving game state" means that in the winning lottery executed based on the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 13, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is "time saving game". A gaming state that is set longer than the "state" and that the opening time of the second starting port 15 when a winner is won is short and easy to set. For example, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13, a winning lottery is performed and the normal symbol display device 22 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol, but the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, for example, 30 seconds after the start of the variable display. It will be stopped and displayed later. Then, when the lottery result is successful, the second starting port 15 is controlled in the open mode for 0.2 seconds after the stop display of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, the "time saving game state" means that in the winning lottery executed based on the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 13, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is "non-time saving game". It refers to a gaming state that is set shorter than the "state" and that the opening time of the second starting port 15 when a winner is won is, for example, 3 seconds, which is longer than the "non-time saving gaming state". Further, in the "non-time saving game state", the probability of winning in the winning lottery is set as low as 1/16, and in the "time saving game state", the probability of winning in the winning lottery is as high as 15/16, for example. Set. Therefore, in the "time-saving game state", when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13, the second starting port 15 is more likely to be controlled in the open state than in the "non-time-saving game state". As a result, in the "short-time game state", the player can proceed with the game while suppressing the consumption of the game ball.

In this way, in the time-saving game state, the game can be played with less consumption of the game ball (at a high base) than in the non-time-saving game state. In the following description, the non-time saving gaming state may be described as a "low base state", and the time saving gaming state may be described as a "high base state".

In addition, the non-time gaming state may be described simply as "non-electric support in progress", and the time-saving gaming state may be simply described as "electric support in progress".

In the embodiment, the "time-saving game state" is more advantageous than the "non-time-saving game state" in that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 15, and the winning probability of the winning lottery are advantageous. It is set. However, the "time saving game state" may be set so that only one of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 15, and the winning probability of the winning lottery is advantageous.

Next, the details of the various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 14.

(Big hit judgment table of big hit lottery)
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table. Specifically, FIG. 5A is a jackpot determination table for a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 14, and FIG. 5B is a jackpot determination table for the second starting port 15. It is a jackpot judgment table of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball. In the tables of FIGS. 5 (a) and 5 (b), the jackpot probabilities are the same.

As shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B, the jackpot determination table is associated with the probability game state, the jackpot determination random value, and the jackpot determination result.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table of the jackpot lottery shown in FIGS. 5 (a) and 5 (b), and is a "big hit" based on the current probability game state and the acquired jackpot determination random value. It is judged whether it is "missing" or "missing".

For example, according to the jackpot determination table of the jackpot lottery shown in FIG. 5A, two jackpot determination random numbers "7" and "8" are determined to be jackpots in the low probability gaming state. On the other hand, in the high-probability gaming state, 10 jackpot determination random numbers from "7" to "16" are determined to be jackpots. If the value is a random number other than the above, it is determined to be "missing".

Therefore, since the random number range of the random number value for jackpot determination is 0 to 599, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the low probability gaming state is 1/300, and it is determined to be a jackpot in the high probability gaming state. The probability is increased by 5 times to 1/60.

(Special design determination table)
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for determining the type of special symbol that is stopped and displayed as a result of variable display. Specifically, FIG. 6A is a special symbol determination table for loss, and FIG. 6B is a special symbol determination table for jackpots.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the special symbol determination table in the loss is acquired when the type of the special symbol display device and the game ball enters the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15. The random value for determining the special symbol and the lost special symbol (stop special symbol data) are associated with each other. In addition, a plurality of lost special symbols and a random value for determining a special symbol may be associated with each other so that a plurality of special symbols can be determined even in the case of loss.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, in the special symbol determination table in the jackpot, the type of the special symbol display device (type of the starting port in which the game ball has won a prize) and the first starting port 14 or the second starting port are displayed. The special symbol determination random value acquired when the game ball enters the mouth 15 is associated with the jackpot special symbol (stop special symbol data).

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 6 and determines the type of special symbol (stop special symbol data) based on the type of the special symbol display device, the random value for determining the special symbol, and the like.

Then, at the start of the change of the special symbol, the effect symbol designation command as the information of the special symbol is determined based on the determined type of the special symbol (stop special symbol data). Here, in the effect symbol specification command, one command is composed of two bytes of data, one byte of MODE data for identifying the classification of the control command, and one byte of DATA indicating the content of the control command to be executed. It consists of data. This also applies to the fluctuation pattern specification command and the like, which will be described later.

Here, as will be described later, the game state after the end of the jackpot game (see FIG. 7) and the type of the jackpot game (see FIG. 8) are determined by the type of the special symbol (stop special symbol data). , It can be said that the type of the special symbol determines the game state and the type of the jackpot game after the jackpot game is completed. Therefore, in the column of the special symbol in FIG. 6B, the explanation corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is supplementarily described.

(Setting data table at the end of the jackpot game)
FIG. 7 is a data table set at the end of the jackpot game for determining the game state after the jackpot game ends.

As shown in FIG. 7, in the big hit game end setting data table, the stop special figure data of the special symbol, the game state buffer, the game state after the big hit end, the time saving game number (J), and the high probability game number (X) is associated with.

Here, the "game state buffer" is information indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. The gaming state is composed of a combination of a time-saving gaming state (or non-time-saving gaming state) and a high-probability gaming state (or low-probability gaming state).

Specifically, when the game state buffer is "00H", the game state information of the low-probability game state and the non-time-saving game state in which both the time-saving game flag and the high-probability game flag are not set is shown. If the game state buffer is "01H", the time-saving game flag is not set, but the high-probability game flag is set to indicate the game state information of the high-probability game state and the non-time-saving game state. When the game state buffer is "02H", it indicates the game state information of the low-probability game state and the time-saving game state in which the time-saving game flag is set but the high-probability game flag is not set. When the game state buffer is "03H", it indicates the game state information of the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state in which both the time-saving game flag and the high-probability game flag are set.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot game end time setting data table shown in FIG. 7, and based on the stop special figure data of the special symbol and the game state buffer, the game state after the jackpot end and the number of time-saving games (J) And the number of high-probability games (X) are determined.

The feature of the jackpot game end time setting data table shown in FIG. 7 in the present embodiment is that the time saving game state (high probability time saving game state or low probability time saving game state) is determined after all the jackpot games are completed. Has been done.

In addition, 10000 times may be set as the number of time-saving games (J) and the number of high-probability games (X), but when the jackpot probability is taken into consideration, the jackpot games will be played by the time the variable display of 10000 times is executed. Since it is almost never not executed, 10,000 times can be rephrased as substantially until the next big hit game.

In the present embodiment, when the stop special symbol data of the special symbol is "stop special symbol data 01 (special symbol 1)", there is a high probability after the jackpot ends regardless of the game state before the jackpot game is executed. It will shift to the time-saving game state.
Further, when the stop special symbol data of the special symbol is "stop special symbol data 02 (special symbol 2)", the high-probability time-saving gaming state is achieved after the jackpot is completed, regardless of the gaming state before the jackpot game is executed. Will move to.
In addition, when the stop special symbol data of the special symbol is "stop special symbol data 03 (special symbol 3)", the low-probability time-saving gaming state is achieved after the jackpot is completed, regardless of the gaming state before the jackpot game is executed. Will move to.
Further, when the stop special symbol data of the special symbol is "stop special symbol data 04 (special symbol 4)", the high-probability time-saving gaming state is achieved after the jackpot is completed, regardless of the gaming state before the jackpot game is executed. Will move to.
Further, when the stop special symbol data of the special symbol is "stop special symbol data 05 (special symbol 5)", the low-probability time-saving gaming state is achieved after the jackpot is completed, regardless of the gaming state before the jackpot game is executed. Will move to.

(Special electric accessory operation mode determination table)
FIG. 8 is a special electric accessory operation mode determination table for determining the grand prize opening opening mode table. As will be described later, since the jackpot game is executed based on this jackpot opening mode table, it can be said that the jackpot opening mode table indicates the type of the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the "table" may be abbreviated as "TBL" as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 8, in the special electric accessory operation mode determination table, the stop special figure data of the special symbol and the large winning opening opening mode table are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a will refer to the special electric accessory operation mode determination table shown in FIG. 8 and determine the special winning opening opening mode table based on the stop special figure data of the special symbol.

(Large winning opening opening mode table)
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the configuration of the large winning opening opening mode table determined in FIG. 8, and the opening / closing conditions of the large winning opening opening / closing door 16b are determined by the large winning opening opening mode table.

Specifically, it is a group of jackpot opening mode determination tables for jackpots, which is referred to during a jackpot game, and is a first jackpot table, a second jackpot table, a third jackpot table, a fourth jackpot table, and a fifth. It consists of a jackpot table.

In the table for determining the opening mode of the big winning opening shown in FIG. 9, the maximum number of round games in one big hit game, the specified number indicating the maximum number of winnings in the big winning opening in one round, and the first from the start of the big hit game. Opening time until the round game is executed, the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening in each round game, one opening time of the big winning opening in each round game, and one big winning opening in each round game The closing time of the game, the interval time until the next round game is executed, and the ending time from the end of the last round game to the end of the jackpot game are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a executes the first jackpot game based on the first jackpot table, executes the second jackpot game based on the second jackpot table, executes the third jackpot game based on the third jackpot table, and executes the third jackpot game. The 4th jackpot game is executed based on the 4 jackpot table, and the 5th jackpot game is executed based on the 5th jackpot table.

According to the first jackpot table and the fourth jackpot table shown in FIG. 9, the jackpot opening / closing door 16b is operated to open the jackpot 16 on the right side of the game area 6 for a maximum of 29 seconds per round. The round game to be released can be executed for 10 rounds (10 times). However, if a specified number (9) of game balls win the large winning opening 16 by the time when the opening time has passed 29 seconds, one round of games will be completed. Then, when the 10-round game is completed, the jackpot game is completed.

According to the second jackpot table, the third jackpot table, and the fifth jackpot table shown in FIG. 9, the jackpot opening / closing door 16b is operated to open the jackpot 16 on the right side of the game area 6 in one round. A round game that opens up to 29 seconds per game can be executed for 4 rounds (4 times). However, if a specified number (9) of game balls win the large winning opening 16 by the time when the opening time has passed 29 seconds, one round of games will be completed. Then, when the 4-round game is completed, the jackpot game is completed.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern determination table)
10 and 11 are diagrams showing a special figure variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern (variation time, etc.) of a special symbol as will be described later. Note that FIG. 10 shows a special symbol variation pattern determination table of the first special symbol display device, and FIG. 11 shows a special symbol variation pattern determination table of the second special symbol display device.

As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table, the jackpot determination result, the special symbol (stop special symbol data), the reach determination random value, and the number of reserved special symbols (U1 or) U2), the random value for special symbol variation, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol are associated with each other.

Therefore, it can be said that the "variation pattern of the special symbol" determines at least the determination result of the jackpot and the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Further, since the reach is always performed at the time of a big hit, the reach determination random value is not referred to at the time of a big hit. The reach determination random number value has a random number range set to 97 (0 to 96), and the special figure variation random number value has a random number range set to 100 (0 to 99).

Further, in the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the variation pattern (1) is such that the average variation time of the special symbol becomes shorter as the number of reserved special symbols (U1 or U2) increases. The fluctuation time (Th2) of the fluctuation pattern (2) (shortening fluctuation) is set to be shorter than the fluctuation time (Th1) of (normal fluctuation). For example, the fluctuation time (Th1) of the fluctuation pattern (1) (normal fluctuation) is set to 12 seconds, and the fluctuation time (Th2) of the fluctuation pattern (2) (shortening fluctuation) is set to 3 seconds. The maximum number of balls "4" may be stored as the number of reserved special symbols, but the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined after subtracting 1 from the number of reserved special symbols. Therefore, "4" is not referred to as the number of reservations.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, and refers to a special symbol display device (type of starting port), a lottery result of a jackpot lottery, a special symbol to be stopped, and a number of special symbol reservations (U1, Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol and the fluctuation time of the special symbol are determined based on U2), the reach determination random value, and the special symbol variation random value.

Then, based on the determined variation pattern of the special symbol, the variation pattern designation command of the special symbol is generated, and the information of the variation pattern of the special symbol is transmitted to the effect control board 120.

Here, the variation pattern designation command of the special symbol is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the classification of the command and 1-byte DATA data indicating the content (function) of the command. In the present embodiment, when the MODE data is "E6H", a command for specifying a variation pattern of the special symbol of the first special symbol display device 20 corresponding to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 14 is shown, and the MODE data is used as the MODE data. When it is "E7H", a command for designating a variation pattern of the special symbol of the second special symbol display device 21 corresponding to the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 15 is shown.

Further, in the effect control board 120, as will be described later, the effect content such as the effect symbol 38 is determined based on the variation pattern (variation pattern designation command) of the special symbol. In the rightmost column of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the effect contents such as the effect symbol 38 are described for reference.

Here, as the production contents, "normal fluctuation" and "shortening fluctuation" mean that a plurality of production symbols 38 fluctuate apart at high speed and stop without reaching, and are referred to as normal fluctuation. It differs from the shortened fluctuation in that the shortened fluctuation ends in a shorter fluctuation time than the normal fluctuation.

Further, "reach" is a variation mode that gives the player a sense of expectation of a jackpot, such that a part of the combination of the effect symbols 38 that notifies the jackpot is temporarily stopped and the other effect symbols 38 fluctuate. Means. For example, when a combination of three-digit effect symbols 38 of "777" is set as a combination of effect symbols 38 for notifying a jackpot, two effect symbols 38 are temporarily stopped at "7", and the remaining effects are produced. A mode in which the symbol 38 is fluctuating. The "temporary stop" refers to a mode in which the effect symbol 38 sways slightly or the effect symbol 38 is slightly deformed to make the player appear as if the effect symbol 38 is stopped.

Further, "normal reach" means a reach with a low expectation (hereinafter referred to as "big hit expectation") in which a jackpot game in which two effect symbols 38 are temporarily stopped and the remaining one effect symbol 38 fluctuates is executed. doing. In the present embodiment, the "normal reach" does not make a big hit, but the "normal reach" may be used to make a big hit.
In addition, "SP reach" means a super reach with a higher expectation of a big hit than a normal reach. For example, it refers to a mode in which the effect symbol 38 that has not been temporarily stopped makes a special change or a special character is displayed.
In addition, "SPSP reach" means a special reach that is performed after the super reach and has a higher expectation of a big hit than the super reach.
Further, the "full rotation reach" means a mode in which the combination of a plurality of effect symbols 38 for notifying the jackpot changes at a low speed in a state where all the combinations are aligned, and in the present embodiment, only when the jackpot lottery is won. It means reach to be executed.

Further, the "pseudo-ream" means that the effect symbol 38 is temporarily stopped and then changed again during the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to one big hit lottery, and the effect symbol 38 is changed and temporarily stopped. Means a variation mode in which

(Preliminary judgment table for big hit lottery)
12 and 13 are diagrams showing a pre-determination table for preliminarily determining the result of the jackpot lottery. Note that FIG. 12 shows a pre-determination table of the first special symbol display device, and FIG. 13 shows a pre-determination table of the second special symbol display device.

As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, in the pre-judgment table, a random value for jackpot judgment, a random value for determining a special symbol, a random value for reach judgment, a random value for special figure fluctuation, and a planned fluctuation pattern are displayed. It is associated.

Here, it is possible to determine in advance whether it is a "big hit" or a "miss" by the jackpot determination random value acquired when the game ball enters the starting port, and the special symbol type (big hit special) by the special symbol determination random number value. It is possible to determine in advance (designs, special lost symbols).
Furthermore, since the planned fluctuation pattern (the content of the effect such as the presence or absence of reach and the type of reach) can be determined in advance by the reach determination random value and the special figure variation random value, the start opening prize designation command can be used. It is possible to include the type of jackpot and the scheduled fluctuation pattern.

The main CPU 110a refers to the pre-judgment table shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, and refers to a special symbol display device (type of starting port), a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for determining a special symbol, a random value for reach determination, and The planned fluctuation pattern is determined based on the random value for special figure fluctuation. Then, a start opening winning designation command is generated according to the determined scheduled fluctuation pattern.

This start opening prize designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the classification of the command and 1-byte DATA data indicating the content (function) of the command. In the present embodiment, when the MODE data is "E8H", the start opening winning designation command corresponding to the winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 14 is shown, and when the MODE data is "E9H", the second start is started. The starting mouth winning designation command corresponding to the winning of the game ball is shown in the mouth 15.

As described above, the starting port winning designation command includes information relating to the type of starting port (first starting port 14 or second starting port 15) that has won a prize. Further, as described above, the start opening winning designation command includes information related to the planned fluctuation pattern (planned fluctuation pattern) and information related to the type of jackpot. Further, the start opening winning designation command includes information on the current gaming state (whether it is a non-short-time gaming state, a short-time gaming state, a low-probability gaming state, or a high-probability gaming state). There is.

The preliminary determination table shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 is similar to the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 10 and 11. However, while the pre-judgment table shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 is used when the game ball enters the starting port, the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 is used at the start of variation of the special symbol. It is different in that it can be done. In addition, there is a difference whether or not to refer to the "number of pending".

Therefore, in the pre-judgment tables shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the types of jackpots and reach can be discriminated, but only "normal fluctuation" and "shortening fluctuation" cannot be discriminated (FIG. 12). And “Scheduled variation pattern” shown in FIG. 13).

Further, the pre-judgment table shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 is a pre-judgment table for the jackpot lottery referred to in the low-probability gaming state, but although not shown, the pre-judgment table referred to in the high-probability gaming state is prior to the jackpot lottery. The determination table is also stored in the main ROM 110b.
The jackpot lottery pre-judgment table referred to in the high-probability gaming state has the same configuration as the pre-judgment table shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, but whether it is a “big hit” or a “miss”. The value of the jackpot judgment random value for judgment in advance is different.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a table relating to a normal symbol and a startable movable piece 15b of the second start port 15. Specifically, FIG. 14A is a diagram showing a winning determination table of a winning lottery, and FIG. 14B is an ordinary symbol for determining the type of ordinary symbol that is stopped and displayed as a result of variable display. It is a figure which shows the symbol determination table. Further, FIG. 14 (c) shows a normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation time of a normal symbol, and FIG. 14 (d) shows an opening mode of the startable movable piece 15b when a winning lottery is won. It is a figure which shows the start opening opening mode determination table for determination.

(Collision detection table for winning lottery)
As shown in FIG. 14A, the hit determination table is associated with the presence / absence of a time-saving game state, a random value for hit determination, and a hit determination result.

The main CPU 110a refers to the hit determination table shown in FIG. 14A, and determines whether it is a “hit” or a “loss” based on the current time-saving game state and the acquired random value for the hit determination. judge. For example, according to the hit determination table shown in FIG. 14 (a), in the non-time saving game state, one specific hit determination random value of "0" is determined to be a hit. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state, 15 hit determination random values from "0" to "14" are determined to be hits. If the value is a random number other than the above, it is determined to be "missing". Therefore, since the random number range of the random number value for hit determination is 0 to 15, the probability of being determined to be a hit in the non-time-saving game state is 1/16, and the probability of being determined to be a hit in the time-saving game state is 15. / 16.

(Normal symbol determination table)
As shown in FIG. 14B, the presence / absence of the time-saving game state, the hit determination result, the random value for determining the normal symbol, and the normal symbol (stopped normal symbol data) are associated with each other in the normal symbol determination table. There is.

The main CPU 110a refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 14B, and stops and displays the normal symbol based on the current time-saving game state, the hit determination result, and the acquired normal symbol determination random value. Determine (stop map data).

Then, at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the main CPU 110a determines the normal symbol designation command as the information of the normal symbol based on the determined normal symbol type (stop normal symbol data), and determines the normal symbol designation command. Will be transmitted to the effect control board 120.

Here, as shown in FIG. 14D, since the opening mode of the start movable piece 15b is determined by the normal symbol (stop normal symbol data), the type of the normal symbol determines the opening mode of the start movable piece 15b. It can be said that it will be decided.

(Public map fluctuation pattern determination table)
FIG. 14 (c) is a diagram showing a normal map fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern (variation time, etc.) of a normal symbol as will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 14 (c), the presence / absence of the time saving game state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, the random value for the normal figure change, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are associated with each other in the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table. ing.

The main CPU 110a refers to the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14 (c), and based on the current time-saving game state, the hit determination result, and the acquired random number value for the normal map variation, the normal symbol Determine the fluctuation time.

Then, at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the main CPU 110a determines the normal symbol fluctuation designation command as the information of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol based on the determined fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and determines the normal symbol fluctuation designation command. Will be transmitted to the effect control board 120.

As a feature of the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14 (c), the fluctuation time of the time-saving gaming state (3 seconds or 5 seconds) is the fluctuation time of the non-time-saving gaming state (30 seconds or 40 seconds). It is configured to be shorter than.

(Starting port opening mode determination table for movable pieces)
As shown in FIG. 14 (d), the start port opening mode determination table includes the stop normal figure data (normal symbol), the maximum number of times the start movable piece 15b is opened, the opening time of the auxiliary game, and the second start port 15. The opening time, the interval time, and the ending time of the auxiliary game are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a refers to the start port opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 14D, and based on the stop chart data, the maximum number of times the start movable piece 15b is opened, the opening time, the opening time, the closing time, the interval time, and the like. Determine the ending time.

In the present embodiment, in the start port opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 14D, the starting port opening mode based on the stop chart data = 02 is more advantageous than the starting mouth opening mode based on the stop chart data = 01. It is an opening mode, and the opening mode based on the stop chart data = 03 is a more advantageous opening mode than the starting port opening mode based on the stop chart data = 02.

Then, as shown in the normal symbol determination table of FIG. 14B, when a hit occurs in the time-saving game state, the stop normal map data = 03, which is the most advantageous opening mode, is selected. As a result, in the time-saving game state, the startable movable piece 15b operates more favorably to the player than in the non-time-saving game state.

(Various storage areas)
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 15A shows special figure determination information (random value for jackpot determination, special symbol determination) acquired when a game ball enters the first start port 14 or the second start port 15. FIG. 15B is a diagram showing a special figure determination information storage area in which a random number value, a random value for reach determination, and a random value for special figure variation) are stored. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure, and FIG. It is a general figure determination information storage area in which a random value) is stored, and FIG. 15D is a diagram showing a configuration of each storage unit of the general figure determination information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 15A, the special figure determination information storage area stores the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 14, and the first special figure determination information hold storage. The area, the second special figure judgment information reserved storage area in which the special figure judgment information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 15 is stored, and the special figure judgment information in which the variation display is being executed are stored. It is composed of a special figure execution storage area, and the first special figure determination information reservation storage area and the second special figure determination information reservation storage area are divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit, respectively. There is.

The number of undetermined special symbol determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol determination information reserved storage area is the first special symbol reservation number (U1), and these undetermined numbers are determined. The number of hold icons corresponding to the special figure judgment information is displayed in the first hold icon display area 72a, and the number of undetermined special figure judgment information stored in the second special figure judgment information hold storage area is the second special symbol. The number of holds (U2) is set, and the number of hold icons corresponding to these undetermined special figure determination information is displayed in the second hold icon display area 72b, and the variation display (variation effect) stored in the special figure execution storage area is displayed. The variation icon corresponding to the special figure determination information being executed is displayed in the variation icon display area 73.

Further, the number of undetermined special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special figure determination information reserved storage area is the number of undetermined special figure determination information stored in the first reserved number display area provided in the image display device 31. The number of undetermined special figure determination information displayed as a number in 74a and stored in the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is displayed as a number in the second reserved number display area 74b provided in the image display device 31. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 15B, each storage unit has a jackpot determination random value storage area for storing a jackpot determination random value, and a special symbol determination random value for storing a special symbol determination random value. It is divided into a numerical storage area, a reach determination random value storage area for storing the reach determination random value, and a special figure variation random value storage area for storing the special figure variation random value.

Then, when the game ball enters the first starting port 14 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the special figure determination information is stored in the first to fourth storage units of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area. The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit having the smallest number that is not stored. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 15 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the special figure determination information is stored in the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit having the smallest number that is not stored.

In the special figure execution storage area, when the start condition of the variable display of the first special symbol is satisfied, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted, and the first special figure determination information is shifted. Referenced to perform variable display of symbols. Further, when the start condition of the variation display of the second special symbol is satisfied, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special symbol determination information reservation storage area is shifted, and the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. Referenced to perform.

As shown in FIG. 15 (c), the normal figure determination information storage area includes a normal figure determination information holding storage area in which the normal figure determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 13 is stored. It is composed of a normal map execution storage area in which the normal map determination information during execution of the variable display is stored, and the normal map determination information reservation storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit. The number of undetermined normal figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units of the normal symbol determination information reservation storage area is the normal symbol reservation number (G).

As shown in FIG. 15D, each storage unit has a hit determination random value storage area for storing a hit determination random value and a normal symbol determination random value for storing a normal symbol determination random value. It is divided into a numerical storage area and a random value storage area for normal map fluctuation for storing random values for normal map fluctuation. Then, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 13 and the normal map determination information is acquired, the normal symbol determination information is not stored in the first to fourth storage units of the normal symbol determination information reservation storage area. The acquired general map determination information is stored in the storage unit having the smallest number.

When the start condition for the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied, the normal symbol execution storage area shifts the normal symbol judgment information stored in the first storage unit of the normal symbol judgment information reservation storage area, and displays the normal symbol variation display. Referenced to perform.

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a main process on the main control board 110.

When power is supplied by the power supply board 140, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 110a, and the main CPU 110a performs the following main processing.

First, the main CPU 110a performs the initialization process configured by steps S1 to S14. Specifically, the main CPU 110a permits access to the main RAM 110c in step S1.

In step S2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the backup flag indicating that the power is restored is set in the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is set, the process is transferred to step S3, and if the backup flag is not set, the process is transferred to step S11.

In step S3, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum of the main RAM 110c, and in step S4, the checksum stored in the main RAM 110c at the time of the previous power failure is compared with the newly calculated checksum, and the checksum is calculated. Judge whether it is normal or not. If the checksum is normal, the process is moved to step S5, and if the checksum is not normal, there is an abnormality in the data stored in the main RAM 110c (the control state before the power is turned off cannot be restored normally). ), The process is moved to step S11.

In step S5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 111a is ON. If the RAM clear switch 111a is not ON, the process is moved to step S6 to perform the process at the time of power restoration, and if the RAM clear switch 111a is ON, the RAM clear process is performed. The process is transferred to S12.

In step S6, the main CPU 110a clears the backup flag and checksum stored in the main RAM 110c, and sets the RAM at the time of power restoration. By performing this process, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (recovered) to the state before the power is turned off, so that the game can be restarted from the state before the power is turned off.

In step S6, in step S6, among the backup flags stored in the main RAM 110c, the abnormal winning error flag, the magnetic detection error flag, and the winning frequency abnormal error flag, which will be described later, are set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. If so, clear these flags. That is, an abnormal winning error flag indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred, a magnetic detection error flag indicating that a magnetic detection error has occurred, and a winning frequency abnormality indicating that an abnormal winning frequency error has occurred. The error flag is cleared by power restoration if it was set in the state before the power was turned off.

In step S7, the main CPU 110a makes initial settings for devices around the CPU. Specifically, the output setting to the effect control board 120, the setting of the CTC (CounterTimerCircuit) to be used, the interrupt timer (4 milliseconds) of the CTC to be used, and the like are set.

In step S8, the main CPU 110a sets a power restoration command indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the occurrence of a power failure in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and shifts the process to step S9. .. As a result, the power restoration command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs a process for executing the power restoration notification.

The power recovery notification means that the image display device 31 displays a power recovery screen (for example, the error notification dedicated image 300B in FIG. 99) indicating that the power has been restored, or that the power has been restored from the audio output device 32. It is to output the power recovery notification sound shown. The power restoration notification will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 99 and the like.

It should be noted that the power recovery command may not include the information indicating the current gaming state, and the game state designation command indicating the current gaming state may be transmitted before or after the power recovery command is transmitted.

In step S9, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol storage designation command indicating the first special symbol hold number (U1) and the second special symbol hold number (U2) in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, the effect control board 120 can grasp the number of special symbol reservations, and the image display device 31 has a first hold icon or a second hold icon. Will be processed to display.

In step S10, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol storage designation command indicating the number of reserved normal symbols (G) in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 can grasp the number of normal symbol storages.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a clears all the areas of the main RAM 110c, sets the RAM at the time of turning on the power, and shifts the processing to step S13.

In step S12, the main CPU 110a clears the used area of the main RAM 110c, sets the RAM at the time of turning on the power, and shifts the process to step S13. By performing this process, the progress state (control state) of the game is initialized to the initial state.

Here, when the abnormal winning error flag, the magnetic detection error flag, and the winning frequency abnormal error flag, which will be described later, are turned on in the main RAM 110c in step S12, the main CPU 110a also clears these flags.

In the following description, turning on the power (with the operation of the RAM clear switch 111a) in the state where the RAM clear switch 111a is turned on may be described as "RAM clear operation". Further, power-on without operating the RAM clear switch 111a may be described as "power recovery operation".

As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the abnormal winning error flag, the magnetic detection error flag, and the winning frequency abnormal error flag are cleared by performing either the RAM clearing operation or the power restoration operation. The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and the abnormal winning error flag, the magnetic detection error flag, and the winning frequency abnormal error flag are not cleared by the power recovery operation, and the RAM clearing operation is performed. It may be cleared only by.

In step S13, the main CPU 110a makes initial settings for devices around the CPU. Specifically, the output setting to the effect control board 120, the setting of the CTC (CounterTimerCircuit) to be used, the interrupt timer (4 milliseconds) of the CTC to be used, and the like are set.

In step S14, the main CPU 110a sets a RAM clear command indicating that the game control state has been initialized (RAM cleared) in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and shifts the process to step S15. As a result, the RAM clear command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs a process for executing the RAM clear notification.

The RAM clear notification includes displaying a notification image (for example, the error notification dedicated image 300A in FIG. 98) indicating that the RAM has been cleared on the image display device 31, or performing the RAM clear from the sound output device 32. It is to output a RAM clear notification sound indicating that (the main RAM 110c has been initialized). The RAM clear notification will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 98 and the like.

In step S15, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the reach determination random number value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the special symbol variation random value, and in step S16, the jackpot determination The initial random value, the initial random value for determining a special symbol, the initial random value for collision detection, and the initial random value for determining a normal symbol are updated.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the power failure detection signal is input from the power failure detection circuit provided on the power supply board 140. When a power failure occurs, the process is transferred to step S18, and when a power failure does not occur, the process is transferred to step S15 so that the process loops.

The main CPU 110a prohibits timer interruption in step S18, clears the output port in step S19, calculates a checksum of the main RAM 110c in step S20, sets it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and sets it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. In step S22, the backup flag to be referred to when recovering from the power failure is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, access to the main RAM 110c is prohibited, and the device waits until the supply of the power supply voltage is completely cut off.

When the power is turned off and when the power is turned on, the checksums of all used areas of the main RAM 110c are calculated and compared, but all areas including unused areas are checked. The sums may be calculated and compared.

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process on the main control board 110.

The reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 generates clock pulses at predetermined cycles (4 milliseconds), so that the timer interrupt process described below is executed.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register of the main CPU 110a into the stack area.

The main CPU 110a performs the time control process in step S110. Specifically, the update process of the special symbol time counter, the update process of the special game timer counter such as the opening time of the special electric accessory, the update process of the normal symbol time counter, the update process of the opening / closing time of the startable movable piece 15b, etc. Performs a process of updating (subtracting 1) various timer counters.

The main CPU 110a performs a random number update process in step S120. Specifically, the process of updating the jackpot determination random value, the special symbol determination random value, the hit determination random value, the normal symbol determination random value, and the normal symbol variation random value is performed. More specifically, each random number value and random number counter are added by 1. If the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is returned to 0, and each random number value is newly updated from the initial random number value at that time. ..

The main CPU 110a performs the initial random number value update process in step S130. Specifically, the process of updating (adding 1) the initial random number value for jackpot determination, the initial random number value for special symbol determination, the initial random number value for hit determination, and the initial random number value for normal symbol determination is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs the input control process in step S200. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches of the general winning opening detection switch 12a, the large winning opening detection switch 16a, the first starting opening detection switch 14a, the second starting opening detection switch 15a, and the gate detection switch 13a. , When there is an input, the process of setting the predetermined data is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs the special figure special electric control process. Specifically, it performs a process of controlling a big hit lottery, a variable display of a special symbol, opening / closing of a big winning opening 16, a change in a game state, and the like. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs the normal drawing control processing. Specifically, a process of controlling a winning lottery, a variable display of a normal symbol, opening / closing of a startable movable piece 15b, and the like is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 28.

The main CPU 110a performs the payout control process in step S500. Specifically, each prize ball counter is referred to, a payout number designation command corresponding to each winning opening is generated, and a process of setting the payout number designation command in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c is performed. As a result, the payout number designation command is transmitted to the payout control board 130, and a process for paying out the number of game balls corresponding to the payout number designation command from the payout device is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs error detection processing in step S600. Specifically, processing is performed to determine whether or not various errors such as an abnormal winning error, a magnetic detection error, and a winning frequency abnormal error are detected. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 31.

The main CPU 110a performs an error clearing process in step S610. Specifically, when various error events such as a winning frequency abnormality error and a door opening error are detected, a process of determining whether or not the error event has been resolved is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 32.

The main CPU 110a performs the game progress data creation process in step S700. Specifically, the external information signal output from the external terminal board 30, the drive data of the starting port opening / closing solenoid 15c, the driving data of the winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c, the display data of the first special symbol display device 20, and the second special symbol. Display data of the display device 21, display data of the normal symbol display device 22, display data of the first special symbol hold display 23, display data of the second special symbol hold display 24, display data of the normal symbol hold display 25, etc. Performs the process of creating output data related to the progress of the game.

The main CPU 110a performs the output control process in step S800. Specifically, a process of outputting various display data created in step S700 is performed. In addition, processing for transmitting commands set in the effect transmission data storage area and the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c to the effect control board 120 and the payout control board 130 is also performed.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
The input control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an input control process on the main control board 110.

In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 12a, and when the detection signal is input, a process of adding 1 to the prize ball counter for the general winning opening is performed.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the large winning opening detection switch 16a, and when the detection signal is input, a process of adding 1 to the winning ball counter for the large winning opening is performed.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs the first start port detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the first start port detection switch 14a, and when the detection signal is input, 1 is added to the prize ball counter for the first start port, and the first special If the number of symbol reservations (U1) is less than 4, the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is added by 1, and special symbol determination information is acquired to obtain a predetermined storage unit (first) of the special symbol determination information storage area. The process of storing in the storage unit to the fourth storage unit) is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs the second start port detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 15a is input, and when the detection signal is input, 1 is added to the prize ball counter for the second start port, and the second If the number of special symbol reservations (U2) is less than 4, the second number of special symbol reservations (U2) is added by 1, and the special symbol determination information is acquired to obtain the special symbol determination information storage area, which is a predetermined storage unit (first). A process of storing in the storage unit to the fourth storage unit) is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S250, the main CPU 110a performs the gate detection switch input process and ends the current input control process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 13a, and if the normal symbol hold number (G) is less than 4 when the detection signal is input, the normal symbol hold number (G) is set. In addition to adding 1, a process is performed in which the normal figure determination information is acquired and stored in a predetermined storage unit (first storage unit to fourth storage unit) of the normal figure determination information storage area.

(First start port detection switch input process on the main control board)
The first start port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a first start port detection switch input process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal is input from the first start port detection switch 14a. When the detection signal is input, the process proceeds to step S230-2, and when the detection signal is not input, the first start port detection switch input process this time is terminated.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding 1 to and updating the prize ball counter (three prize ball counters) for the first starting port used for the prize ball.

In step S230-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is less than 4. If the number of 1st special symbol reservations (U1) is less than 4, the process is transferred to step S230-4, and if the number of 1st special symbol reservations (U1) is not less than 4, the first start port of this time. The detection switch input process ends.

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and stores it, and in step S230-5, special symbol storage indicating the first special symbol reservation number (U1). The designated command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol memory designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and processing such as displaying the first hold icon on the image display device 31 can be performed.

In step S230-6, the main CPU 110a acquires the special figure determination information, searches for the vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the first special figure determination information storage area, and searches for the vacant storage unit. The special figure judgment information acquired in is stored in.

The main CPU 110a performs the pre-determination process in step S230-7. Specifically, referring to the pre-judgment table of the jackpot lottery shown in FIG. 12, the type of the special symbol display device, the jackpot determination random value acquired this time, the special symbol determination random value, the reach determination random value, and Performs processing to determine the planned fluctuation pattern based on the random value for special figure fluctuation.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a sets a start port winning designation command indicating a scheduled variation pattern determined in the pre-determination process of step S230-7 in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and this time, the first 1 Start port detection switch input processing is completed.

As a result, the start opening winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and even before the variable display of the special symbol triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 14 this time is started (1 or). Perform a look-ahead effect (expecting the execution of the jackpot game), which is determined based on the preliminary judgment result and foretells that the jackpot game may be executed (over the variable display of a plurality of special symbols). Is possible.

(Second start port detection switch input process on the main control board)
The second start port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a second start port detection switch input process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S240-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal is input from the second start port detection switch 15a. When the detection signal is input, the process proceeds to step S240-2, and when the detection signal is not input, the second start port detection switch input process this time is terminated.

In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding 1 to and updating the prize ball counter (one prize ball counter) for the second starting port used for the prize ball.

In step S240-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game is currently in progress. If it is not in the auxiliary game, the process is transferred to step S240-5, and if it is in the auxiliary game, it is updated by adding 1 to the second start opening winning ball counter (D) in step S240-4.

In step S240-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is less than 4. If the number of second special symbol reservations (U2) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S240-6, and if the number of second special symbol reservations (U2) is not less than 4, the second starting port of this time is used. The detection switch input process ends.

In step S240-6, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the second special symbol hold number (U2) and stores it, and in step S240-7, special symbol storage indicating the second special symbol hold number (U2). The designated command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol memory designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and it becomes possible to perform processing such as displaying the second hold icon on the image display device 31.

In step S240-8, the main CPU 110a acquires the special figure determination information, searches for the vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the second special figure determination information storage area, and searches for the vacant storage unit. The special figure judgment information acquired in is stored in.

The main CPU 110a performs the pre-determination process in step S240-9. Specifically, referring to the pre-judgment table of the jackpot lottery shown in FIG. 13, the type of the special symbol display device, the jackpot determination random value acquired this time, the special symbol determination random value, the reach determination random value, and Performs processing to determine the planned fluctuation pattern based on the random value for special figure fluctuation.

In step S240-10, the main CPU 110a sets a start port winning designation command indicating a scheduled variation pattern determined in the pre-determination process of step S240-9 in the transmission data storage area for production of the main RAM 110c, and this time, the first 2 Start port detection switch input processing is completed.

As a result, the start opening winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and even before the variable display of the special symbol triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 15 this time is started (1 or). Perform a look-ahead effect (expecting the execution of the jackpot game), which is determined based on the preliminary judgment result and foretells that the jackpot game may be executed (over the variable display of a plurality of special symbols). Is possible.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the special figure special electric processing data, and if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, shifts the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing (step S310), and the special figure special electric processing data = 1. If, the process is transferred to the special symbol variation processing (step S320), if the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, the processing is transferred to the special symbol stop processing (step S330), and if the special symbol special electric processing data = 3, a big hit. The process is transferred to the game process (step S340), and if the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the process is transferred to the jackpot game end process (step S350).

This "special figure special electric processing data" is set as necessary in each subroutine of the special figure special electric control processing as described later, so that the subroutines necessary for the progress of the game are appropriately processed. Become.

In step S310, the main CPU 110a performs the special symbol memory determination process and ends the special symbol special electric control process this time. Specifically, a jackpot determination process, a special symbol determination process for determining a special symbol to be stopped and displayed, a fluctuation time determination process for determining a variation time of a special symbol, and the like are performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S320, the main CPU 110a performs the special symbol variation processing, and ends the current special symbol special electric control processing. Specifically, a process of determining whether or not the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed is performed, and if the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, a process of shifting to the special symbol stop process of step S330 is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.

In step S330, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol stop process and ends the special symbol special electric control process this time. Specifically, in addition to performing processing corresponding to the special symbols (big hit symbol, lost symbol) displayed as stopped, the number of time-saving games (J), the time-saving game flag, the number of high-probability games (X), and the high-probability game flag are set. Perform the setting process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

In step S340, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot game process and ends the special figure special electric control process this time. Specifically, a process for controlling a jackpot game is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S350, the main CPU 110a performs the jackpot game end process and ends the special figure special electric control process this time. Specifically, a process of determining a probabilistic gaming state of either a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability gaming state and determining a gaming state of either a time-saving gaming state or a non-time-saving gaming state is performed. .. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
The special symbol memory determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage determination process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. When the fluctuation display of the special symbol is in progress (special symbol time counter ≠ 0), the current special symbol memory determination process is terminated, and when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is not in progress (special symbol time counter = 0), the special symbol memory determination process is terminated. The process is transferred to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second special symbol hold number (U2) is 1 or more. If the second special symbol hold number (U2) is 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S310-3, and if the second special symbol hold number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process is performed in step S310-4. To move.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the second special symbol hold number (U2) to update, and shifts the process to step S310-6.

In step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) is 1 or more. If it is determined that the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the process is shifted to step S310-5, and if the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more, step S318- Move the process to 1.

In step S310-5, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the first special symbol hold number (U1) to update, and shifts the process to step S310-6.

In step S310-6, the main CPU 110a determines the special figure stored in the special figure determination information reservation storage area corresponding to the number of special symbol reservations (U) subtracted in step S310-3 or step S310-5. Information shift (storage area shift) is performed. Specifically, each special figure determination information stored in the first special figure determination information storage area or the second special figure determination information storage area from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is stored immediately before. Shift to the department. Here, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the special figure execution storage area (0th storage unit). At this time, the special figure determination information used in the previous variation display of the special symbol already written in the special figure execution storage area (0th storage unit) is deleted.

In the present embodiment, the number of reserved second special symbols (U2) is subtracted in preference to the number of reserved first special symbols (U1), but the first special symbol is in the order in which the starting port is won. The number of holdings (U1) and the number of holdings of the second special symbol (U2) may be subtracted, or the number of holdings of the first special symbol (U1) may be subtracted in preference to the number of holdings of the second special symbol (U2). You may try to do it.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a indicates the first special symbol hold number (U1) or the second special symbol hold number (U2) subtracted in step S310-3 or step S310-5. The symbol memory designation command is determined, and the determined special symbol memory designation command is set in the transmission data storage area for effect. As a result, a special symbol memory designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120 to reduce the number of the first hold icon or the second hold icon displayed on the image display device 31, or to reduce the number of the first hold icon or the first hold icon, or. A process of changing the second hold icon to the variable icon will be performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination process in step S311. Specifically, with reference to the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 5, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot based on the stochastic game state and the jackpot determination random value stored in the special figure execution storage area. With reference to the special symbol determination table shown in 6, the special symbol type (stop) based on the special symbol display device (type of start port) and the special symbol determination random value stored in the special symbol execution storage area. Special figure data) is determined. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a performs a special figure variation pattern determination process. Specifically, referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10 or 11, the special symbol display device (type of starting port), the result of the jackpot lottery, the special symbol, the number of special symbol reservations (U), The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the reach determination random value stored in the special figure execution storage area and the special figure variation random value.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a sets a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs a process for executing the variation effect according to the variation pattern so as to correspond to the variation display of the special symbol. ..

In step S314, the main CPU 110a confirms the game state at the start of the fluctuation, and sets the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the transmission data storage area for effect. As a result, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the game state can be grasped on the effect control board 120.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the fluctuation time (counter value) of the special symbol based on the fluctuation pattern determined in step S312 in the special symbol time counter. The special symbol time counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

In step S316, the main CPU 110a starts the variable display of the special symbol. Specifically, the variable display data of the special symbol is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, display data for variable display of the special symbol is created by the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800. Then, the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 will perform variable display of the special symbol.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data = 1, prepares to move the process to the special symbol variation process shown in FIG. 24, and ends the special symbol memory determination process this time.

In step S318-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a customer waiting state flag indicating that the special symbol variation display or the jackpot game is not executed in the customer waiting state (standby state). If there is a customer waiting state flag, the special symbol memory determination process this time is ended, and if there is no customer waiting state flag, the process is moved to step S318-2.

In step S318-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag indicating that the customer is in the customer waiting state in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S318-3, the customer waiting state indicating that the customer is in the customer waiting state. The specified command is set in the transmission data storage area for effect, and the special symbol memory determination process this time is terminated. As a result, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs a process for executing the customer waiting effect.

(Big hit judgment process of main control board)
The jackpot determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a jackpot determination process on the main control board 110.

In step S311-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is a big hit. Specifically, when the special figure determination information stored in the special figure execution storage area is shifted from the first special figure determination information reservation storage area, the jackpot lottery shown in FIG. 5A is performed. When the special figure judgment information stored in the special figure execution storage area is shifted from the second special figure judgment information reserved storage area with reference to the jackpot judgment table, the jackpot shown in FIG. 5 (b) is shown. The jackpot determination table of the lottery is referred to, and whether or not it is a "big hit" is determined based on the jackpot determination random value stored in the special figure execution storage area. If it is a big hit, the process is transferred to step S311-2, and if it is not a big hit, the process is transferred to step S311-5.

The main CPU 110a performs the jackpot symbol determination process in step S311-2. Specifically, the type of jackpot special symbol to be stopped and displayed based on the special symbol determination random value stored in the special symbol execution storage area with reference to the special symbol determination table in the jackpot shown in FIG. 6 (b). Is determined, and the stop special symbol data corresponding to the determined type of jackpot special symbol is set in the stop special symbol data storage area.

The stop special figure data set in the stop special figure data storage area is used for determining whether or not the special symbol is a "big hit symbol" in the special symbol stop process of FIG. 25, which will be described later, and the big hit game process of FIG. 26. It is also used to determine the operating mode of the big winning opening, and is also used to determine the game state after the big hit in the big hit game ending process of FIG. 27.

In step S311-3, the main CPU 110a sets the effect symbol designation command for jackpot corresponding to the stop special figure data determined in step S311-2 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and it is possible to grasp the type of the jackpot special symbol (stop special symbol data) that is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 120.

In step S311-4, the main CPU 110a determines the game state at the time of winning the jackpot from the information set in the game state storage area (time-saving game flag storage area, high-probability game flag storage area), and determines the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. The game status information indicating the above is set in the game status buffer. Specifically, if both the time-saving game flag and the high-probability game flag are not set, 00H is set, and if the time-saving game flag is not set but the high-probability game flag is set, 01H is set. If the time saving game flag is set but the high probability game flag is not set, 02H is set, and if both the time saving game flag and the high probability game flag are set, 03H is set.

In this way, apart from the game state storage area (time-saving game flag storage area, high-probability game flag storage area), it is decided to set the game state at the time of jackpot winning in the game state buffer. Since the high-probability game flag and the time-saving game flag in the state storage area (time-saving game flag storage area, high-probability game flag storage area) are reset, a new game state at the time of winning the jackpot is performed after the jackpot ends. This is because the game state storage area cannot be referred to when determining the game state at the end of the jackpot. Therefore, by providing a game state buffer for storing game information indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot separately from the game state storage area, the game information in the game state buffer can be referred to after the jackpot ends. Based on the game state at the time of winning the big hit, the game state after the end of the big hit (time-saving game state, number of time-saving games, etc.) can be newly set.

In step S311-5, the main CPU 110a performs a loss symbol determination process. Specifically, the type of lost special symbol to be stopped and displayed based on the special symbol determination random value stored in the special symbol execution storage area with reference to the special symbol determination table for loss shown in FIG. 6A. Is determined, and the stop special figure data corresponding to the determined type of lost special symbol is set in the stop special figure data storage area.

In step S311-6, the main CPU 110a sets the effect symbol designation command for loss corresponding to the stop special figure data determined in step S311-5 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and this time. The jackpot judgment process ends. As a result, the effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and it is possible to grasp the type of the loss special symbol (stop special symbol data) that is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 120.

(Special symbol variation processing of the main control board)
The special symbol variation processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process on the main control board 110.

In step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the fluctuation time set in the special symbol time counter has elapsed. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the special symbol variation processing this time is terminated, and if the fluctuation time has elapsed, the process is moved to step S320-2.

In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a stops and displays the variation display of the special symbol. Specifically, the variation display data set in step S316 is cleared, and the special symbol set in step S311-2 and step S311-5 is displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special. The stop display data for causing the symbol display device 21 to stop display is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21, and the player is notified of the jackpot determination result.

In step S320-3, the main CPU 110a sets a symbol confirmation command indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs a process for terminating the variation effect.

In step S320-4, the main CPU 110a sets the symbol stop time (0.5 seconds) for displaying the stop display of the special symbol in the special symbol time counter. The special symbol time counter is updated by subtracting 1 every 4 ms in step S110.

In step S320-5, the main CPU 110a sets 2 in the special symbol special electric processing data, prepares to move the process to the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 25, and ends the special symbol variation process this time.

(Special symbol stop processing of main control board)
The special symbol stop processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process on the main control board 110.

In step S330-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the symbol stop time set in step S320-4 has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0?). When the symbol stop time has elapsed, the process is transferred to step S330-2, and when the symbol stop time has not elapsed, the special symbol stop process this time is terminated.

In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a performs the time saving game end determination process. Specifically, when the time saving game flag is set in the main RAM 110c, 1 is subtracted from the time saving game count (J) to update, and whether or not the new time saving game count (J) is "0". Is determined. As a result, when the number of time-saving games (J) is "0", the time-saving game flag is cleared and the process proceeds to step S330-3. On the other hand, if the time saving game flag is not set, or if the time saving game count (J) is not "0", the process proceeds to step S330-3 as it is.

The main CPU 110a performs the high-probability game end determination process in step S330-3. Specifically, when the high-probability game flag is set in the main RAM 110c, 1 is subtracted from the high-probability game count (X) to update, and the new high-probability game count (X) is "0". Determine if it exists. As a result, when the number of high-probability games (X) is "0", the high-probability game flag is cleared and the process proceeds to step S330-4. On the other hand, if the high-probability game flag is not set, or if the high-probability game count (X) is not "0", the process proceeds to step S330-4 as it is.

In step S330-4, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the game state can be grasped on the effect control board 120.

In step S330-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop special figure data stored in the stop special figure data storage area is a jackpot symbol. If it is a jackpot symbol, the process is transferred to step S330-7, and if it is not a jackpot symbol, the process is transferred to step S330-6.

In step S330-6, the main CPU 110a sets 0 in the special symbol special electric processing data, prepares to move the process to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG. 22, and ends the special symbol stop process this time.

In step S330-7, the main CPU 110a sets 3 in the special figure special electric processing data, and prepares to move the processing to the jackpot game processing shown in FIG. 26.

In step S330-8, the main CPU 110a performs the normal game state transition process. Specifically, the high-probability game flag, the high-probability game count (X), the time-saving game flag, and the time-saving game number (J) are cleared to shift to the normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state).

In step S330-9, the main CPU 110a performs the jackpot start preparation setting process. Specifically, the type of the jackpot game is determined based on the stop special figure data with reference to the special electric accessory operating mode determination table shown in FIG. 8, and the jackpot opening mode for the jackpot shown in FIG. 9 is determined. From the table group, the big winning opening opening mode determination table according to the type of big hit game ("1st big hit table", "2nd big hit table", "3rd big hit table", "4th big hit table", "5th big hit" Determine the table ").

In step S330-10, the main CPU 110a sets an opening designation command according to the type of jackpot game (first jackpot game to fifth jackpot game) in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the opening designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs a process for executing the opening effect of the jackpot game.

In step S330-11, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time of the jackpot game in the special game timer counter, and ends the special symbol stop process this time. Specifically, the opening time according to the type of the jackpot game is determined from the big winning opening opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9) determined in step S330-9, and is set in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

(Big hit game processing of the main control board)
The jackpot game process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a jackpot game process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot game is currently being opened. Specifically, it is determined whether or not "0" is stored in the round game count (R) storage area. If it is in the opening, the process is transferred to step S340-2, and if it is not in the opening, the process is transferred to step S340-6.

In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in the special game timer counter has elapsed. If the opening time has not passed, the jackpot game process this time is ended, and if the opening time has passed, the process is moved to step S340-3.

In step S340-3, the main CPU 110a sets 1 to the number of round games (R) stored in the number of round games (R) storage area.

In step S340-4, the main CPU 110a performs the large winning opening opening process. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of times of opening (K), energization data for energizing the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c is set, and the large winning opening opening mode determined in step S330-9 is determined. With reference to the table (see FIG. 9), the opening time of the large winning opening 16 is set in the special game timer counter based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of times of opening (K). As a result, the large winning opening 16 will be opened.

In step S340-5, the main CPU 110a performs a round designation command transmission determination process. Specifically, when the number of times of opening (K) is "1", that is, when the round game is started, the round designation command corresponding to the number of times of round game (R) is stored in the transmission data for production of the main RAM 110c. Set in the area. As a result, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs a process for executing the round effect of the jackpot game.

In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot game is currently ending. The ending is the period after all the preset round games are completed. If the ending is in progress, the process is transferred to step S340-18, and if the ending is not in progress, the process is transferred to step S340-7.

In step S340-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the large winning opening is closed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the energization data for energizing the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c is set. If the large winning opening is closed, the process is transferred to step S340-8, and if the large winning opening is not closed, the process is transferred to step S340-9.

In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the large winning opening set in the special game timer counter has elapsed. If the closing time has not passed, the jackpot game process of this time is ended, and if the closing time has passed, the process is moved to step S340-4 in order to open the big winning opening.

In step S340-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening end condition for ending the opening of the large winning opening is satisfied. Specifically, either the value of the large winning opening winning ball counter (C) reaches the specified number (9 pieces) or the opening time per opening in the number of opening times (K) elapses. Determine if it holds. If it is determined that the opening end condition is satisfied, the process is moved to step S340-10, and if it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied, the current jackpot game process is terminated.

In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening closing process. Specifically, the energization data for energizing the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c is cleared, and the current large winning opening opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9) determined in step S330-9 is referred to. Based on the number of round games (R) and the number of times of opening (K), the closing time (closing interval time or one closing time) of the grand prize opening 16 is set in the special game timer counter. As a result, the grand prize opening 16 will be closed.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S340-11 whether or not one round has been completed. Specifically, whether or not the value of the large winning opening winning ball counter (C) reaches the specified number (9 pieces) and the number of opening times (K) becomes the maximum number of opening times is satisfied. Is determined. When one round is completed, the process is moved to step S340-12, and when one round is not completed, the current jackpot game process is ended.

The main CPU 110a performs the round data initialization process in step S340-12. Specifically, the number of times of opening (K) and the large winning opening winning ball counter (C) are cleared. However, the number of round games (R) is not cleared.

In step S340-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of round games (R) is the maximum number of round games. If it is the maximum number of round games, the process is transferred to step S340-15, and if it is not the maximum number of round games, the process is transferred to step S340-14.

In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the number of round games (R) and stores the game, and ends the current jackpot game process.

The main CPU 110a clears the number of round games (R) in step S340-15, and in step S340-16, based on the large winning opening opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9) determined in step S330-9. , The type of special game is determined, and the ending designation command corresponding to the type of big hit game is set in the transmission data storage area for production. As a result, the ending designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs a process for executing the ending effect of the jackpot game.

In step S340-17, the main CPU 110a sets the ending time according to the type of jackpot game to the special game timer counter based on the big winning opening opening mode determination table (see FIG. 9) determined in step S330-9. set.

In step S340-18, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time set in the special game timer counter has elapsed. When the ending time has elapsed, the process is transferred to step S340-19, and when the ending time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game process is ended.

In step S340-19, the main CPU 110a sets 4 in the special figure special electric processing data, prepares to move the processing to the big hit game end processing shown in FIG. 27, and ends the current big hit game processing.

(Main control board jackpot game end processing)
The jackpot game end process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a jackpot game end process on the main control board 110.

In step S350-1, the main CPU 110a loads the stop special figure data set in the stop special figure data storage area and the game state information in the game state buffer.

The main CPU 110a performs the high-probability game flag setting process in step S350-2. Specifically, with reference to the jackpot game end setting data table shown in FIG. 7, whether or not to shift to the high-probability gaming state at the end of the jackpot game based on the loaded stop special figure data and the game state information. When determining whether or not to shift to the high-probability gaming state, a high-probability gaming flag indicating that the high-probability gaming state is set is set in the high-probability gaming flag storage area. For example, if the stop special figure data is "01", the high probability game flag is set.

The main CPU 110a performs the high-probability game number setting process in step S350-3. Specifically, it is the number of fluctuation displays that can be executed in the high-probability game state based on the loaded stop special figure data and the game state information with reference to the jackpot game end setting data table shown in FIG. The high-probability game count (X) is determined, and the determined high-probability game count (X) is set in the high-probability game count (X) storage area. For example, if the stop special figure data is "01", 10000 times is set as the high probability game number (X).

In step S350-4, the main CPU 110a performs the time saving game flag setting process. Specifically, referring to the jackpot game end time setting data table shown in FIG. 7, whether or not to shift to the time saving game state at the end of the jackpot game is determined based on the loaded stop special figure data and the game information. When making a determination and shifting to the time-saving game state, a time-saving game flag indicating that the time-saving game state is set is set in the time-saving game flag storage area. For example, when the game status information is 01H, 02H, or 03H, the time saving game flag is set.

In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a performs a time-saving game number determination process. Specifically, referring to the jackpot game end time setting data table shown in FIG. 7, the time reduction is the number of fluctuation displays that can be executed in the time reduction game state based on the loaded stop special figure data and the game state information. The number of games (J) is determined, and the determined number of time-saving games (J) is set in the time-saving game number (J) storage area. For example, if the stop special figure data is "04", the time saving game number (J) is set to 10000 times.

In step S350-6, the main CPU 110a confirms the presence / absence of the high-probability game flag and the time-saving game flag, specifies the game state, and sends a game state designation command indicating the specified game state to the transmission data storage area for production. set. As a result, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the game state can be grasped by the effect control board 120.

In step S350-7, the main CPU 110a sets 0 in the special figure special electric processing data, prepares to move the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG. 22, and ends the current jackpot game end processing.

(Fundamental control processing of the main control board)
The general control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a normal drawing control process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S401, the main CPU 110a loads the Fuzu Fuden processing data, and if the Fuzu Fuden processing data = 0, shifts the processing to the normal symbol variation processing (step S410), and the Fuzu Fuden processing data. If = 1, the process is transferred to the auxiliary game process (step S420).

As will be described later, this "Fuzu Fuden processing data" is set as needed in each subroutine of the Fuzu Fuden control processing, so the subroutines necessary for the progress of the game are processed as appropriate. It will be.

In step S410, the main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol variation process and ends the current normal symbol control process. Specifically, a hit determination process, a process of displaying a normal symbol in a variable manner, a process of stopping and displaying a normal symbol, and the like are performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

In step S420, the main CPU 110a performs an auxiliary game process and ends the current Fuzu Fuden control process. Specifically, a process for controlling an auxiliary game is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Normal symbol variation processing of main control board)
The normal symbol variation processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process on the main control board 110.

In step S410-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation display of the normal symbol is in progress. If the variation display of the normal symbol is in progress, the process is transferred to step S410-9, and if the variation display of the normal symbol is not in progress, the process is transferred to step S410-2.

In step S410-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the normal symbol hold number (G) is 1 or more. If the number of normal symbol reservations (G) is 1 or more, the process is moved to step S410-3, and if the number of normal symbol reservations (G) is not 1 or more, the current normal symbol variation processing is terminated.

In step S410-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the normal symbol hold number (G) to update, and shifts the process to step S410-4.

In step S410-4, the main CPU 110a shifts the normal symbol determination information stored in the normal symbol hold storage area. Specifically, each normal map determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit. Here, the normal map determination information stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the normal map execution storage area (0th storage unit). At this time, the special figure determination information used in the previous variation display of the normal symbol, which has already been written in the normal figure execution storage area (0th storage unit), is deleted.

The main CPU 110a performs a hit determination process in step S410-5. Specifically, with reference to the hit determination table shown in FIG. 14 (a), it is determined whether or not there is a hit based on the game state and the hit determination random value stored in the normal figure execution storage area. ..

The main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol determination process in step S410-6. Specifically, referring to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 14B, the stop display is based on the current time saving game state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, and the acquired random number value for determining the ordinary symbol. The normal symbol (stop normal figure data) to be executed is determined, the determined stop normal figure data is set in the stop normal figure data storage area, and the normal figure designation command corresponding to the stop normal figure data is stored in the transmission data for production of the main RAM 110c. Set in the area. As a result, the normal map designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the stop normal map data can be grasped on the effect control board 120.

In step S410-7, the main CPU 110a performs the fluctuation time determination process of the normal symbol. Specifically, referring to the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14 (c), it is normal based on the game state, the hit determination result, and the normal map fluctuation random value stored in the normal map execution storage area. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined and set in the normal symbol time counter, and the normal symbol fluctuation designation command corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbol variation designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 can grasp the fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

In step S410-8, the main CPU 110a starts the variation display of the normal symbol and ends the current variation process of the normal symbol. Specifically, the variable display data of the normal symbol is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, display data for variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 22 is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800, so that the normal symbol display device 22 displays the normal symbol. The variable display will be performed.

In step S410-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the fluctuation time set in the normal symbol time counter has elapsed. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the normal symbol variation processing this time is terminated, and if the fluctuation time has elapsed, the process is moved to step S410-10.

In step S410-10, the main CPU 110a stops the variable display of the normal symbol. Specifically, the main stop display data is for clearing the variation display data set in step S410-8 and causing the normal symbol display device 22 to stop and display the normal symbol set in step S410-6. It is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22, and the player is notified of the hit determination result.

In step S410-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop normal figure data set in the stop normal figure data storage area is a hit normal symbol. If it is a hit normal symbol, the process is moved to step S410-12, and if it is not a hit normal symbol, the current normal symbol variation process is ended.

In step S410-12, the main CPU 110a sets the normal drawing data = 1 and prepares to move the processing to the auxiliary game processing shown in FIG. 30, and in step S410-13, performs the opening mode determination processing. Specifically, referring to the start opening opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 14D, the maximum number of times the starting movable piece 15b is opened, the opening time of the auxiliary game, and the second starting opening 15 are based on the stop chart data. Determine the opening time, interval time, and ending time of the auxiliary game.

In step S410-14, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time of the auxiliary game in the auxiliary game timer counter, and ends the normal symbol variation process this time. The auxiliary game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

(Auxiliary game processing of main control board)
Auxiliary game processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an auxiliary game process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S420-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game is currently being opened. If it is in the opening, the process is transferred to step S420-2, and if it is not in the opening, the process is transferred to step S420-4.

In step S420-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in the auxiliary game timer counter has elapsed. If the opening time has not elapsed, the auxiliary game process this time is ended, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process is moved to step S420-3.

In step S420-3, the main CPU 110a performs the second start opening opening process and ends the auxiliary game process this time. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of times of opening (S), energization data for energizing the start port opening / closing solenoid 15c is set, and the second starting port 15 corresponding to the number of times of opening (S) is opened. Set the time to the auxiliary game timer counter. As a result, the second starting port 15 is opened.

In step S420-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game is currently ending. If the ending is in progress, the process is transferred to step S420-12, and if the ending is not in progress, the process is transferred to step S420-5.

In step S420-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second starting port 15 is closed (interval). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the energization data for energizing the start port opening / closing solenoid 15c is set. If the second starting port 15 is closed, the process is transferred to step S420-6, and if the second starting port 15 is not closed, the process is transferred to step S420-7.

In step S420-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time (interval time) of the second starting port 15 set in the auxiliary game timer counter has elapsed. If the closing time has not elapsed, the auxiliary processing this time is terminated, and if the closing time has elapsed, the processing is moved to step S420-3 in order to open the second starting port 15.

In step S420-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening end condition for ending the opening of the second starting port 15 is satisfied. Specifically, either the value of the second starting opening winning ball counter (D) reaches the specified number (10 pieces) or the opening time per opening in the number of opening times (S) elapses. Is determined. If it is determined that the opening end condition is satisfied, the process is moved to step S420-8, and if it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied, the auxiliary game process this time is ended.

The main CPU 110a performs the second start port closing process in step S420-8. Specifically, the energization data for energizing the start port opening / closing solenoid 15c is cleared, and the closing time of the second start port 15 determined in step S410-13 is set in the auxiliary game timer counter. As a result, the second starting port 15 is closed.

In step S420-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game ends. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of times (S) of opening the second starting port is the maximum number of times of opening. When ending the auxiliary game, the process is moved to step S420-10, and when the auxiliary game is not ended, the current auxiliary game process is ended.

The main CPU 110a performs the auxiliary game end process in step S420-10. Specifically, the number of times of opening (S) and the second starting opening winning ball counter (D) are cleared.

In step S420-11, the main CPU 110a sets the ending time determined in step S410-13 in the auxiliary game timer counter.

In step S420-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time set in the auxiliary game timer counter has elapsed. When the ending time has elapsed, the process is moved to step S420-13, and when the ending time has not elapsed, the auxiliary game process this time is ended.

In step S420-13, the main CPU 110a sets 0 in the normal symbol processing data, prepares to move the processing to the normal symbol variation processing shown in FIG. 29, and ends the auxiliary game processing this time.

(Error detection processing)
The error detection process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an error detection process on the main control board 110.

Strictly speaking, the term "error occurrence" as used herein refers to the occurrence of an irregular event defined as an error, such as an event such as power restoration or an abnormal winning frequency. It may be understood that it means detecting (detecting) the occurrence of an event.

For example, the event of "power restoration" is a case where the state in which power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 to be used for the player's game is a normal state (in other words, a normal state). , The event that the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state can be said to be a kind of abnormality (error).

In the following description, an event defined as an error in the gaming machine 1 (irregular event, see the type of error in FIG. 96) may be simply described as an "error" or an "error event". ..

Further, in the following description, error notifications such as RAM clear notification, magnetic detection error notification, and door opening error notification, which will be described later, may be generically described as "error notification".

In step S600-1, the main CPU 110a performs a process of determining whether or not an abnormal winning is detected. Specifically, the main CPU 110a continuously detects the game ball for a certain period of time (for example, 1 second) in the game ball detection switch (in this embodiment, the large winning opening detection switch 16a) that detects the game ball. In this case (when the detection of game balls is continued), or when the game ball detection switch detects a predetermined number or more (for example, 3 or more game balls within 0.5 seconds) within a predetermined time, an abnormal prize is generated. It is judged that it has been done. If an abnormal winning is detected, the process is moved to step S600-2, and if no abnormal winning is detected, the process is moved to step S600-4.

In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the detection of the abnormal winning error is based on the detection of the large winning opening detection switch 16a, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment. For example, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the detection of an abnormal winning error is based on the detection of another gaming ball detection switch (for example, a first starting port detection switch, a second starting port detection switch, a general winning port detection switch, etc.). May be good. Further, the detection of the abnormal winning error may be performed by a plurality of game ball detection switches. For example, the large winning opening detection switch, the first starting opening detection switch, the second starting opening detection switch, and the general winning opening detection switch may all be targets for whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred.

In step S600-2, the main CPU 110a sets an abnormal winning error designation command indicating that an abnormal winning is detected in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and shifts the processing to step S600-3. As a result, the abnormal winning error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs a process for executing the abnormal winning error notification.

The abnormal winning error notification means that an abnormal winning error screen (for example, the error notification dedicated image 300C in FIG. 100) indicating that an abnormal winning has occurred is displayed on the image display device 31, or an abnormal winning is received from the sound output device 32. It is to output an abnormal winning error notification sound indicating that it has occurred. The abnormal winning error notification will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 100 and the like.

In step S600-3, the main CPU 110a sets an abnormal winning error flag indicating the occurrence of an abnormal winning in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current error detection process.

In step S600-4, the main CPU 110a performs a process of determining whether or not a magnetic detection error has been detected. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines that a magnetic detection error has occurred when the magnetic sensor 17 detects magnetism for a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms). If a magnetic detection error is detected, the process is transferred to step S600-5, and if no magnetic detection error is detected, the process is transferred to step S600-7.

In step S600-5, the main CPU 110a sets a magnetic detection error designation command indicating that a magnetic detection error has been detected in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and shifts the process to step S600-6. As a result, the magnetic detection error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs a process for executing the magnetic detection error notification.

The magnetic detection error notification includes displaying a magnetic detection error screen (for example, the error notification dedicated image 300D in FIG. 101) indicating that a magnetic detection error has occurred in the image display device 31, or magnetic detection from the audio output device 32. It is to output a magnetic detection error notification sound indicating that an error has occurred. The magnetic detection error notification will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 101 and the like.

In step S600-6, the main CPU 110a sets a magnetic detection error flag indicating the occurrence of a magnetic detection error in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current error detection process.

In step S600-7, the main CPU 110a performs a process of determining whether or not a winning frequency abnormality error has been detected. Specifically, the main CPU 110a is in a low base state (during non-electric support) when a predetermined number of game balls win a prize in the first starting port 14 for the launch of a specified number of game balls (for example, 100 shots). (When 20 game balls win a prize in the first starting port 14), it is determined that a winning frequency abnormality error has occurred. More specifically, the main CPU 110a has a winning frequency when 20 or more game balls are detected by the first start port detection switch 14a with respect to the detection of 100 game balls by the out ball detection switch 11a. Judge that an abnormal error has occurred. If a winning frequency abnormality error is detected, the process is transferred to step S600-8, and if a winning frequency abnormality error is not detected, the process is transferred to step S600-10.

In step S600-8, the main CPU 110a sets a winning frequency abnormality error designation command indicating that a winning frequency abnormality error has been detected in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current error detection process. As a result, the winning frequency abnormality error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs a process for executing the winning frequency abnormality error notification.

The winning frequency abnormality error notification includes displaying a winning frequency abnormality error screen (for example, the error notification dedicated image 300E in FIG. 102) indicating that a winning frequency abnormality error has occurred in the image display device 31, or an audio output device 32. It is to output a winning frequency abnormality error notification sound indicating that a winning frequency abnormality error has occurred. The winning frequency abnormality error notification will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 102 and the like.

In step S600-9, the main CPU 110a sets a winning frequency abnormality error flag indicating the occurrence of a winning frequency abnormality error in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current error detection process. The main CPU 110a cancels the winning frequency abnormality error by clearing the winning frequency abnormality error flag when the power is restored or when the RAM is cleared.

In step S600-10, the main CPU 110a performs a process of determining whether or not a door opening error has been detected. Specifically, the main CPU 110a detects a door opening error when the door opening switch 133 is in the OFF state. If a door opening error is detected, the process is transferred to step S600-11, and if a door opening error is not detected, the process is transferred to step S600-13.

In step S600-11, the main CPU 110a sets a door opening start designation command indicating that a door opening error has been detected in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and shifts the process to step S600-12. As a result, the door opening start designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs a process for executing the door opening error notification.

The door opening error notification means displaying a door opening error screen (for example, the error notification dedicated image 300F in FIG. 103) indicating that a door opening error has occurred on the image display device 31, or opening the door from the audio output device 32. It is to output a door opening error notification sound indicating that an error has occurred. The door opening error notification will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 103 and the like.

In step S600-12, the main CPU 110a sets a door opening error flag indicating the occurrence of a door opening error in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the error detection process this time.

In step S600-13, the main CPU 110a performs a process of determining whether or not a switch non-connection error has been detected. Specifically, the main CPU 110a detects a switch unconnected error when the actual connection of the switch to be connected to the main control board 110 is defective (including completely unconnected). If a switch disconnection error is detected, the process is transferred to step S600-14, and if a switch disconnection error is not detected, the process is transferred to step S600-16.

In step S600-14, the main CPU 110a sets a switch non-connection error start designation command indicating that a switch non-connection error has been detected in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and shifts the process to step S600-15. As a result, the switch non-connection error start designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs a process for executing the switch non-connection error notification.

The switch non-connection error notification means displaying a switch non-connection error screen (for example, the error notification dedicated image 300G in FIG. 104) indicating that a switch non-connection error has occurred in the image display device 31, or a sound output device 32. Is to output a switch unconnected error notification sound indicating that a switch unconnected error has occurred. The switch non-connection error notification will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 104 and the like.

In step S600-15, the main CPU 110a sets a switch unconnected error flag indicating the occurrence of a switch unconnected error in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current error detection process.

In step S600-16, the main CPU 110a performs a process of determining whether or not a dish full tank error has been detected. Specifically, the main CPU 110a detects a plate full tank error when the plate full tank detection switch 136 detects a plate full tank state. If a dish full tank error is detected, the process is moved to step S600-17, and if a dish full tank error is not detected, the current error detection process is terminated.

In step S600-17, the main CPU 110a sets a dish full tank error start designation command indicating that a dish full tank error has been detected in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and shifts the process to step S600-18. As a result, the plate full tank error start designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the effect control board 120 performs a process for executing the plate full tank error notification.

The dish full tank error notification means displaying a dish full tank error screen (for example, the image 300H dedicated to error notification in FIG. 105) indicating that a dish full tank error has occurred on the image display device 31, or the dish full tank error notification from the audio output device 32. It is to output a dish full tank error notification sound indicating that a tank error has occurred. The dish full tank error notification will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 105 and the like.

In step S600-18, the main CPU 110a sets a dish full tank error flag indicating the occurrence of a dish full tank error in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current error detection process.

(Error release processing)
The error clearing process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an error canceling process on the main control board 110.

In step S610-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a door opening flag indicating the occurrence of a door opening error. If there is a door open flag, the process is transferred to step S610-2, and if there is no door open flag, the process is transferred to step S610-5.

In step S610-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of determining whether or not the ON state of the door opening switch 133 is detected. When the ON state of the door opening switch 133 is detected, the process is moved to step S610-3, and when the ON state of the door opening switch 133 is not detected, the error release processing this time is terminated.

In step S610-3, the main CPU 110a sets a door opening end designation command indicating that the door opening error has been resolved in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and shifts the processing to step S610-4. As a result, the door opening end designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the process for ending the door opening error notification by the effect control board 120 is performed.

In step S610-4, the main CPU 110a clears the door open flag and ends the error release process this time.

In step S610-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a switch non-connection error flag indicating the occurrence of a switch non-connection error. If there is a switch unconnected error flag, the process is transferred to step S610-6, and if there is no switch unconnected error flag, the process is transferred to step S610-9.

In step S610-6, the main CPU 110a performs a process of determining whether or not a switch connection has been detected. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the connection failure (including completely unconnected) of each switch to be connected to the main control board 110 is resolved and each switch is in the connected state. When the connection status of all the switches to be connected to the main control board 110 is detected, the process is transferred to step S610-7, and at least some of the switches to be connected to the main control board 110 are connected. If the status is not detected, the error cancellation process this time is terminated.

In step S610-7, the main CPU 110a sets a switch non-connection error end specification command indicating that the switch non-connection error has been resolved in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and shifts the process to step S610-8. As a result, the switch non-connection error end designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the process for ending the switch non-connection error notification by the effect control board 120 is performed.

In step S610-8, the main CPU 110a clears the switch non-connection error flag and ends the error release process this time.

In step S610-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a dish full tank error flag indicating the occurrence of a dish full tank error. If there is a dish full tank error flag, the process is moved to step S610-10, and if there is no dish full tank error flag, the current error clearing process is terminated.

In step S610-10, the main CPU 110a performs a process of determining whether or not the OFF state of the dish full tank detection switch 136 is detected. When the OFF state of the dish full tank detection switch 136 is detected, the process is moved to step S610-11, and when the OFF state of the dish full tank detection switch 136 is not detected, the error cancellation process this time is terminated. do.

In step S610-11, the main CPU 110a sets a dish full tank error end specification command indicating that the dish full tank error has been resolved in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and shifts the process to step S610-12. As a result, the plate full tank error end designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the process for ending the plate full tank error notification by the effect control board 120 is performed.

In step S610-12, the main CPU 110a clears the dish full tank error flag and ends the current error clearing process.

(Main processing of the production control unit)
The process executed by the sub CPU 120a in the effect control unit 120 m will be described. First, the main process of the effect control unit 120 m will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the effect control unit 120 m.

First, the sub CPU 120a performs the initialization process in step S1000. In this process, the sub CPU 120a reads the main processing program from the sub ROM 120b and initializes and sets the flags and the like stored in the sub RAM 120c in response to the power being turned on. In the process, when the icon non-appearance flag described later is set in the predetermined backup area provided in the sub RAM 120c, the sub CPU 120a does not clear the icon non-appearance flag and other flags and the like. Is initialized and the setting process is performed. More specifically, when the icon non-appearance flag is set in the predetermined backup area and the received command is a power recovery command, the sub CPU 120a does not clear the icon non-appearance flag. Initializes the flag etc. of, and performs the process of setting. When the icon non-appearance flag is set in the predetermined backup area, the sub CPU 120a clears the icon non-appearance flag and initially initializes other flags when the received command is a RAM clear command. And perform the setting process.

The sub CPU 120a performs the sub random number update process in step S1100. In this process, the sub CPU 120a performs a process of updating various random value values stored in the sub RAM 120c. After that, the process of step S1100 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the production control unit)
The timer interrupt process of the effect control unit 120 m will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process in the effect control unit 120 m. Although not shown, the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the effect control unit 120 m generates a clock pulse at predetermined intervals (2 milliseconds), reads the timer interrupt processing program, and reads the effect control board. Timer interrupt processing is executed.

In step S1300, the sub CPU 120a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 120a into the stack area.

In step S1400, the sub CPU 120a performs a command analysis process. In this process, the sub CPU 120a performs a process of analyzing the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 120c. The details of the command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35.

When the effect control unit 120m receives a command transmitted from the main control board 110, a command reception interrupt process of the effect control unit 120m (not shown) occurs, and the received command is stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 120c. It has become.

In step S1500, the sub CPU 120a performs a timer update process for updating various timer counters used by the effect control unit 120m.

In step S1600, has the sub CPU 120a input the signal of the effect button detection switch 35a in the customer waiting effect performed in the customer waiting state in which the special symbol variation display or the special game (big hit game) is not executed or in the customer waiting state? When it is determined whether or not the display is present and a signal such as the effect button detection switch 35a is input, a customer waiting effect control process for controlling display of a menu guide image (not shown) is performed.

In step S1610, the sub CPU 120a performs the icon appearance completion determination process. Specifically, when there is an icon non-appearance flag described later, the sub CPU 120a performs a process for causing the icon to appear and display it. Further, in the process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the icon display (appearance) is completed, and if the icon display process that has not appeared is completed, the icon non-appearance flag is set. Perform the process of clearing.

In step S1700, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the signals of the effect button detection switch 35a and the lever operation detection switch 36b are input via the frame control board 180, and inputs the signals of the effect button detection switch 35a and the like. If this is the case, an effect input control process for transmitting an effect button signal or the like to the image control unit 150 is performed.

In step S1800, the sub CPU 120a performs a data output process of transmitting various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c to the frame control board 180 and the image control unit 150.

In step S1900, the sub CPU 120a restores the information saved in step S1300 to the register of the sub CPU 120a.

(Command analysis processing of the production control unit)
Next, the command analysis process of the effect control unit 120 m will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process in the effect control unit 120 m.

In step S1401, the sub CPU 120a refers to the reception buffer and determines whether or not a command has been received. If a command has been received, the process is moved to step S1410, and if no command has been received, the command analysis process this time is terminated.

In step S1410, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a customer waiting state designation command. When the sub CPU 120a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is the customer waiting state designation command, the sub CPU 120a shifts the process to step S1411, and determines that the command is not the customer waiting state designation command, the sub CPU 120a shifts the process to step S1420.

In step S1411, the sub CPU 120a performs the customer waiting effect preparation process. In the customer waiting effect preparation process, the sub CPU 120a sets the customer waiting effect waiting flag in the customer waiting effect flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c, and the waiting time until the customer waiting effect is started (customer waiting effect waiting time: for example, for example. 30 seconds) is set in the customer waiting effect timer counter. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

In the customer waiting effect control process of step S1600, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the customer waiting effect waiting time set in the customer waiting effect timer counter has elapsed, and determines that the customer waiting effect waiting time has elapsed. Then, the customer waiting effect waiting flag is cleared, the customer waiting effect execution flag is set, and the customer waiting effect command indicating the effect information of the customer waiting effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the customer waiting effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the lamp control unit 170, and the customer waiting effect for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) is repeatedly executed. The execution and standby of the customer waiting effect are terminated based on the fact that the game state designation command, the effect symbol designation command, the variation pattern designation command, and the like are transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120.

In step S1420, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a special symbol storage designation command. If it is a special symbol memory designation command, the process is transferred to step S1421, and if it is not a special symbol memory designation command, the process is transferred to step S1430.

In step S1421, the sub CPU 120a performs the hold storage update process and ends the command analysis process this time. Specifically, the number of reserved storages is analyzed from the received special symbol storage designation command, and the analyzed number of reserved storages is set in the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 120c.

In step S1430, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the start opening winning designation command. If it is a start opening prize designation command, the process is transferred to step S1431, and if it is not a start opening prize designation command, the process is transferred to step S1440.

The sub CPU 120a performs the icon change effect determination process in step S1431. Specifically, based on the content of the received start opening winning designation command, processing is performed to determine whether or not to execute the icon change effect and the change scenario. The details of this icon change effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S1432.

As will be described in detail later, in the icon change scenario determination process, the icon final display mode determination process for determining the final display mode of the icon and the change scenario determination process for determining the scenario when the icon is changed in color are performed. Will be done.

Here, the "icon change effect" is an effect of changing the display mode (for example, the icon color mode) of the icon (hold icon, the variable icon) displayed on the image display device 31 (effect display area 70). ..

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and may be capable of performing an effect other than the icon color change as the icon change effect. For example, as an icon change effect, the icon image may be changed from an image showing a certain motif to an image showing another motif (for example, as an icon change effect, from an icon image showing snow dharma to another character or SP. Change to an icon image showing the development of).

The icon change effect includes a "hold icon change effect" in which the color of the hold icon is changed and a "change icon change effect" in which the color of the variable icon is changed. The icon change effect is performed as one of the look-ahead effects described later. As will be described in detail later, the hold icon change effect is performed only at the time of icon shift (the timing of execution is limited), whereas the variable icon change effect is various during the change. It is done at the timing (timing is not limited).

The "look-ahead effect" is an effect performed over one or a plurality of variable effects. The look-ahead effect can suggest the possibility that a jackpot game will be executed and the effect to be performed in the future (SP reach, etc.).

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the look-ahead effect, an icon change effect, an icon appearance effect described later, a winning flash effect, and the like can be executed.

The sub CPU 120a performs the icon appearance effect determination process in step S1432. Specifically, a process for determining the appearance mode (either normal display, delayed display, or redisplay) of the hold icon is performed based on the content of the received start opening winning designation command. The details of this icon appearance effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

In step S1433, the sub CPU 120a performs a winning flash effect determination process. Specifically, a process for determining a winning flash effect, which will be described later, is performed based on the content of the received start opening winning designation command. The details of the winning flash effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

In step S1440, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect symbol designation command. If it is an effect symbol designation command, the process is transferred to step S1441, and if it is not an effect symbol designation command, the process is transferred to step S1450.

In step S1441, the sub CPU 120a performs the basic symbol data determination process and ends the command analysis process this time. Specifically, it is for determining the basic symbol data (1st to 5th jackpot symbol data, lost symbol data) that makes it possible to identify the presence or absence of a jackpot and the type of jackpot based on the content of the received effect symbol designation command. Perform processing.

In step S1450, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a variation pattern designation command. If it is a variation pattern specification command, the process is transferred to step S1451, and if it is not a variation pattern specification command, the process is transferred to step S1460.

In step S1451, the sub CPU 120a performs a variation effect pattern determination process. Specifically, based on the content of the received variation pattern designation command, the variation effect pattern, which is the effect mode of the variation effect executed by using various effect devices, is determined, and the variation effect pattern is determined according to the determined variation effect pattern. The process of setting the variation effect pattern command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c is performed. As a result, the variation effect pattern command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for executing the variation effect is performed. The details of this variation effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 44.

In step S1452, the sub CPU 120a performs an action determination process at the start of fluctuation. Specifically, based on the content of the variation effect pattern determined in the process of step S1451, a process for determining whether or not to perform an action at the start of variation, which will be described later, is performed. The details of the action determination process at the start of fluctuation will be described later with reference to FIG. 46.

In step S1453, the sub CPU 120a performs the dialogue advance notice determination process. Specifically, based on the content of the variation effect pattern determined in the process of step S1451, a process for determining whether or not to give a serif notice, which will be described later, is performed. The details of this dialogue advance notice determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48.

The sub CPU 120a performs a timer effect determination process in step S1454. Specifically, based on the content of the variation effect pattern determined in the process of step S1451, a process for determining whether or not to perform a timer effect, which will be described later, is performed. The details of this timer effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 50.

The sub CPU 120a performs the stock effect determination process in step S1455. Specifically, based on the content of the variation effect pattern determined in the process of step S1451, a process for determining whether or not to perform the stock effect described later is performed. The details of this stock effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 53.

The sub CPU 120a performs a cut-in determination process in step S1456. Specifically, a process for determining a cut-in display mode, which will be described later, is performed based on the content of the variation effect pattern determined in the process of step S1451. The details of this cut-in determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55.

In step S1460, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a symbol determination command. If it is a symbol confirmation command, the process is transferred to step S1461, and if it is not a symbol confirmation command, the process is transferred to step S1470.

In step S1461, the sub CPU 120a performs the effect symbol stop processing and ends the command analysis processing this time. Specifically, in order to stop and display the effect symbol 38, a process of setting a stop designation command for stopping and displaying the effect symbol in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c is performed. As a result, the stop designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for stopping and displaying the variation effect is performed.

In step S1470, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a game state designation command. If it is a game state specification command, the process is transferred to step S1471, and if it is not a game state specification command, the process is transferred to step S1480.

In step S1471, the sub CPU 120a performs the game state setting process and ends the command analysis process this time. Specifically, the current game state is specified with reference to the received game state designation command, and data indicating the specified game state is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c.

In step S1480, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is the opening designation command. If it is an opening designation command, the process is transferred to step S1481, and if it is not an opening designation command, the process is transferred to step S1490.

In step S1481, the sub CPU 120a performs the opening effect pattern determination process and ends the command analysis process this time. Specifically, based on the opening designation command, the effect pattern of the opening effect performed at the start of the jackpot game is determined, and the opening effect specification command corresponding to the determined effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. conduct. As a result, the opening effect designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for executing the opening effect is performed.

In step S1490, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a round designation command. If it is a round designation command, the process is transferred to step S1491, and if there is no round designation command, the process is transferred to step S1500.

In step S1491, the sub CPU 120a performs the round effect pattern determination process and ends the command analysis process this time. Specifically, based on the round designation command, the effect pattern of the round effect performed during the round game is determined, and the round effect specification command corresponding to the determined effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. .. As a result, the round effect designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for executing the round effect is performed.

In step S1500, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is the ending designation command. If it is an ending designation command, the process is moved to step S1501, and if it is not an ending designation command, the current command analysis process is terminated.

In step S1501, the sub CPU 120a performs the ending effect pattern determination process and ends the command analysis process this time. Specifically, based on the ending designation command, the effect pattern of the ending effect to be performed at the end of the jackpot game is determined, and the ending specification command corresponding to the determined effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. .. As a result, the ending effect designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for executing the ending effect is performed.

In step S1510, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is an error system designation command. If it is an error-based command, the process is moved to step S1511, and if it is not an error-based command, the current command analysis process is terminated.

The "error system specification command" is a command indicating that an error has been detected, and includes a RAM clear command, a power recovery command, an abnormal winning error specification command, a magnetic detection error specification command, a winning frequency abnormal error specification command, and the like. Includes a door open start specification command, a switch unconnected error start specification command, and a full tank error start specification command.

The sub CPU 120a performs the error notification start process in step S1511. Specifically, when an error-related command such as a RAM clear command, a power recovery command, or a winning frequency abnormality error specification command is stored in the receive buffer, processing for starting error notification corresponding to the error-related command. And so on. The details of this error notification start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 57. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

In step S1520, the sub CPU 120a performs the error notification end determination process. Specifically, it performs processing for determining whether or not error notification such as RAM clear notification, power recovery notification, and winning frequency abnormality error notification is being executed, and whether or not a command for terminating the error notification has been received. .. The details of this error notification end determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 58. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

(Icon change production decision processing)
Next, the icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 120 m will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 120 m.

As will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 37, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the icon (the variable icon, the hold icon) is a white icon displayed in white as a normal icon (as a default icon), and a white icon. It can be displayed as an icon (“special icon” described later) that is displayed in a mode other than the white icon, such as a blinking white icon or a blue icon.

The "icon change effect" may be described as the mode of the icon displayed first (hereinafter, referred to as "initial mode") at the time of winning, the timing of the delayed display described later, and the timing of the redisplay described later. It is an effect that changes the display mode of the icon in a mode different from the above. To give an example, the icon change effect is an effect of changing the display mode of an icon displayed as a white icon in the initial mode to a blue icon or the like. In the following description, the icon change effect of the variable icon may be described as "the variable icon change effect", and the icon change effect of the hold icon may be described as "hold icon change effect".

Further, the "non-change scenario" described below is a scenario in which the display color of the icon does not change from the mode displayed in the initial mode (display color of the initial mode) to the final display mode.

Further, the "change scenario" is a scenario in which the display mode of the icon is changed at least once from the mode displayed in the initial mode (display color of the initial mode) to the final display mode. From another point of view, when the "change scenario" is selected, the icon change effect is performed at least once.

First, the sub CPU 120a refers to the received start opening winning designation command in step S1431-1. Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the received start opening winning designation command, and grasps the winning / winning of the jackpot, the type of the jackpot, and the effect content (planned fluctuation pattern).

In step S1431-2, the sub CPU 120a acquires an icon display mode determining random number value for determining the final display mode of the icon displayed on the image display device 31, and in step S1431-3, the final display mode of the icon. Select the icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 38) for determining. Details of this icon final display mode determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

The sub CPU 120a determines the icon final display mode in step S1431-4. Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 120a refers to the icon final display mode determination table, and is one of a plurality of icon final display modes based on the start opening winning designation command and the icon display mode determination random value. Determine the final display mode of the two icons.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1431-5 whether or not the determined icon final display mode is a special icon. If the icon final display mode is a special icon, the process is moved to step S1431-6, and if the icon final display mode is not a special icon, the process is moved to step S1431-11.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1431-6 whether or not the determined icon final display mode is the white blinking icon. If the icon final display mode is a white flashing icon, the process is moved to step S1431-11, and if the icon final display mode is not a white flashing icon, the process is moved to step S1431-7.

In the present embodiment, when the final display mode of the icon is the "white flashing icon", the icon is displayed as the white flashing icon from the initial mode. Therefore, when the final display mode of the icon is a white blinking icon, the icon change effect is not executed (the effect of changing the icon displayed as the white icon to the white blinking icon is not performed). In the gaming machine of the present invention, the white icon may be changed as a white blinking icon.

In step S1431-7, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the present is the feasible period of the icon change effect. If it is determined that the icon change effect is feasible period, the process is transferred to step S1431-8, and if it is determined that the icon change effect is not the feasible period, the process is transferred to step S1431-11.

In addition, in the judgment of whether or not the icon change effect is feasible, the execution of the icon change effect is not restricted, the jackpot game is not being executed, or the icon change effect is not being executed. In some cases, it is determined that the period is feasible. It should be noted that one of the above three conditions or only two conditions may be provided.

In step S1431-8, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the hold storage corresponding to the previously received start opening winning designation command, that is, the pre-determination results of the advance hold are all equal to or less than the normal reach. If all are below the normal reach, the process is transferred to step S1431-9, and if all are not below the normal reach, the process is transferred to step 1431-11.

In addition, the term "normal reach or less" means normal fluctuation, shortened fluctuation, and normal reach. That is, in this step S1431-8, it is determined whether or not all the prior determination results of the advance hold are normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach.

In step S1431-9, the sub CPU 120a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 39) for determining a scenario for icon change effect. Details of this change scenario determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

In step S1431-10, the sub CPU 120a determines a change scenario, sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold storage number counter of the sub RAM 120c, and shifts the process to step S1431-12. Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 120a refers to the change scenario determination table, and is based on the icon final display mode, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start opening winning designation command, and the selection rate. One change scenario is determined from the change scenarios, set in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold storage number counter of the sub RAM 120c, and the process is transferred to step S1431-12.

In step S1431-11, the sub CPU 120a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold storage number counter of the sub RAM 120c, and shifts the process to step S1431-12.

The sub CPU 120a specifies an initial display mode when the icon is first displayed on the image display device 31 from the determined change scenario or the non-change scenario in step S1431-12, and the icon corresponding to the initial display mode. The initial display mode command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, and the icon change effect determination process this time is completed. As a result, the icon initial display mode command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, the hold icon of the display mode corresponding to the icon initial display mode command is displayed on the image display device 31, and a predetermined sound effect is produced. It will be output.

In the icon change effect determination process of the present embodiment, the icon change effect (hold icon change effect, the variable icon change effect) is executed when all the preliminary determination results of the advance hold are equal to or less than the normal reach. , The icon change effect may be executed when the advance determination result of the advance hold does not perform the reach effect, and the icon change effect may not be executed when the reach effect is performed. In this way, the display mode of the hold icon does not change during the variable effect corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is executed, and the hold icon is held during the variable effect corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is not executed. The display mode of the above is changed, the reach effect is not hindered by the icon change effect, and the fun of the game can be improved.

Further, even if the pre-judgment result of the advance hold includes the one that performs the reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but in such a case, the pre-determination result of the advance hold is reach. The icon change effect may be more easily executed (executed at a higher rate) when the effect is not included than when the reach effect is included.

(Icon display mode)
FIG. 37 shows an icon display mode displayed on the image display device 31.

As shown in FIG. 37, the gaming machine 1 suggests a jackpot expectation degree by the icon display mode. Specifically, the jackpot expectation is high in the order of white icon <white flashing icon <blue icon <green icon <purple icon <red icon <zebra icon.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an image imitating a snowman is displayed as a hold icon or the variable icon. In addition, the color of the snowman's hat is changed as the white icon changes to an icon with a high expectation of a big hit (blue icon, green icon, etc.). For example, a white hat snowman is displayed as a white icon, a blue hat snowman is displayed as a blue icon, and a zebra-patterned hat snowman is displayed as a zebra icon.

The gaming machine of the present invention may change the light emitting mode of the heso lamp 34c according to the display color of the icon. For example, when all the icons including the hold icon and the variable icon are displayed as white icons, the heso lamp 34c does not emit light, whereas when the white blinking icon is displayed, the heso lamp 34c is white. When the blue icon is displayed, the heso lamp 34c emits light in blue, and when the green icon is displayed, the heso lamp 34c emits light in green, and the red icon and the zebra icon are displayed. In some cases, the heso lamp 34c may be configured to emit light in red.

The heso lamp 34c may emit light in a manner different from the display color of the icon. For example, as an effect when the game ball Q wins the first starting port 14 (for example, a winning flash effect described later), the icon color such as displaying the first hold icon as a blue icon and causing the heso lamp 34c to emit red light. And the emission color of the heso lamp 34c may be inconsistent with each other.

The gaming machine of the present invention is a decorative lighting device provided on another decorative lighting device 34 (for example, a board lighting device 34a, a frame lighting device 34b, or a decorative member 33a) in response to a change in icon color. Etc.) may change the light emitting mode.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table that is referred to when determining the icon final display mode. In the icon final display mode determination table, the type of the start opening prize designation command, the content of the fluctuation pattern (planned fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start opening prize designation command, the distribution ratio (%) for each icon final display mode, and The final display mode of the determined icon is associated with it.

As shown in FIG. 37, the final display mode of the icon includes a white icon displayed in white as a normal icon, a white flashing icon displayed in a mode in which the icon displayed in white blinks, and a blue icon displayed in blue. A green icon displayed in green, a purple icon displayed in purple, a red icon displayed in red, and a zebra icon displayed in a zebra pattern (color) are set. Further, as described above, the jackpot expectation is higher in the order of (white icon <) white flashing icon <blue icon <green icon <purple icon <red icon <zebra icon.

In the following description, a white icon displayed in white as a normal icon may be described as a "normal icon". In addition, an icon displayed in a display mode other than the normal icon may be described as a "special icon". In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the "white icon" is displayed as a normal icon, and the "white flashing icon", "blue icon", "green icon", "purple icon", "red icon", and "zebra icon" are displayed. Is displayed as a special icon.

As shown in FIG. 39, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the icon is special as a mode (initial mode) in which the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 14 and the second starting port 15 and the icon is displayed first. It may be displayed as an icon. For example, in the change scenario 10 of FIG. 39, the icon is displayed as a blue icon in the initial mode.

The first feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 38 is that the selection rate of the icon final display mode is different depending on the effect content. The start winning information (starting opening winning designation command) includes information on the winning of the jackpot, the type of the jackpot, and the content of the effect (reach effect, pseudo-repeated number of times).

Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the effect content is specific start winning information indicating that the effect content is SP reach or SPSP reach, it indicates that the effect content is a normal variation, a shortened variation, or a normal reach that does not reach the reach. Special icons are selected at a higher rate than in the case of normal start winning information.

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a change scenario. The change scenario determination table is associated with the final display mode of the icon, the number of special symbols held corresponding to the start opening prize designation command, the distribution ratio (%) for each scenario, and the type of change scenario to be determined. For reference, the preliminary fluctuations in each change scenario and the update mode in the fluctuations are described.

Here, the "preliminary variation" is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information stored before the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received start opening winning designation command. That is, the "variation" is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received start opening winning designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the prior change (the hold icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the execution of the change (the change icon change effect is executed). ) The scenario (for example, scenario 05, etc.) and the display mode of the icon change during the execution of the pre-variation (hold icon change effect is executed), but do not change during the execution of the change (the variation icon change). The scenario (for example, scenario 06, etc.) in which the effect is not executed, and the icon display mode changes during the execution of the pre-variation and the execution of the change (the hold icon change effect and the change icon change effect). A scenario (for example, scenario 18 or the like) to be executed is set.

As an example of the change scenario, a case where the change scenario 49 is selected in response to the reception of the start port prize designation command based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 14 will be described.

In the change scenario 49, in the initial mode (in the case of the normal display described later, when the game ball wins the first start port 14), the number of holds in the first hold icon display area 72a of the image display device 31 is ". A white icon is displayed as a hold icon at the position corresponding to "4". Then, the white icon is maintained until the pre-variation before the four changes that are being executed at the time of displaying the white icon is completed. After that, when the pre-variation before 3 fluctuations is started, the white icon moves to the position corresponding to the hold number "3", the hold icon change effect is executed, and the white icon changes to the blue icon. Then, when the pre-variation before the two fluctuations is started, the blue icon moves to the position corresponding to the reserved number "2", and the blue icon is maintained until the pre-variation before the two fluctuations ends. After that, when the pre-variation before one change is started, the blue icon moves to the position corresponding to the hold number "1", the hold icon change effect is executed, and the blue icon changes to the green icon. Then, when the change is started, the green icon becomes the change icon, the change icon change effect is executed, the green icon changes to a red icon at a predetermined timing, and then changes to a zebra icon at a predetermined timing. do.

In the present embodiment, the display mode is changed step by step in both the case where the color of the hold icon is changed in the prior variation and the case where the color of the variation icon is changed in the variation (for example, blue → green). ) Or two or more steps (for example, purple → zebra), but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display mode may be changed step by step in both or one of the color change of the hold icon (icon color change in the prior change) and the color change of the change icon (icon color change in the change). Alternatively, the display mode is changed step by step in the color change of the hold icon (color change in advance variation), and the display mode is changed in one step or two or more steps in the color change of the variable icon (icon color change in the variation). It may be made to.

As the first feature of the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 39, the scenario in which the icon display mode changes during the execution of the change is selected at a higher rate than the scenario in which the icon display mode changes in the initial mode. It has become so. By doing so, it is possible to maintain the expectation of whether or not the icon display mode changes (whether the icon change effect is executed) until the change, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Further, as a second feature of the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 39, when the display mode of the icon changes over a plurality of stages (green, purple, red, and zebra icons are determined as the final display mode of the icon). In, the number of steps in which the icon changes during the execution of the change is likely to be larger than the number of steps in which the icon changes during the execution of the pre-variation. By doing so, it is possible to improve the expectation that the display mode of the icon changes over a plurality of stages in the fluctuation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the change scenario determination table of the present embodiment, a scenario for changing the display mode of the icon is determined regardless of whether or not the reach effect (which may be a reach other than the normal reach) is executed in the prior variation. However, the display mode of the icon is changed by the change scenario determination table with the determination factor as to whether or not the reach effect suggesting that the jackpot game may be executed in the advance fluctuation is executed. You may decide the scenario. When such a change scenario determination table is used, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed, and the reach effect is not executed. It is advisable to set various scenarios so that the display mode changes. In addition, the icon display mode changes during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed and the pre-variation in which the reach effect is not executed. Various scenarios may be set so that the display mode of the icon changes at a higher rate during the execution of the pre-variation in which is not executed.

(Icon appearance effect determination process)
Next, the icon appearance effect determination process of the effect control unit 120 m will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an icon appearance effect determination process in the effect control unit 120 m.

The "icon appearance effect" is an effect of causing the hold icon to appear at a predetermined timing. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, "normal display", "delayed display", and "redisplay" can be executed as the icon appearance effect.

In the normal display, the hold icon appears and is displayed at the timing (at the time of winning) when the game ball wins the start opening.

In the delayed display, the hold icon appears and is displayed at the timing (timing TMa2) after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of winning (in the present embodiment, 2 seconds after the time of winning).

In redisplay, the hold icon appears and is displayed at the time of winning, then the displayed hold icon disappears, and then at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the time of winning (timing TMa2 2 seconds after the time of winning). The hold icon reappears and appears.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of patterns of timings for displaying the hold icon in the icon appearance effect are provided. More specifically, in the gaming machine 1, when the hold icon appears at the time of winning (normal display), when it appears later than the time of winning (delayed display), and when the hold icon appears at the time of winning. There is a case where the hold icon appears again (redisplays) at a timing later than the time of winning as well as appearing.

As a result, the gaming machine 1 gives the player a sense of discomfort when the delay display or redisplay is performed, and the game machine 1 responds to the jackpot determination result related to the hold icon for which the delay display or redisplay is performed and the effect to be performed in the future. You can raise your expectations.

In this specification, the timing at which the hold icon is displayed in the normal display may be described as "at the time of winning", but the "at the time of winning" means that the game ball is the starting port (first starting port). It means the timing at which the sub CPU 120a receives the start opening prize designation command after entering the ball 14 or the second start opening 15) and the winning opening detection switch detects the winning, and the drawing of the hold icon is started. Needless to say. That is, "at the time of winning" is not the timing that completely coincides with the timing at which the starting port is won, but the transmission time of the command from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 120m and the holding icon are drawn. This is the timing after the time from the processing of the above to the start of drawing has elapsed, and means the timing at which the player feels that "the timing is almost the same as the winning of the starting port".

The gaming machine of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the second special symbol hold number (U2) is preferentially subtracted over the first special symbol hold number (U1), thereby improving excessive gambling for the player. From the viewpoint of prevention, in the time-saving game state, only the icon appearance effect corresponding to the second special symbol hold is executed without executing the icon appearance effect according to the first special symbol hold. In the normal game state, since the second special symbol hold is unlikely to occur, only the icon appearance effect corresponding to the first special symbol hold may be executed, or the first special symbol hold and the second special symbol hold may be executed. The icon appearance effect may be executed according to both.

First, the sub CPU 120a refers to the received start opening winning designation command in step S1432-1. Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the received start port winning designation command, and the type of the starting port that won the prize, the current game state, the winning of the jackpot, the type of the jackpot, and the production content (planned). The fluctuation pattern to be performed) is grasped.

In step S1432-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not it is changing. Specifically, the sub CPU 120a performs a process of determining whether or not a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If it is fluctuating, the process is transferred to step S1432-4, and if it is not fluctuating, the process is transferred to step S1433-3. In the present embodiment, it is determined that the delay display or redisplay is not determined when the change is not in progress (when the change icon does not exist), but the delay display or redisplay may be performed for the change icon. .. For example, if there is a prize at the start port when the icon is not fluctuating (such as when waiting for a customer), the delay display or redisplay may be performed when the fluctuating icon appears.

In step S1432-3, the sub CPU 120a determines the normal display as the icon appearance mode.

In step S1432-4, the sub CPU 120a acquires a random value for determining the appearance of the icon for determining the appearance mode (one of the normal display, the delayed display, and the redisplay) of the hold icon, and obtains a random value for determining the appearance of the icon. The icon appearance effect determination table (see FIG. 41) is selected according to the type and whether the game is in the low-probability game state or the high-probability game state. Details of this icon appearance effect determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

The sub CPU 120a determines the icon appearance mode in step S1432-5. Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 120a refers to the icon appearance effect determination table, and based on the start opening winning designation command and the icon appearance effect determination random number value, the appearance mode of the icon is "normally displayed". Determine either "delayed display" or "redisplayed".

The sub CPU 120a sets the determined icon appearance mode (one of normal display, delayed display, and redisplay) in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c in step S1432-6, and shifts the process to step S1432-7. As a result, the icon appearance mode designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the like, and processing for executing the icon appearance effect is performed.

In step S1432-7, the sub CPU 120a sets the icon non-appearance flag in a predetermined backup area provided in the sub RAM 120c. When this process is completed, the icon appearance effect determination process this time is completed. The icon non-appearance flag is cleared in the icon appearance completion determination process (step S1610) of the timer interrupt process when the appearance of the hold icon (drawing process for causing the hold icon to appear) is completed.

(Icon appearance production decision table)
FIG. 41 (a) shows an icon for the first special symbol display device referred to during the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state when the icon appearance effect performed when the first starting port 14 is won is determined. The appearance effect determination table (in the low-probability non-time-saving game state), FIG. 41 (b) shows the low-probability game state and the time-saving game state in the case of determining the icon appearance effect performed when the second starting port 15 is won. The icon appearance effect determination table for the second special symbol display device referred to in (in the low probability time-saving game state), FIG. 41 (c) determines the icon appearance effect performed when the second start port 15 is won. This is an icon appearance effect determination table for the second special symbol display device (in the high-probability time-saving game state) that is referred to during the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state.

In the following description, the icon appearance effect determination table for the first special symbol display device of FIG. 41 (a) (in the low probability non-time saving game state) and the second special symbol display device of FIG. 41 (b). The icon appearance effect determination table (in the low-probability time-saving game state) and the icon appearance effect determination table for the second special symbol display device in FIG. 41 (c) (in the high-probability time-saving game state) are collectively referred to as "icons". It may be described as "appearance effect determination table".

As shown in FIG. 41, each icon appearance effect determination table includes a special symbol display device, a jackpot judgment result, contents of a variation pattern (planned variation pattern) corresponding to a start opening prize designation command and a start opening prize designation command, and a jackpot determination. The result and the distribution ratio (%) of the icon appearance mode to be determined are associated with each other, and the effect content for each variable effect pattern is described as a reference.

As described above, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the icon appearance effect determination table for the first special symbol display device, which is referred to in the low-probability non-time-saving game state (see FIG. 41 (a)), In the icon appearance effect determination table for the second special symbol display device, which is referred to in the low-probability time-saving game state (see FIG. 41 (b)), and in the icon appearance effect determination table for the second special symbol display device. There is one that is referred to in the high-probability time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 41 (c)).

That is, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the icon appearance effect determination table referred to during the normal gaming state (during the low-probability non-time-saving game state) and the icon appearance effect determination table referred to during the low-probability time-saving game state. And an icon appearance effect determination table that is referred to during the high-probability time-saving game state is provided.

As shown in FIG. 41, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the probability that the delayed display or redisplay is determined in the icon appearance effect depending on the type of the starting port and whether it is in the low-probability gaming state or the high-probability gaming state. Is different. Specifically, in these icon appearance effect determination tables, the distribution ratios of normal display, delay display, and redisplay differ depending on whether the jackpot expectation level or SP reach develops.

In other words, in the icon appearance effect of the present embodiment, under different conditions (whether it is a non-time-saving game state or a time-saving game state, and whether it is a low-probability game state or a high-probability game state). Therefore, the jackpot expectation is different depending on the execution pattern (whether it is a normal display or a delayed display, etc.).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), in the icon appearance effect (icon appearance effect in the normal game state) performed when the first starting port 14 is won, a normal variation or a shortened variation is executed. When SP reach or SPSP reach is executed (when a production with high jackpot expectation is performed), delayed display or redisplay (hereinafter, "delayed display, etc.") is performed when normal reach is executed. There is a high probability that the delay display etc. will be decided in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss when the same SP reach etc. is performed. .. For example, there is a higher probability that the delay display etc. will be determined when the SP reach is performed than when the normal reach is performed, and when the SP reach is performed, the delay display etc. will be displayed in the case of a big hit than in the case of loss. The probability of being decided is high.

According to the above distribution ratio, in the icon appearance effect performed during the normal game state (during the low probability non-time saving game state), the jackpot expectation is high in the order of normal display <delay display <redisplay, and SP reach or higher (SP reach or higher). The possibility of developing into SP reach, SPSP reach, revival, full rotation reach) is normal display <delay display = redisplay. More specifically, in the icon appearance effect determination table for the first special symbol display device referred to during the normal gaming state of FIG. 41 (a), the delay display or redisplay is determined when the SP reach or more. If it is less than or equal to the normal reach, it will not be determined. Therefore, when a delay display or redisplay occurs, the development to SP reach or higher is confirmed (delay and redisplay are confirmed to be SP reach or higher = 100%).

As a result, the gaming machine 1 can give the player a sense of discomfort while giving the game a sharpness, and can increase expectations for future development such as SP reach and a big hit.

Here, if the event related to the icon appearance effect during the normal game state is explained from the player's point of view, the hold icon starts from the time of winning rather than the player's expectation for the jackpot when the hold icon appears at the time of winning. It means that the player has a greater expectation for the jackpot when it appears after a predetermined time.

Furthermore, when redisplaying is performed, if the appearance of the hold icon for one prize is explained in chronological order from the player's point of view, rather than "appearance of the hold icon at the time of winning", "a predetermined time from the time of winning" It can be said that "the appearance of the hold icon later" has a higher expectation for the jackpot (expectation for the jackpot for the appearance of the hold icon at the time of winning <expectation for the jackpot for the appearance of the hold icon after a predetermined time from the time of winning). .. In addition, when the event of redisplay is viewed in chronological order from the player's point of view, when the event "appearance of the first hold icon (appearance of the hold icon at the time of winning)" is encountered. It is said that the jackpot expectation that the player infers when encountering the event "the appearance of the hold icon for the second time (the appearance of the hold icon after a predetermined time)" is higher than the jackpot expectation that the player infers. It will be.

From another point of view, in the icon appearance effect during the normal game state, even if the hold icon appears at the time of winning, the player cannot determine whether or not the hold icon will appear again at that time (usually). It cannot be determined whether it is displayed or redisplayed). Therefore, it can be said that the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a time in which the player expects the hold icon to disappear and reappear.

As described above, according to the icon appearance effect determination table for the first special symbol display device (in the low probability non-time saving game state) of FIG. 41 (a), the player's jackpot in the icon appearance effect in the normal game state. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game and improve the interest of the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), the icon appearance effect performed in the low-probability gaming state (the icon appearance effect performed in the low-probability time-saving game state) triggered by the winning of the second starting port 15 is usually fluctuating or Probability that delay display etc. will be determined when SP reach or SPSP reach is executed (when a production with high jackpot expectation is performed) than when shortening fluctuation is executed or normal reach is executed. However, when the case of loss and the case of big hit are compared in the case where the same SP reach or the like is performed, there is no difference in the probability that the delay display or the like is determined. For example, while the probability that the delay display etc. is determined is higher when the SP reach is performed than when the normal reach is performed, the delay display is displayed in the case of a loss and the case of a big hit when the SP reach is performed. There is no difference in the probability that etc. will be determined.

According to the above distribution ratio, in the icon appearance effect performed during the low-probability time-saving game state, the jackpot expectation is high in the order of normal display <delayed display = redisplay, and SP reach or higher (SP reach, SPSP reach, resurrection). , Full rotation reach) is the normal display <delay display = redisplay. More specifically, in the icon appearance effect determination table for the second special symbol display device referred to during the low-probability time-saving game state of FIG. 41 (b), the delay display or redisplay is SP reach or more. It is decided to, and it is not decided when it is less than the normal reach. Therefore, when a delay display or redisplay occurs, the development to SP reach or higher is confirmed (delay and redisplay are confirmed to be SP reach or higher = 100%).

Here, each SP reach and SPSP reach in the present embodiment has one jackpot expectation for each reach. For example, SP reach 1 has a jackpot expectation of 1%, and SPSP reach 3 has a jackpot expectation of 33%. The jackpot expectation of each of these reach effects is calculated by a predetermined calculation formula in consideration of the jackpot probability, the ratio of special symbol determination, the ratio of reach determination, the selection ratio of fluctuation patterns, and the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), in the icon appearance effect, which of the three types of execution patterns (normal display, delayed display, and redisplay) is determined is determined. It depends on whether it is a loss or a big hit, and whether it is a determined variable production content. That is, as described above, the icon appearance effect also has one jackpot expectation for each execution pattern. The jackpot expectation of each of these execution patterns is calculated by a predetermined calculation formula in consideration of the jackpot probability, the ratio of special symbol determination, the ratio of reach judgment, the selection ratio of fluctuation patterns, the distribution ratio to the icon appearance effect, and the like. ..

As described above, one jackpot expectation is set for each of the reach effects, and one jackpot expectation is set for each of the execution patterns of the icon appearance effects. Therefore, each of the reach effects and the icon appearance effects is set. It can be said that the execution pattern is a production that directly suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit. However, the time series of the series of variable effects is that the icon appearance effect is performed first, and then the reach effect is executed in response to the icon appearance effect, and as described above, each of the icon appearance effects Since the jackpot expectation of the execution pattern is calculated by adding the jackpot expectation of each reach production, the icon appearance production suggests which reach production will be developed. From the side, it can be said that it is a production that indirectly suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit.

From this aspect, the gaming machine 1 gives the player a sense of discomfort while giving the game a sharpness, and when the player guesses whether or not a jackpot is given, a more advanced guessing factor (guessing). Information) can be provided. As a result, the gaming machine 1 can raise expectations for future development into SP reach and the like, and can further improve the interest of the game.

In the following explanation, a certain effect (for example, an icon appearance effect, a winning flash effect, a look-ahead effect such as an icon change effect, an action at the start of a change, a dialogue notice, a pseudo-ream, etc., regardless of whether the effect is changing) Although the jackpot expectation does not directly differ depending on whether or not it is executed (execution or non-execution) and the execution pattern (mode such as normal display or delayed display), after that, jackpot expectations such as SP reach are expected. If you want to describe the feature that the jackpot expectation is indirectly different depending on the execution presence or absence and the execution pattern, such as the possibility that other productions with a high degree will be performed, simply describe "the jackpot expectation is different indirectly". May be explained.

Further, according to the distribution ratio in FIG. 41 (c), in the icon appearance effect performed during the high-probability time-shortening game state, the jackpot expectation is high in the order of normal display = delayed display <redisplay, and SP reach or higher (SP). The possibility of developing into reach, SPSP reach, revival, full rotation reach) is normal display <delay display <redisplay.

That is, in the icon appearance effect performed during the high-probability time-saving game state, the jackpot expectation is the same between the normal display and the delayed display.

As a result, the gaming machine 1 can give a sharpness to the game without giving the player a sense of discomfort and unnecessarily raising or lowering the tension.

Here, the icon appearance effect of the gaming machine of the present invention may be such that there is no difference in the jackpot expectation depending on the execution pattern (the jackpot expectation is the same). More specifically, in the high-probability time-saving game state, as in the modified example of the icon appearance effect determination table for the second special symbol display device referred to during the high-probability time-saving game state shown in FIG. 41 (d). Regardless of whether normal display, delayed display, or redisplay is determined, there may be no difference in the jackpot expectation (normal display = delayed display = redisplay).

A modified example of FIG. 41 (d) will be described in more detail. According to the icon appearance effect determination table (in the high-probability time-saving game state) for the second special symbol display device of FIG. 41 (d), either the normal display, the delay display, or the redisplay is performed during the high-probability time-saving game state. Even if is done, there is no difference in the jackpot expectation.

Explaining this event in chronological order from the player's point of view, when the hold icon appears at the time of winning, the player's expectation for the jackpot for the event and the hold icon appear after a predetermined time from the time of winning. In that case, there is no difference from the player's expectation for the jackpot for the event. That is, no matter when the hold icon appears (whether it is at the time of winning or a predetermined time after winning), there is no difference in the jackpot expectation that the player estimates at that time.

Furthermore, when redisplaying is performed, each appearance of the hold icon for one prize will be explained in chronological order from the player's point of view. It can be said that there is no difference in the expectation of the jackpot held by the player at each point in time with "the appearance of the hold icon" (expectation for the jackpot for the appearance of the hold icon at the time of winning = hold after a predetermined time from the time of winning. Expectations for the jackpot for the appearance of the icon). In addition, when the event of redisplay is viewed in chronological order from the player's point of view, when the event "the appearance of the first hold icon (appearance of the hold icon at the time of winning)" is encountered. There is no difference between the jackpot expectation that the player infers and the jackpot expectation that the player infers when the event "the appearance of the hold icon for the second time (the appearance of the hold icon after a predetermined time)" is encountered. It turns out that.

As described above, according to the icon appearance effect determination table for the second special symbol display device of FIG. 41 (c), the player's tension is not unnecessarily raised or lowered in the icon appearance effect during the high-probability time-saving game state. , Can give tempo and sharpness to the game.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the appearance timing of the first hold icon when the delay display is performed and the appearance timing of the second hold icon when the display is performed again are set to 2 seconds from the time of winning. Although the example described later is shown, this timing may be different depending on the conditions under which the icon appearance effect is performed. For example, in the normal game state (low probability non-time saving game state), the hold icon appears 2 seconds after the winning in the delayed display or redisplay, while in the high probability time saving game state, the delay display or redisplay starts from the winning time. The hold icon may appear at a later timing such as 5 seconds later, or at an earlier timing.

With such a configuration, in a game performed under different conditions, it is possible to give a stronger sharpness and improve the interest of the game.

(Winning flash production decision processing)
Next, the winning flash effect determination process of the effect control unit 120 m will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a winning flash effect determination process in the effect control unit 120 m.

The "winning flash effect" is an effect performed when a prize is established for the starting port (first starting port 14 or second starting port 15). The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment outputs a sound effect at the time of winning and causes the heso lamp 34c to emit light in a predetermined mode as a winning flash effect.

More specifically, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a winning flash effect, a "weak pattern" that causes the heso lamp 34c to emit white light and outputs a specific sound A (a sound effect of "pickin" in the present embodiment). ", And a" strong pattern "that causes the heso lamp 34c to emit red light and outputs a specific sound B (sound effect of" piki-pi-kin "in this embodiment) can be executed. The jackpot expectation is higher in the order of no winning flash effect <with winning flash effect (weak pattern) <with winning flash effect (strong pattern).

The gaming machine of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is preferentially subtracted over the first special symbol reservation number (U1), thereby improving excessive gambling for the player. From the viewpoint of prevention, in the time-saving game state, only the winning flash effect corresponding to the second special symbol hold is executed without executing the winning flash effect corresponding to the first special symbol hold. In the normal game state, since the second special symbol hold is unlikely to occur, only the winning flash effect corresponding to the first special symbol hold may be executed, or the first special symbol hold and the second special symbol hold may be executed. It is also possible to execute a winning flash effect according to both sides.

First, the sub CPU 120a refers to the received start opening winning designation command in step S1433-1. Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the received start opening winning designation command, and grasps the winning / winning of the jackpot, the type of the jackpot, and the effect content (planned fluctuation pattern).

In step S1433-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the icon appearance mode is "delayed display" or "redisplay". Specifically, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the appearance mode of the icon determined in the icon appearance effect determination process is determined to be either "delayed display" or "redisplay". If the icon appearance mode is not "delayed display" or "redisplay", the process is moved to step S1433-3, and if the icon appearance mode is "delayed display" or "redisplay", the winning flash this time. The production determination process ends.

In the present embodiment, the winning flash effect is not performed when the delayed display or redisplay is determined in the icon appearance effect, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment. That is, when it is decided to perform delayed display or redisplay in the icon appearance effect, the winning flash effect may be performed. In that case, for example, the winning flash effect will be performed when the icon is delayed or redisplayed.

In step S1433-3, the sub CPU 120a acquires a random number value for determining the winning flash effect for determining the winning flash effect, and determines the presence / absence of the winning flash effect and the execution pattern of the winning flash effect determination table (FIG. 43). See). Details of this winning flash effect determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1433-4 whether or not the execution of the winning flash effect is determined. Specifically, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the execution of any of the "weak pattern" and the "strong pattern" of the winning flash effect is determined in the process of step 1433-3. When it is decided to execute the winning flash effect, the process is moved to step S1433-5. If the execution of the winning flash effect is not decided, the current winning flash effect determination process is terminated.

In step S1433-5, the sub CPU 120a sets a winning flash effect designation command indicating the determined winning flash effect (either a weak pattern or a strong pattern) in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, and sets the winning flash effect this time. The decision process ends. As a result, the winning flash effect designation command is transmitted to the lamp control unit 170 and the like, and processing for executing the winning flash effect is performed.

(Winning flash production decision table)
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a winning flash effect determination table that is referred to when determining the presence / absence of the winning flash effect and the execution pattern.

As shown in FIG. 43, the winning flash effect determination table contains the jackpot determination result, the contents of the variation pattern (planned variation pattern) corresponding to the start opening winning designation command and the starting opening winning designation command, the jackpot determination result, and the winning flash effect. The distribution ratio (%) of the execution pattern of is associated.

As shown in FIG. 43, in the present embodiment, the probability that the winning flash effect is determined is higher when SP reach, SPSP reach, etc. are executed (when the effect with high expectation of big hit is performed), and the same. When SP reach is performed, the probability that the winning flash effect will be decided is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss. For example, there is a higher probability that the winning flash effect will be decided when the SP reach is performed than when the normal reach is performed, and when the SP reach is performed, the winning flash is more likely to be a big hit than when the SP reach is lost. The probability that the production will be decided is high.

That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation increases in the order of no winning flash effect <with winning flash effect (weak pattern) <with winning flash effect (strong pattern), and develops into SP reach and the like. It is more likely to do.

As a result, the gaming machine 1 can develop into SP reach and the like in the look-ahead production and raise expectations for big hits.

(Variable effect pattern determination process)
Next, the variation effect pattern determination process of the effect control unit 120 m will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a variation effect pattern determination process in the effect control unit 120 m.

The sub CPU 120a refers to the received variation pattern designation command in step S1451-1 and selects the variation effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 45) in step S1451-2.

In step S1451-3, the sub CPU 120a refers to the variation effect pattern determination table and determines one variation effect pattern from the plurality of variation effect patterns based on the variation pattern designation command and the distribution ratio (%). .. Details of this variation effect pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.

In step S1451-4, the sub CPU 120a sets the variation effect pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, and ends the current variation effect pattern determination process. As a result, the variation effect pattern designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for executing the variation effect is performed.

(Variable production pattern determination table)
FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a variation effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the variation effect pattern. The variation effect pattern determination table is associated with the variation pattern designation command and the determined variation effect pattern, and the effect configuration for each variation effect pattern is described as a reference.

The variable effect pattern includes an image display device 31 (effect display area 70), an audio output device 32, a panel drive device 33, a panel lighting device 34a, a frame lighting device 34b, a heso lamp 34c, an effect button 35, and an operation lever 36. It is an effect mode of the variable effect performed by using the effect device of the above, and the presence / absence of the reach effect, the content of the reach effect, the content of the pseudo-ream, and the like are defined.

Here, each term described in the effect configuration of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 will be described.

The “normal variation” indicates that a normal variation effect is performed in which the reach state is not formed by the effect symbol 38.
The “shortening variation” indicates that the shortening variation effect is performed in which the reach state is not formed by the effect symbol 38, which is shorter than the normal variation effect.
The "pseudo-ream failure" indicates that a fanning effect of whether or not the pseudo-ream is executed is executed, but the result is that the pseudo-ream is not executed in the end.
The "normal reach" indicates that a normal reach effect is performed in which a reach state is formed by the effect symbol 38.

The "normal pseudo" (N pseudo) indicates that the two effect symbols 38 develop into a pseudo-ream (in a non-reach state) without reaching.
The "post-reach pseudo" (post-R pseudo) indicates that the two effect symbols 38 develop into a pseudo-ream after reaching the reach.

The “SP reach” indicates that the reach state is formed by the effect symbol 38, and the SP reach effect having a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect is performed.
The "SPSP reach" indicates that the reach state is formed by the effect symbol 38, and the SPSP reach effect having a higher expectation of a big hit than the SP reach effect is performed.

"Resurrection" means that the effect that the effect symbol 38 is once lost is performed from the reach state, and then the effect is reversed and the jackpot notification is performed. The revival effect is a reach effect that is executed only when the jackpot lottery is won.
“Full rotation” indicates that a full rotation reach effect that fluctuates at a low speed is performed in a state where all combinations of a plurality of effect symbols 38 for notifying a jackpot are aligned. The full rotation reach effect is a reach effect that is executed only when the player wins the jackpot lottery.

As a reference, FIG. 45 shows the number of pseudo-reams and the name of the variable effect, which indicate how many times the pseudo-ream is performed for each variable effect pattern.

In the following description and drawings, the normal pseudo may be described as "N pseudo" and the post-reach pseudo may be described as "R post-pseudo".

Further, in the following description, the case where one pseudo-ream is performed during one fluctuation and the second pseudo-ream is not performed may be described simply as "pseudo-two stays". Further, the case where the first pseudo-ream is performed and then the second pseudo-ream is performed during one fluctuation may be described simply as "pseudo 3 reached".

Further, in the following description, the first pseudo-variation in the case where one or more pseudo-reams are performed during one variation is simply described as "pseudo-one variation", and the second pseudo-variation is simply "pseudo-variation". It may be described as "pseudo 2 fluctuation". In addition, the third pseudo-variation in the case where two pseudo-reams are performed during one variation may be described simply as "pseudo-three variation".

Here, the contents of the pseudo-ream and the number of pseudo-reams performed in SP reach 1 to 5, SPSP reach 1 to 3, resurrection, and full rotation will be described.

In "SP reach 1", a normal pseudo is performed as one pseudo series.
In "SP reach 2", the post-reach pseudo is performed as one pseudo series.
In "SP Reach 3", two pseudo-reams are performed. More specifically, the normal pseudo is performed as the first pseudo-ream, and the normal pseudo is performed as the second pseudo-ream.
In "SP Reach 4", two pseudo-reams are performed. More specifically, a normal pseudo is performed as the first pseudo-ream, and a post-reach pseudo is performed as the second pseudo-ream.
In "SP Reach 5", two pseudo-reams are performed. More specifically, the post-reach pseudo is performed as the first pseudo-ream, and the post-reach pseudo is performed as the second pseudo-ream.
In "SPSP Reach 1", two pseudo-reams are performed. More specifically, the normal pseudo is performed as the first pseudo-ream, and the normal pseudo is performed as the second pseudo-ream.
In "SPSP Reach 2", two pseudo-reams are performed. More specifically, a normal pseudo is performed as the first pseudo-ream, and a post-reach pseudo is performed as the second pseudo-ream.
In "SPSP Reach 3", two pseudo-reams are performed. More specifically, the post-reach pseudo is performed as the first pseudo-ream, and the post-reach pseudo is performed as the second pseudo-ream.
In "Resurrection", two pseudo-reams are performed. More specifically, the post-reach pseudo is performed as the first pseudo-ream, and the post-reach pseudo is performed as the second pseudo-ream.
In the "full rotation reach", two pseudo-reams are performed. More specifically, the post-reach pseudo is performed as the first pseudo-ream, and the post-reach pseudo is performed as the second pseudo-ream.

Here, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, normal reach <SP reach 1 (normal pseudo, pseudo-ream number 1 time) <SP reach 2 (post-reach pseudo, pseudo-ream number 1 time) <SP reach 3 (normal pseudo-> Normal pseudo, pseudo-ream count 2 times) <SP reach 4 (normal pseudo-> post-reach pseudo, pseudo-ream count 2 times) <SP reach 5 (post-reach pseudo-> post-reach pseudo, pseudo-ream count 2 times) Expectations are high (see FIGS. 10 and 11).

That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect are more likely to be determined when the pseudo-ream is executed than when the pseudo-ream is not executed, and the number of times the pseudo-ream is executed is larger. The higher the jackpot expectation, the higher the expectation. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation regarding whether or not the pseudo-ream is executed or the number of times the pseudo-ream is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is not provided with the variation effect pattern in which the normal reach is performed and the SP SP reach is performed after the SP reach is performed, but it may be provided.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if the number of pseudo-reams is the same, the jackpot expectation is higher in the case where the SPSP reach is performed than in the case where the SP reach is performed. Specifically, SP reach 3 (normal pseudo-> normal pseudo, pseudo-ream count 2 times) <SP reach 4 (normal pseudo-> post-reach pseudo, pseudo-ream count 2 times) <SP reach 5 (post-reach pseudo-> post-reach) Pseudo, pseudo-ream count 2 times) <SPSP reach 1 (normal pseudo-> normal pseudo, pseudo-ream count 2 times) <SPSP reach 2 (normal pseudo-> post-reach pseudo, pseudo-ream count 2 times) <SPSP reach 3 (after reach) The jackpot expectation increases in the order of pseudo → pseudo after reach, pseudo-ream number 2 times) (see FIGS. 10 and 11).

(Action determination process at the start of fluctuation)
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the action determination process at the start of fluctuation of the effect control unit 120 m will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the action determination process at the start of fluctuation in the effect control unit 120 m.

The "action at the start of fluctuation" is an effect performed immediately after the start of fluctuation. The change start action of the present embodiment is such that the effect symbol 38 performs a movement (action) different from the normal (when the change start action is not executed) (see FIG. 77).

First, the sub CPU 120a refers to the variation effect pattern determined in step S1452-1, and in step S1452-2, using the variation start action determination table (FIG. 47), whether or not the variation start action is executed. To determine. The details of the action determination table at the start of fluctuation will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1452-3 whether or not the execution of the variation start action is determined. If it is decided to execute the action at the start of fluctuation, the process is transferred to step S1452-4, and if the execution of the action at the start of fluctuation is not decided (when no action at the start of fluctuation is decided), the process is moved to step S1452-4. The action determination process at the start of this fluctuation is terminated.

In step S1452-4, the sub CPU 120a sets the fluctuation start action designation command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the fluctuation start action designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150, and processing for executing the fluctuation start action is performed.

(Action decision table at the start of fluctuation)
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a variation start action determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the variation start action. The change start action determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the change effect pattern type, and the distribution ratio (%) of whether or not to execute the change start action.

As a feature of the action determination table at the start of fluctuation shown in FIG. 47, the action at the start of fluctuation is more likely to be determined and the expectation of jackpot is lower in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a loss in the jackpot lottery result. It can be pointed out that the action at the start of fluctuation is more likely to be executed when the fluctuation effect pattern with a high jackpot expectation is determined than when the pattern is determined.

(Serif notice decision processing)
Next, the dialogue advance notice determination process of the effect control unit 120 m will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a dialogue advance notice determination process in the effect control unit 120 m.

The "line notice" is an effect in which the image display device 31 displays lines and characters suggesting the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and the voice corresponding to the lines is output from the voice output device 32. be.

First, the sub CPU 120a refers to the variation effect pattern determined in step S1453-1, and in step S1453-2, uses the dialogue advance notice execution determination table (see FIG. 49A) to execute the dialogue advance notice. Determine the presence or absence. The details of this dialogue advance notice execution decision table will be described later with reference to FIG. 49 (a).

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1453-3 whether or not the execution of the dialogue notice is determined. When the execution of the dialogue notice is decided, the process is moved to step S1453-4, and when the execution of the dialogue notice is not decided (when it is decided that there is no dialogue notice), the current dialogue notice determination processing is performed. To finish.

In step S1453-4, the sub CPU 120a determines the display color of the dialogue using the dialogue display color determination table (see FIG. 49B). Details of this dialogue display color determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 49 (b).

In step S1453-5, the sub CPU 120a performs a serif pattern using the serif pattern determination table (see FIG. 49C). Details of this serif pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 49 (c).

In step S1453-6, the sub CPU 120a sets a serif notice designation command corresponding to the determined serif display color and serif pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the dialogue advance notice designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for executing the dialogue advance notice is performed.

(Serif notice execution decision table)
FIG. 49A is a diagram showing a dialogue advance notice execution determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the dialogue advance notice. The dialogue notice execution decision table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variable effect pattern type, and the distribution ratio (%) of whether or not to execute the dialogue notice.

In the dialogue notice execution decision table, "no notice" in which the dialogue notice is not executed and "with notice" in which the dialogue notice is executed are set.

As a feature of the dialogue advance notice execution decision table shown in FIG. 49 (a), it is easier to determine the dialogue advance notice in the case of a jackpot than in the case where the jackpot lottery result is lost, and the expectation of the jackpot is low. There is a point that it is easier to determine the dialogue notice when the variable effect pattern with a high jackpot expectation is determined than when the pattern is determined. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Serif display color determination table)
FIG. 49B is a diagram showing a dialogue display color determination table that is referred to when determining the dialogue display color in the dialogue notice. The dialogue display color determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variation effect pattern type, and the distribution ratio (%) of the dialogue display color.

In the dialogue display color determination table, the distribution of display colors indicating how many colors the character image of the dialogue is to be displayed is set. Specifically, four types of "white lines", "red lines", "gold lines", and "rainbow lines" are set in the line display color determination table. The jackpot expectation is higher in the order of white dialogue <red dialogue <gold dialogue <rainbow dialogue, and the rainbow dialogue is a production in which the execution of the jackpot game is confirmed. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Serif pattern determination table)
FIG. 49 (c) is a diagram showing a serif pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a serif pattern. The dialogue pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variable effect pattern type, and the distribution ratio (%) for each dialogue pattern.

Four types of dialogue patterns (line A, dialogue B, dialogue C, and dialogue D) with different jackpot expectations are set for the dialogue pattern, and jackpot expectation is made in the order of dialogue A <line B <line C <line D. The degree is high.

As a feature of the dialogue pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 (c), the dialogue pattern with a high jackpot expectation is more likely to be determined in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a loss in the jackpot lottery result, and the jackpot expectation is lower. There is a point that it is easier to determine the dialogue with a high jackpot expectation when the variable effect pattern with a high jackpot expectation is determined than when the variable effect pattern is determined. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

Here, the dialogue notice is performed 2 seconds after the start of fluctuation regardless of which dialogue display color or dialogue pattern is determined. In other words, the timing at which the dialogue notice occurs is fixed regardless of the jackpot expectation. That is, the dialogue notice is performed as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit by the dialogue display color and the dialogue pattern, while the timing of occurrence is constant.

(Timer production decision processing)
Next, the timer effect determination process of the effect control unit 120 m will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a timer effect determination process in the effect control unit 120 m.

The "timer effect" is an effect that suggests that any of a plurality of events that expect the jackpot game to be executed in the process of executing the variable effect, and the timing at which the event occurs. In the timer effect, it is difficult for the player to determine the type of event when the event is executed, and the type of event can be determined when the event occurs.

First, in step S1454-1, the sub CPU 120a refers to the current variation effect pattern, and in step S1454-2, any one of SP reach or higher (SP reach, SPSP reach, resurrection, and full rotation reach). ) Is executed. If it is SP reach or higher, the process is moved to step S1454-3, and if it is not SP reach or higher, the timer effect determination process this time is terminated.

In step S1454-3, the sub CPU 120a uses the timer number determination table (see FIG. 51 (a)) to determine the number of timer effects (“0 times” to “2 times”) to be executed during the current variation effect. decide. Details of this timer number determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 51 (a).

In step S1454-4, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the execution of the timer effect is determined (whether or not the number of timers is one or more). When the execution of the timer effect is decided (when the number of timers is "1 time" or "2 times"), the process is transferred to step S1454-5, and when the execution of the timer effect is not decided (timer). When the number of times is "0 times"), the timer effect determination process this time is terminated.

In step S1454-5, the sub CPU 120a determines the timer type using the timer type determination table (see FIG. 51 (b)). Details of this timer type determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 51 (b).

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1454-6 whether or not the determined number of timers is one. If it is once, the process is transferred to step S1454-7, and if it is not once (in the case of two times), the process is transferred to step S1454-9.

In step S1454-7, the sub CPU 120a determines the suggestion event suggested by the timer effect using the suggestion event determination table for one timer (see FIG. 52A). The details of the suggestion event determination table for one timer will be described later with reference to FIG. 52 (a).

In step S1454-8, the sub CPU 120a sets a timer effect designation command indicating a suggestion event and a timer type pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, and ends the current timer effect determination process. As a result, the timer effect designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for executing the timer effect is performed.

In step S1454-9, the sub CPU 120a determines the suggestion event suggested by the first timer effect and the second timer effect by using the suggestion event determination table for the second timer (see FIG. 52B). do. The details of the suggestion event determination table for the two timers will be described later with reference to FIG. 52 (b).

In step S1454-10, the sub CPU 120a sets a timer effect designation command indicating a suggestion event and a timer type in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the timer effect designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for executing the first and second timer effects is performed.

(Timer count determination table)
FIG. 51A is a diagram showing a timer number determination table that is referred to when determining the number of timer effects executed during the variation effect. The timer number determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variation effect pattern, and the distribution ratio (%) for each number of timer effects.

The number of timer effects includes "0 times", which means that the timer effect is not executed, "1 time", which means that the timer effect is executed once, and "1 time", which means that the timer effect is executed twice. Three types of "twice" are set.

The first feature of the timer number determination table shown in FIG. 51 (a) is that the timer effect is more easily determined and the expectation of the jackpot is lower in the case of the jackpot than in the case where the jackpot lottery result is lost. There is a point that the timer effect is more easily determined when the reach effect with a high jackpot expectation is executed than when the reach effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of times the timer effect is executed is more likely to be increased in the case of the jackpot than in the case of the jackpot lottery result being lost. There is. That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the higher the number of times the timer effect is executed, the higher the expectation of a big hit (no timer effect (timer 0 times) <timer 1 time <timer 2 times). By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the number of times the timer effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of times the timer effect is executed is larger when the reach effect with a high jackpot expectation is executed than when the reach effect with a low jackpot expectation is executed. It is easy to do. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Timer type determination table)
FIG. 51B is a diagram showing a timer type determination table that is referred to when determining the type of timer effect (timer type). The timer type determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variation effect pattern, and the distribution ratio (%) for each timer type.

As shown in FIG. 51 (b), in the present embodiment, three types of timers, "short timer", "middle timer", and "long timer", are set. The timer type indicates that the timer time (the time from when the timer image is displayed until the timer time is subtracted and becomes "0") is different, and the timer time is in the order of short timer <middle timer <long timer. It's getting longer. In addition, the expectation of big hits is higher in the order of short timer <middle timer <long timer.

The first feature of the timer type determination table shown in FIG. 51 (b) is that it is easier to determine the timer type with a longer timer time in the case of a jackpot than in the case where the jackpot lottery result is lost, and the jackpot is a jackpot. It is easier to determine the timer type with a long timer time when the reach effect with high jackpot expectation is executed than when the reach effect with low expectation is executed. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the timer type having a longer timer time is determined when the reach effect with a high jackpot expectation is executed than when the reach effect with a low jackpot expectation is executed. It is easy to be done. That is, the higher the jackpot expectation, the easier it is to determine the long timer as the timer type. By doing so, the player has a sense of expectation for the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the timer effect is performed a plurality of times (twice in the present embodiment), the second timer subtraction time becomes longer than the first timer subtraction time. (1st timer subtraction time <2nd timer subtraction time). That is, in the present embodiment, when the first timer effect is the middle timer, the short timer or the middle timer is not determined as the second timer effect, and the second timer effect is from the first timer effect. Also, a long timer with a long timer subtraction time is determined. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation due to the display of a short timer after the first timer effect.

(Suggestion event decision table)
FIG. 52A is a diagram showing a suggestion event determination table for one timer, which is referred to when determining a suggestion event when the timer effect is executed once during one fluctuation effect. The suggestion event determination table for one timer is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variation effect pattern, and the distribution ratio (%) for each suggestion event, and the pseudo-ream number is shown for reference.

Further, FIG. 52B is a diagram showing a suggestion event determination table for two timers, which is referred to when determining a suggestion event when the timer effect is executed twice during one fluctuation effect. The suggestion event determination table for the two timers is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variation effect pattern, and the distribution ratio (%) for each suggestion event, and the pseudo-ream number is shown for reference.

The "suggestion event" is an effect of being notified after the timer subtraction time becomes "0". In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, five types of suggestion events notified by the timer effect are set: pseudo-ream, SP reach, SPSP reach, resurrection, and full rotation reach effect.

(Stock production decision processing)
Next, the stock effect determination process of the effect control unit 120 m will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a stock effect determination process in the effect control unit 120 m.

The "stock effect" is an effect that suggests that any of a plurality of events that expect the jackpot game to be executed occurs in the process of executing the variable effect. In the stock effect of the present embodiment, the color change of the variable icon (the variable icon change effect) is executed at the time of stock release.

In the present embodiment, it is difficult for the player to determine what the event (suggestion event) suggested by the stock effect is at the time when the stock effect is started (when the stock icon is displayed). More specifically, in the stock production of the present embodiment, when the display of the stock icon is started, there is no suggestion of what will happen (what is the suggestion event) due to the activation (release) of the stock icon. ..

Therefore, although the player can recognize that something will happen (some kind of production will occur), it is difficult for the player to know what will happen until the stock icon is activated. , When the display mode of the variable icon changes due to the activation of the stock icon (notification of the suggested event) (when the color of the variable icon is changed), the suggested event of the stock effect is the variable icon color change. It can be determined that the icon has been removed.

First, the sub CPU 120a refers to the icon change scenario corresponding to the variable icon in step S1455-1, and determines whether or not the variable icon change effect is executed in step S1455-2. If the icon change effect is to be executed, the process is moved to step S1455-3, and if the icon change effect is not to be executed, the stock effect determination process this time is terminated.

In step S1455-3, the sub CPU 120a refers to the current variation effect pattern, and in step S1455-4, whether or not a reach effect (SP reach, SPSP reach, revival, full rotation reach) equal to or higher than SP reach is executed. Is determined. If it is SP reach or higher, the process is moved to step S1455-5, and if it is not SP reach or higher, the stock effect determination process this time is terminated.

In step S1455-5, the sub CPU 120a determines the number of times the stock effect is executed by using the stock effect execution determination table (FIG. 54 (a)). The details of this stock effect execution decision table will be described later with reference to FIG. 54 (a).

The sub CPU 120a determines in step S1455-6 whether or not the execution of the stock effect is determined. When the execution of the stock effect is decided (when the number of stock icons ≥ 1), the process is moved to step S1455-7, and when the execution of the stock effect is not decided (when the number of stock icons = 0). Will end the stock production decision process this time.

In step S1455-7, the sub CPU 120a determines the waiting time type classified according to the length of the waiting time of the stock icon by using the stock activation pattern determination table (FIG. 54 (b)). Details of the stock activation pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 54 (b).

In step S1455-8, the sub CPU 120a sets a stock effect designation command indicating the number of stock icons and the waiting time type in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the stock effect designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the frame control board 180, and processing for executing the stock effect is performed.

(Stock production execution decision table)
FIG. 54A is a diagram showing a stock effect execution determination table that is referred to when determining the number of stock icons for the stock effect. The stock effect execution decision table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the number of icon color changes due to the fluctuation, the variation effect pattern, and the distribution ratio (%) of the number of stock icons.

As shown in FIG. 54 (a), in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the stock effect is more easily determined and the jackpot expectation is lower in the case of the jackpot than in the case of the jackpot lottery result being lost. It is easier to determine the stock effect when the reach effect with high jackpot expectation is executed than when the effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Stock activation pattern determination table)
FIG. 54B is a diagram showing a stock activation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the type of waiting time of the stock icon. The stock activation pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result and the distribution ratio (%) of the waiting time type. In the stock activation pattern determination table, the number of stock icons and the waiting time of the first and second stock icons are defined as the stock activation pattern (execution pattern of the stock effect).

Two types of waiting time types are set: a waiting time A, which is a short waiting time, and a waiting time B, which is a long waiting time (waiting time A <waiting time B). In the present embodiment, an example in which two types of standby time are used is shown, but one type or three or more types of standby time may be set.

As shown in FIG. 54 (b), in the stock effect of the present embodiment, when there is one stock icon, the waiting time A or the waiting time B is determined. When there are two stock icons, the waiting time A is determined as the waiting time of the first stock icon, and the waiting time B is determined as the waiting time of the second stock icon. The jackpot expectation is higher in the waiting time B than in the waiting time A (waiting time A <waiting time B). In addition, the jackpot expectation is higher for two stock icons than for one stock icon (1 stock icon <2 stock icons).

The first feature of the stock activation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 54 (b) is that in the case of one stock icon, the waiting time B is longer in the case of the jackpot than in the case of the jackpot lottery result being lost. The waiting time B is more likely to be determined when the reach effect having a high jackpot expectation is executed than when the reach effect which is easy to determine and has a low jackpot expectation is executed. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the waiting time B is more likely to be determined when the reach effect with a high jackpot expectation is executed than when the reach effect with a low jackpot expectation is executed. ing. That is, the higher the jackpot expectation is, the longer the waiting time is likely to be determined. By doing so, the longer the waiting time in the stock production, the higher the expectation of a big hit, so that the player has a sense of expectation for the length of the waiting time of the stock icon, and the interest of the game is improved. It becomes possible.

Here, as will be described in detail later, in the stock effect of the present embodiment, when there are a plurality of stock icons (two in the present embodiment), two stock icons are displayed at the same time and two stock icons are displayed. The first stock icon is activated after the waiting time A, and the second stock icon is activated after the waiting time B. In other words, in the stock effect of the present embodiment, after the two stock icons are displayed at the same time, the first stock icon and the second stock icon are activated with a time lag.

(Cut-in pattern determination process)
Next, the cut-in determination process of the effect control unit 120 m will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a cut-in determination process in the effect control unit 120 m.

The “cut-in” means that the cut-in image is displayed and the expected degree of jackpot is indicated by the display color of the cut-in image. In the present embodiment, the cut-in is displayed at the end of SP reach, SPSP reach, and the like.

First, in step S1456-1, the sub CPU 120a refers to the current variation effect pattern, and in step S1456-2, any one of SP reach or higher (SP reach, SPSP reach, resurrection, and full rotation reach). ) Is executed. If it is SP reach or higher, the process is moved to step S1456-3, and if it is not SP reach or higher, the cut-in determination process this time is terminated.

In step S1456-3, the sub CPU 120a determines a cut-in pattern (any of green cut-in, red cut-in, and gold cut-in) using the cut-in pattern determination table (see FIG. 56). Details of this cut-in pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

In step S1456-4, the sub CPU 120a sets the cut-in designation command corresponding to the determined cut-in pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, and ends the cut-in determination process. As a result, the cut-in pattern designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 150, and processing for executing the display of the cut-in is performed.

(Cut-in pattern determination table)
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a cut-in pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a cut-in pattern. The cut-in pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variable effect pattern type, and the distribution ratio (%) for each cut-in pattern.

The cut-in pattern determination table has three types of cut-in patterns (green cut-in, red cut-in, and gold cut-in) with different jackpot expectations. Green cut-in <red cut-in <gold cut-in Expectations for big hits are higher in this order.

As a feature of the cut-in pattern determination table shown in FIG. 56, a cut-in pattern with a high jackpot expectation is more likely to be determined in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a loss in the jackpot lottery result, and the jackpot expectation is low. A point is that it is easier to determine a cut-in pattern with a high jackpot expectation when a variable effect pattern with a high jackpot expectation is determined than when an effect pattern is determined. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the jackpot game will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Error notification start processing)
Next, the error notification start processing of the effect control unit 120m will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an error notification start process in the effect control unit 120 m.

As described above, "error notification" is a general term for notification of various errors, and in the present embodiment, RAM clear notification, power recovery notification, abnormal winning error notification, magnetic detection error notification, winning frequency abnormal error notification, door. Includes open error notification, switch unconnected error notification, and full tank error notification. Further, the error notification is performed by using the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the decorative lighting device 34, and the like, as will be described in detail later.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and various types of error notification can be set, and other than the above-mentioned error notification may be included.

First, in step S1511-1, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a RAM clear command. If it is a RAM clear command, the process is transferred to step S1511-2, and if it is not a RAM clear command, the process is transferred to step S1511-3.

The sub CPU 120a performs the RAM clear notification start process in step S1511-2. Specifically, the process of setting the notification start instruction command for starting the RAM clear notification in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the lamp control unit 170, and processing for executing the RAM clear notification is performed. When this process is completed, the error notification start process this time is terminated.

In step S1513-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the received command is a power recovery command. If it is a power recovery command, the process is moved to step S1511-4, and if it is not a power recovery command, the process is moved to step S1511-5.

The sub CPU 120a performs the power restoration notification start process in step S1511-4. Specifically, when the received command is a power recovery command, a process of setting a notification start instruction command for executing the power recovery notification in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c is performed. As a result, the notification start instruction command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the lamp control unit 170, and processing for executing the power restoration notification is performed. When this process is completed, the error notification start process this time is terminated.

In step S1511-5, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the received command is an abnormal winning error designation command. If it is an abnormal winning error designation command, the process is transferred to step S1511-6, and if it is not an abnormal winning error designation command, the process is transferred to step S1511-7.

In step S1511-6, the sub CPU 120a performs the abnormal winning error notification start processing. Specifically, when the received command is an abnormal winning error designation command, a process of setting a notification start instruction command for executing abnormal winning error notification in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c is performed. As a result, the notification start instruction command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the lamp control unit 170, and processing for executing the abnormal winning error notification is performed. When this process is completed, the error notification start process this time is terminated.

In step S1511-7, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the received command is a magnetic detection error designation command. If it is a magnetic detection error designation command, the process is transferred to step S1511-8, and if it is not a magnetic detection error designation command, the process is transferred to step S1511-9.

The sub CPU 120a performs the magnetic detection error notification start processing in step S1511-8. Specifically, when the received command is a magnetic detection error designation command, a process of setting a notification start instruction command for executing magnetic detection error notification in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c is performed. As a result, the notification start instruction command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the lamp control unit 170, and processing for executing the magnetic detection error notification is performed. When this process is completed, the error notification start process this time is terminated.

In step S1511-9, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the received command is a winning frequency abnormality error designation command. If it is a winning frequency abnormality error designation command, the process is transferred to step S1511-10, and if it is not a winning frequency abnormality error designation command, the processing is transferred to step S1511-111.

In step S15110-10, the sub CPU 120a performs the winning frequency abnormality error notification start processing. Specifically, when the received command is a winning frequency abnormality error designation command, a process of setting a notification start instruction command for executing the winning frequency abnormality error notification in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c is performed. As a result, the notification start instruction command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the lamp control unit 170, and processing for executing the winning frequency abnormality error notification is performed. When this process is completed, the error notification start process this time is terminated.

In step S151-11, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the received command is the door opening start designation command. If it is a door opening start designation command, the process is transferred to step S1511-2, and if it is not a door opening start designation command, the process is transferred to step S1511-113.

In step S1511-2, the sub CPU 120a performs the door opening error notification start process. Specifically, when the received command is a door opening start designation command, a process of setting a notification start instruction command for executing door opening error notification in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c is performed. As a result, the notification start instruction command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the lamp control unit 170, and processing for executing the door opening error notification is performed. When this process is completed, the error notification start process this time is terminated.

In step S1511-113, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the received command is a switch non-connection error start designation command. If it is a switch non-connection error start specification command, the process is transferred to step S1511-14, and if it is not a switch non-connection error start specification command, the process is transferred to step S1511-15.

In step S1511-14, the sub CPU 120a performs the switch non-connection error notification start process. Specifically, when the received command is a switch non-connection error start designation command, a process of setting a notification start instruction command for executing switch non-connection error notification in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c is performed. As a result, the notification start instruction command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the lamp control unit 170, and processing for executing the switch unconnected error notification is performed. When this process is completed, the error notification start process this time is terminated.

In step S1511-15, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the received command is a dish full tank error start designation command. If it is a dish full tank error start designation command, the process is moved to step S1511-16, and if it is not a dish full tank error start designation command, the current error notification start process is terminated.

In step S15116-16, the sub CPU 120a performs the dish full tank error notification start process. Specifically, when the received command is a dish full tank error start designation command, a process of setting a notification start instruction command for executing the dish full tank error notification in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c is performed. As a result, the notification start instruction command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the lamp control unit 170, and processing for executing the dish full tank error notification is performed. When this process is completed, the error notification start process this time is terminated.

(Error notification end judgment processing)
Next, the error notification end determination process of the effect control unit 120 m will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an error notification end determination process in the effect control unit 120 m.

First, the sub CPU 120a determines in step S1520-1 whether or not the RAM clear notification is being executed. If the RAM clear notification is being executed, the process is transferred to step S1520-2, and if the RAM clear notification is not being executed, the process is transferred to step S1520-4.

In step S1520-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not 120 seconds have elapsed from the start of the RAM clear notification. If 120 seconds have passed from the start of the RAM clear notification, the process is moved to step S1520-3, and if 120 seconds have not passed since the start of the RAM clear notification, the current error notification end determination process is ended. ..

In step S1520-3, the sub CPU 120a performs the RAM clear notification end process for ending the RAM clear notification that is already being executed. In this RAM clear notification end process, a notification end instruction command for ending the RAM clear notification is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the notification end instruction command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the lamp control unit 170, and processing for ending the RAM clear notification is performed. When this process is completed, the error notification end determination process is terminated.

In step S1520-4, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the power restoration notification is being executed. If the power restoration notification is being executed, the process is transferred to step S1520-5, and if the power restoration notification is not being executed, the process is transferred to step S1520-11. In the process, the sub CPU 120a is used to perform notification by the image display device 31 (display of an image dedicated to error notification of power restoration notification), notification by the voice output device 32 (notification by sound), and decorative lighting device among the power restoration notifications. When at least one of the notifications by 34 (notification by the lamp) is being executed, it is determined that the power restoration notification is being executed.

In step S1520-5, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the dedicated image is being displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the error notification dedicated image (see FIG. 99) for notifying the power restoration is being displayed. If it is determined that the error notification dedicated image is being displayed, the process is moved to step S1520-6, and if it is determined that the error notification dedicated image is not being displayed, the process is moved to step S1520-9. ..

In step S1520-6, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the next command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the next command such as the fluctuation start command has been received. If it is determined that the next command has been received, the process is transferred to step S1520-7, and if it is determined that the next command has not been received, the process is transferred to step S1520-9.

The "next command" is, for example, a fluctuation start command (variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main CPU 110a, a fluctuation stop command, a customer waiting state specification command, an opening specification command, a round specification command, and an ending specification. Commands that occur over time, such as commands (excluding commands that specify a winning opening). When the sub CPU 120a receives any of these commands, the sub CPU 120a ends the display of the power recovery notification image (error notification dedicated image 300B).

In step S1520-7, the sub CPU 120a performs a power recovery screen display end process for ending the display of the power recovery screen (display of the error notification dedicated image) that is already being executed. In this power recovery screen display end process, a display end instruction command for ending the display of the power recovery screen (error notification dedicated image) is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the display end instruction command is transmitted to the image control unit 150, and the process for ending the display of the power recovery screen is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S1520-8.

In step S1520-8, the sub CPU 120a performs the icon appearance effect redetermination process. In the icon appearance effect redetermination process, it is determined whether or not there is an icon non-appearance flag in a predetermined backup area of the sub RAM 120c, and if there is an icon non-appearance flag, an icon appearance mode redetermination process is performed. The details of this icon appearance effect redetermination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 59. When this process is completed, the error notification end determination process is terminated.

In step S1520-9, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the end condition of the power recovery notification is satisfied. Specifically, the sub CPU 120a determines that the end condition of the power recovery notification is satisfied because 30 seconds have passed from the start of the power recovery notification and the next command is transmitted from the main CPU 110a. That is, the power restoration notification by the image display device 31 ends when the next command is received, while the notification by the voice output device 32, the decorative lighting device 34, or the like is executed with a guarantee of 30 seconds. When the end condition of the power recovery notification is satisfied, the process is moved to step S1520-10, and when the end condition of the power recovery notification is not satisfied, the error notification end determination process this time is ended.

In step S1520-10, the sub CPU 120a performs a power restoration notification end process for terminating the power restoration notification (all notifications by images, sounds, and lamps) that are already being executed. In this power restoration notification end process, a notification end instruction command for ending the power restoration notification is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the notification end instruction command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the lamp control unit 170, and processing for executing the power restoration notification is performed.

In step S1520-11, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the door opening error notification is being executed. If the door opening error notification is being executed, the process is transferred to step S1520-12, and if the door opening error notification is not being executed, the process is transferred to step S1520-14.

In step S1520-12, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the door opening end designation command has been received. When the door opening end designation command is received, the process is transferred to step S1520-13, and when the door opening end designation command is not received, the error notification end determination process this time is terminated.

In step S1520-13, the sub CPU 120a performs the door opening error notification end processing for ending the door opening error notification that is already being executed. In this door opening error notification end processing, a notification end instruction command for ending the door opening error notification is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the notification end instruction command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the lamp control unit 170, and processing for ending the door opening error notification is performed. When this process is completed, the error notification end determination process is terminated.

In step S1520-14, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the switch non-connection error notification is being executed. If the switch unconnected error notification is being executed, the process is transferred to step S1520-15, and if the switch unconnected error notification is not being executed, the process is transferred to step S1520-17.

In step S1520-15, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the switch non-connection error end designation command has been received. When the switch non-connection error end specification command is received, the process is moved to step S1520-16, and when the switch non-connection error end specification command is not received, the current error notification end determination process is terminated.

In step S1520-16, the sub CPU 120a performs a switch non-connection error notification end process for ending the switch non-connection error notification that is already being executed. In this switch non-connection error notification end process, a notification end instruction command for ending the switch non-connection error notification is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the notification end instruction command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the lamp control unit 170, and processing for ending the switch unconnected error notification is performed. When this process is completed, the error notification end determination process is terminated.

In step S1520-17, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the dish full tank error notification is being executed. If the dish full tank error notification is being executed, the process is moved to step S1520-18, and if the dish full tank error notification is not being executed, the current error notification end determination process is terminated.

In step S1520-18, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the dish full tank error end designation command has been received. When the dish full tank error end designation command is received, the process is moved to step S1520-19, and when the dish full tank error end designation command is not received, the current error notification end determination process is terminated.

In step S1520-19, the sub CPU 120a performs a dish full tank error notification end process for ending the dish full tank error notification that is already being executed. In this dish full tank error notification end process, a notification end instruction command for ending the dish full tank error notification is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, the notification end instruction command is transmitted to the image control unit 150 and the lamp control unit 170, and processing for ending the dish full tank error notification is performed. When this process is completed, the error notification end determination process is terminated.

(Icon appearance production re-determination process)
Next, the icon appearance effect redetermination process of the effect control unit 120 m will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an icon appearance effect redetermination process in the effect control unit 120 m.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, "normal display", "delayed display", and "redisplay" can be executed as the icon appearance effect. The icon appearance effect redetermination is performed in a state where the icon is not yet displayed (appeared) after the game ball is won in the first start port 14 or the second start port 15 (with the icon non-appearance flag). When the power is cut off, the icon appearance mode (either normal display, delayed display, or redisplay) is redetermined after the power is restored (when the screen is restored).

In the icon appearance effect redetermination process, when the "normal display" is determined, the hold icon appears at the timing of the end of the display of the power recovery screen (when the screen is restored), and the "delayed display" is determined. The hold icon appears at the timing after the time Ta2 (2 seconds later) from the end of the display of the power recovery screen (see FIG. 116). In addition, when "redisplay" is decided, the hold icon appears and disappears at the timing when the display of the power restoration screen ends, and again at the timing after time Ta2 (2 seconds) from the end of the display of the power restoration screen. Appear.

In the following description, the timing of ending the display of the power restoration notification dedicated screen (dedicated image 200B) may be described as "when the screen is restored".

First, the sub CPU 120a refers to whether or not there is an icon non-appearance flag in step S1520-8-1. Specifically, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not there is an icon non-appearance flag in a predetermined backup area of the sub RAM 120c. If there is an icon non-appearance flag, the process is moved to step S1520-8-2, and if there is no icon non-appearance flag, the current icon appearance effect redetermination process is terminated.

In step S1520-8-2, the sub CPU 120a performs a process of redetermining the icon appearance mode. Specifically, the sub CPU 120a refers to the received start opening winning designation command, and uses the icon appearance effect determination table (see FIG. 41) to normally display the appearance mode of the held icon that has not been displayed. Redetermine either delay display or redisplay.

In step S1520-8-3, the sub CPU 120a sets a command for displaying the undisplayed icon in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, a command for making the undisplayed icon appear and displaying it is transmitted to the image control unit 150 or the like, and a process for making the icon appear is performed.

When the normal display is determined in the icon appearance effect redetermination process, the sub CPU 120a sets a command for displaying the icon when returning to the screen in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. That is, when the "normal display" is determined for the icon that has not been displayed, the icon appears and is displayed when the screen is returned. Further, when the delay display is determined in the icon appearance effect redetermination process, the sub CPU 120a sets a command for causing the icon to appear 2 seconds after the screen is returned to the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. That is, when the "delayed display" is determined for the icon that has not been displayed, the icon appears and is displayed after a predetermined time (2 seconds) from the time when the screen is returned. Further, when the redisplay is determined in the icon appearance effect redetermination process, the sub CPU 120a issues a command to the sub RAM 120c to make the icon appear both when the screen is returned and 2 seconds after the screen is returned. Set in the send buffer. That is, when "redisplay" is decided for the icon that has not been displayed, the icon will appear twice, when the screen is returned and after a predetermined time (2 seconds) after the screen is returned. ..

(About specific examples of each production)
Hereinafter, a specific example of the effect performed by the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to the drawings.

In addition, in this embodiment, the area formed by both or either of the first image display device 31a (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display device 31b (sub liquid crystal display) and in which the effect display is performed is collectively referred to as "effect". Although the description will be described as "display area 70", what is described as the effect performed in the effect display area 70 may be performed only by the first image display device 31a (main liquid crystal display), or may be performed only by the second image display device. It may be performed only by 31b (sub liquid crystal display), or may be performed by both the first image display device 31a (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display device 31b (sub liquid crystal display).

Further, in the following description, the terms such as "full screen" and "whole area" of the effect display area 70 (or the image display device 31) include both the first image display device 31a and the second image display device 31b. The present invention is not limited to this, and includes the case where the first image display device 31a is the full screen or the entire area.

(Mode selection)
First, various modes provided in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 60. The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of modes. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the mode can be selected and set (customized) by the operation of the player. The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of effect modes having different background images and an auto button mode described later.

The operation of selecting and setting the mode (mode selection operation) can be performed during the execution of the customer waiting effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 60A, the operation reception screen 200 suggesting that the mode can be selected during the customer waiting effect can be displayed, and the player's operation can be received. Further, as shown in FIG. 60A, it can be shown on the operation reception screen 200 that the mode can be selected by operating the operation lever 36 and the effect button 35.

As shown in FIGS. 60B and 60C, the effect mode is a mode in which the background image displayed on the image display device 31 is different. More specifically, the effect mode includes an effect mode A (mountain mode) shown in FIG. 60 (b) and an effect mode B (river mode) shown in FIG. 60 (c).

The gaming machine 1 causes the image display device 31 to display a background image or the like according to the determined effect mode. For example, when the "mountain mode" is determined, the background image 201a in which the mountain landscape is displayed is displayed, and when the "river mode" is determined, the background image 201b in which the river landscape is displayed is displayed. Let me.

The mountain mode and the river mode may be production modes that can be selected in the normal game state (during the low-probability non-time-saving game state), or during the low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability game state (during electric support). ) May be the effect mode that can be selected. Further, the effect mode is not limited to two types, and three or more types may be provided. Further, the effect mode is not limited to those having different background images, and the displayed characters and the like may be different.

Further, in the effect mode, in addition to the background image being different, the hold icon and the image displayed as the variable icon may be different. For example, in the mountain mode, the icon image Ia (for example, an image of snow dharma) is displayed as a hold icon or the variable icon, and in the river mode, the icon image Ib (for example, an image of a snow crystal) is displayed. Various selections can be made, such as different icons and displayed characters depending on the effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 60A, the auto button mode can be selected from "ON" and "OFF" by the operation of the player, and when "ON" is selected and determined, the auto button mode is selected. Is set. In the following explanation, when the auto button mode is set (when the auto button mode is ON), it is simply "auto button mode", and when the auto button mode is not set (auto button mode is OFF). Case) may be described simply as "non-auto button mode".

Here, prior to the explanation of the auto button mode, the operation instruction effect performed during the fluctuation will be described. The "operation instruction effect" displays an operation instruction image 230 showing a device (for example, an effect button 35) that can be operated by the player, and causes the player to operate the device (effect button 35) (for example, "press!" , "PUSH", "continuous hits!", Etc.). During the operation instruction effect, an image (an image such as a meter) indicating a period (valid period) for accepting an operation on the device (effect button 35) is displayed together with the operation instruction image 230.

In the operation instruction effect of the present embodiment, as the operation instruction image 230, an image showing the effect button 35 (see FIG. 87) is displayed together with a character image of “PUSH” instructing to press the effect button 35.

When the player operates the device (such as pressing the effect button 35) during the valid period, the effect targeted by the operation instruction effect (for example, cut-in display or winning) is performed at the timing of the operation. Events such as notifications) are performed. On the other hand, if the player's operation (device operation) on the device is not performed during the valid period, the effect (cut-in display, winning notification, etc.) targeted for the operation instruction effect is displayed after the valid period has elapsed. Will be done.

Here, when the "auto button mode" is set, even if the device operation is not performed during the valid period, the effect targeted for the operation instruction effect is performed at a predetermined timing. That is, when the auto button mode is not set (non-auto button mode), if the player does not operate the device within the valid period, the effect targeted for the operation instruction effect is performed after the valid period has elapsed. On the other hand, in the auto button mode, the effect targeted for the operation instruction effect is performed at a predetermined timing before the expiration of the valid period. That is, in the auto button mode, even though the device is not operated, the effect targeted for the operation instruction effect is performed before the end of the valid period.

In the following description, regardless of whether the auto button mode is ON or OFF, whether the player has operated the device, or whether the valid period has elapsed, the target of the operation instruction effect. The performance of the above-mentioned effect may be described simply as "device activation" or "button activation". Further, the timing of device activation (or button activation) may be described as "device activation timing" or "button activation timing". Further, when the auto button mode is set, the device activation by the auto button may be described as "auto button activation".

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the auto button mode is set, the operation instruction effect is produced at the timing before the valid period elapses even though the device operation is not performed. The targeted production is performed.

Here, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the timing of button activation (timing of auto button activation) when the auto button mode is set differs depending on the effect mode. More specifically, in the game machine 1, the auto button is activated at the timing of 1/3 of the valid period in the mountain mode, and the auto button is activated at the timing of 2/3 of the valid period in the river mode. do.

(Mode for updating the number of holdings in the image display device and the holding display)
Next, the mode of updating the number of reservations will be described with reference to FIG. 61.

In the effect display area 70 (image display device 31), the special figure determination information (first hold) acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 14 is displayed in a predetermined mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61A, the first hold is displayed as the hold icon HI in the first hold icon display area 72a, and the number of first holds (first special symbol hold number U1) is displayed. It is displayed in the first hold number display area 74a as a number hold.

Further, in the effect display area 70 (image display device 31), the special figure determination information (second hold) acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 15 is displayed in a predetermined mode. Specifically, the second hold is displayed in the second hold icon display area 72b as the hold icon HI, and the number of the second hold (second special symbol hold number U2) is displayed as the number hold in the second hold icon display area 72b. It is displayed on 74b (see FIG. 93).

Further, in the effect display area 70 (image display device 31), the special figure determination information for which the jackpot determination has been executed and the variation display (variation effect) is being executed is used as the variation icon TI in the variation icon display area 73. Is displayed in.

Here, in the increase update of the number of holds (increase update of the number hold) in the first hold number display area 74a and the second hold number display area 74b, the effect control unit 120m issues a winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110. It is based on receiving. More specifically, the increase update of the number hold is performed at the time of winning on the condition that the effect control unit 120m receives the winning designation command. In the following description, the first hold number display area 74a and the second hold number display area 74b may be collectively referred to as “hold number display area 74”.

Further, in the display (appearance display) of the hold icon HI, the effect control unit 120 m receives the winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, and the effect control unit 120 m determines the display mode of the hold icon and the like. It is done based on.

In FIG. 61, as an example, when the number of first holds is “2” (U1 = 2), the game ball Q wins (wins) the first starting port 14, and the number of first holds is “2”. 3 ”(U1 = 3), the display mode of the hold icon HI, the first hold number display area 74a, and the first special symbol hold display 23 is shown.

In the following description, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, the normal symbol display device 22, the first special symbol hold display 23, the second special symbol hold display 24, and the normal symbol hold display 24, and the normal symbol hold display device 24. The lamp group of the display 25, the round number display 26, and the right-handed display 27 may be generically described as “main lamp group 28”.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the first special symbol hold indicator HI, the number hold in the first hold number display area 74a, and the first special symbol hold indicator 23 display the first special symbol hold number (U1). It is provided. Further, a second hold icon HI, a number hold in the second hold number display area 74b, and a second special symbol hold indicator 24 are provided to display the second special symbol hold number (U2).

As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the first hold icon display area 72a is provided with a display area corresponding to the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special figure determination information hold storage area. Specifically, in the first hold icon display area 72a, the first area R1 corresponding to the first storage part of the first special figure determination information hold storage area, the second area R2 corresponding to the second storage part, and the second A third area R3 corresponding to the three storage units and a fourth area R4 corresponding to the fourth storage unit are provided.

Further, the second hold icon display area 72b is provided with a display area corresponding to the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the second special figure determination information hold storage area. Specifically, in the second hold icon display area 72b, the first area R1 corresponding to the first storage part of the second special figure determination information hold storage area, the second area R2 corresponding to the second storage part, and the second A third area R3 corresponding to the three storage units and a fourth area R4 corresponding to the fourth storage unit are provided.

As shown in FIG. 61 (c), the first special symbol hold indicator 23 can display the number of first holds by combining the lighting modes of the two LEDs. Specifically, when the number of holds is "0", the first special symbol hold indicator 23 is in a state where the two LEDs are turned off. When the number of the first hold is "1", the first special symbol hold indicator 23 is in a state in which the upper LED of the two LEDs is lit and the lower LED is off. It becomes. Further, when the number of the first hold is "2", the first special symbol hold indicator 23 is in a state where two LEDs are lit. When the number of the first hold is "3", the first special symbol hold indicator 23 is in a state in which the upper LED of the two LEDs is blinking and the lower LED is lit. It becomes. Further, when the number of the first hold is "4", the first special symbol hold indicator 23 is in a state where two LEDs are blinking.

Although not shown, when a game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 15, the second special symbol holding indicator 24 has two, as in the first special symbol holding indicator 23. The LED lights up in a manner indicating the number of second holds.

As shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), when the game ball Q wins (wins) the first starting port 14, the number of hold icon HI and the first hold number display area 74a are set at a predetermined timing. , And the display mode of the first special symbol hold indicator 23 is updated from the display mode indicating that the number of holds is "2" to the display mode indicating that the number of holds is "3". The first special symbol hold indicator 23 is updated at the timing of winning a prize.

Here, the display timing (appearance timing) of the hold icon HI differs depending on the execution pattern (either normal display, delayed display, or redisplay) of the icon appearance effect (see FIG. 63). On the other hand, the timing at which the number of holds in the hold number display area 74 increases and is updated and displayed is limited to the time of winning.

When the change is completed and the number of holds changes from "3" to "2" (at the start of change), the display mode of the hold icon HI, the first hold number display area 74a, and the first special symbol hold indicator 23 is changed. , The display mode indicating that the number of reservations is "3" is updated to the display mode indicating that the number of reservations is "2".

As shown in FIG. 61 (a), when the first special symbol hold number (U1) is “2”, “two” hold icon HIs are displayed in the first hold icon display area 72a. More specifically, when the number of holds is "2" (when U1 = 2), the hold icon HI is displayed in each of the first area R1 and the second area R2. When the number of holds is "2", the number "2" is displayed in the first hold number display area 74a, and the number of holds is "2" in the first special symbol hold indicator 23. The LED is lit in the mode of displaying (in the present embodiment, two LEDs are lit).

Further, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), when the game ball Q wins (wins) the first starting port 14 and the number of the first hold becomes "3", the hold icon HI is displayed and "3". The hold icon HI is displayed in the first hold icon display area 72a. More specifically, the hold icon HI is additionally displayed in the third area R3, and is added to the two hold icon HIs already displayed in the first area R1 and the second area R2, for a total of three holds. The icon HI is displayed. When the number of holds is "3", the number hold is updated and "3" is displayed in the first hold number display area 74a, and the hold number is "3" in the first special symbol hold indicator 23. The lighting mode of the LED is updated in the mode of indicating that there is (in the present embodiment, the upper LED of the two LEDs blinks and the lower LED lights).

When the number of the first hold is changed from "3" to "2" after one change is completed, "two" hold icon HIs are displayed in the first hold icon display area 72a, and the number of the first hold is changed. The number "2" is displayed in the display area 74a, and the LED lights up in a manner indicating that the number of holds is "2" on the first special symbol hold indicator 23. The timing at which the number of holds in the hold number display area 74 decreases and is updated and displayed is limited to after the fixed stop (at the start of the next fluctuation).

Each hold icon HI shifts toward the variable icon display area 73 after each change. For example, as shown in FIG. 73B, the hold icon HI displayed in the first area R1 is shifted to the variable icon display area 73 and displayed as the variable icon TI, and is displayed in the second area R2. The hold icon HI that has been displayed is shifted to the first area R1 and displayed. Further, the hold icon HI displayed in the third area R3 is shifted to the second area R2 and displayed.

In this way, the hold icon HI is displayed after the number hold update display (increase update) is performed. Further, while the update display of the number hold is performed only at the time of winning, the display of the hold icon HI is performed at the time of winning or at a predetermined timing after winning. There is.

Here, the hold number display area 74 does not change the position or size of the effect display area 70 in the entire area. That is, in the hold number display area 74, only the number update display is performed when the number hold update (increase update and decrease update) is performed, and the position and size of the hold number display area 74 do not change. It is displayed in a state where it is maintained (displayed without movement). Further, the hold number display area 74 maintains the displayed state even when an effect such as SP reach is performed.

In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the reserved number display area 74 is not accompanied by movement, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment. For example, the hold number display area may be displayed so that the effect moves around, or is displayed so as to be accompanied by movement such as a change in position or size.

In the following description, with respect to an image (animation such as an image or an icon) displayed in the effect display area 70, a case where numbers and characters are updated and displayed while maintaining the position and size in the effect display area 70. Except for this, what is displayed without movement may be described simply as "thing without movement (image)" (thing without movement).

In the present specification, what is described as "thing without movement" is defined as an icon, an image, etc., except for an animation operation when an image or the like appears or disappears, or a drawing operation in which numbers, characters, etc. are updated. Those displayed while maintaining the size and position in the effect display area 70 over time are included. More specifically, "things without movement" include those in which characters and numbers are updated and colors are changed with almost no change in the size of the image.

For example, it can be said that the display (number hold) in the hold number display area 74 does not involve any movement.

Further, with respect to the images and the like displayed in the following effect display area 70, the images and icons displayed with movement while maintaining the position and size in the effect display area 70, or the position and size in the effect display area 70. The image or icon displayed while changing the above may be described simply as "thing with movement (image)" (thing with movement).

In the present specification, what is described as "things accompanied by movement" includes those which move continuously at a fixed cycle, those whose moving speed changes, and those which are temporarily stopped and displayed after moving. For example, "things with movement" include those that are temporarily stopped and displayed after an image or the like appears and are displayed so as to move before or after that, or those that are displayed so that the image is enlarged or reduced. Is done.

For example, as "things with movement", there is a hold icon that is displayed so as to rotate while maintaining the position and size in the effect display area 70. In addition, those that are stopped and displayed after scrolling, such as the effect symbol 38, and those that are highlighted (those with movements such as enlargement and reduction after appearing) such as pseudo-continuous images 216 are also listed as "those with movements". Be done.

(About the movement of the icon)
As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an image imitating a snowman is displayed as a hold icon and the variable icon. In the following description, the hold icon and the variable icon may be collectively referred to as "icon I".

In this embodiment, the icon I is displayed as a rotating animation (periodic animation). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 62, the icon I is displayed with a movement such that the animation of the snowman rotates at a constant cycle. Further, when a plurality of icons I are displayed in the effect display area 70 (for example, when three icons I of one variable icon TI and two hold icons HI are displayed), they are displayed. All the icons I are displayed as periodic animations so as to be synchronized (see FIGS. 62 (a) to 62 (e)). That is, in the present embodiment, the hold icon is displayed with movement so as to rotate in each area while maintaining the position in each area (areas R1 to R4) except when the hold icon is displayed in shift. ..

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and the icon image may be any image. For example, as the icon image, various images such as a spherical image and an image showing another motif can be selected.

Further, the movement of the icon is not limited to the rotating movement as in the above-described embodiment, and may be accompanied by any movement such as moving so as to swing up and down or moving so as to swing left and right.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the hold icon HI is displayed with movement, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment. For example, the icon may be displayed without movement while staying in each area, except when it is displayed in shift (except for movement during shift).

(Example of icon appearance production)
Next, a specific example of the icon appearance effect and the timing at which the icon appearance effect is performed will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66.

As described above, the hold icon HI and the variable icon TI are always displayed with a rotating motion. In the following description of each effect example, the description of the movement of the hold icon HI and the variable icon TI will be omitted, but it is assumed that the movement is always displayed with the movement (as a periodic animation).

As described above, the gaming machine 1 is provided with three execution patterns of "normal display", "delayed display", and "redisplay" for the appearance mode of the hold icon HI.

(Timing of appearance of hold icon)
First, with reference to FIG. 63, the appearance timing of the hold icon HI in each execution pattern, the timing of outputting the winning sound, and the timing of updating the number hold will be described.

As shown in FIG. 63 (a), in the normal display, when the game ball Q enters (wins) the start port (first start port 14 or the second start port 15), the timing at which the game ball Q wins the start port. (Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "TMa1 at the time of winning"), the number hold is updated (+1) and the winning sound is output. Further, in the normal display, the hold icon HI appears and is displayed on TMa1 at the time of winning.

As shown in FIG. 63 (b), in the delay display, when the game ball Q enters (wins) at the starting port, the number hold update display (+1) and the winning sound are output to TMa1 at the time of winning. Further, in the delayed display, the hold icon HI appears and is displayed at the timing TMa2 (for example, the timing 2 seconds after the winning TMa1) after a predetermined time has elapsed from the winning TMa1.

As shown in FIG. 63 (c), in the redisplay, when the game ball Q enters the starting port (winning), the number hold is updated (+1) and the winning sound is output to TMa1 at the time of winning. In the redisplay, after the hold icon HI appears on TMa1 at the time of winning, the hold icon HI disappears after time Ta1 (for example, 1 second later), and after a predetermined time elapses from TMa1 at the time of winning (for example, 2 seconds later). The hold icon HI appears again at the timing TMa2 and is displayed.

In this way, the gaming machine 1 can give a sense of discomfort to the player by changing the timing at which the hold icon HI appears, and can increase the expectation for benefits such as the jackpot game.

(Aspect of icon appearance effect)
Next, an example of the icon appearance effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 68. In FIGS. 64 to 68, as an example, when the number of the first hold is “2” (U1 = 2), the game ball Q wins (wins) the first start port 14, and the number of the first hold is When it becomes "3" (U1 = 3), the appearance mode of the hold icon HI, the update mode of the number hold of the first hold number display area 74a, and the mode of the winning sound are shown.

(Example of normal display)
First, an example of the normal display will be described with reference to FIG. 64.

As shown in FIG. 64 (a), when the first hold number is "2", "2" is displayed as a number hold in the first hold number display area 74a, and the first hold icon display area 72a is displayed. Two hold icons HI are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 64 (b), when the game ball Q enters (wins) the first starting port 14 and the first reserved number becomes "3", the first reserved number display area 74a is displayed in TMa1 at the time of winning. The number hold is updated from "2" to "3", and a winning sound (a sound of "pocon" in the example of FIG. 64) is output from the voice output device 32. In addition, a third hold icon HI appears in the effect display area 70 at the time of winning TMa1. In the example of FIG. 64 (b), an example in which the hold icon HI appears above the first hold icon display area 72a is shown. The appearing hold icon HI appears so as to descend toward the corresponding area (third area R3 in the example of FIG. 64B) of the first hold icon display area 72a.

In this way, in the case of normal display, the hold icon HI appears (displays) on TMa1 at the time of winning (immediately after winning), the number of holds display area 74 (number hold) is increased and updated, and the prize is won. Sound is output.

As shown in FIG. 64 (c), the hold icon HI is displayed in the corresponding area of the first hold icon display area 72a (third area R3 in the example of FIG. 64 (b)) after appearing. That is, when the appearance operation of the hold icon HI is completed, the hold icon HI is displayed in each of the first area R1, the second area R2, and the third area R3, and a total of three hold icon HIs are displayed. Become.

As described above, the hold icon HI is displayed with movement. More specifically, the hold icon HI is said to move periodically so as to rotate (periodic animation). Further, when a plurality of hold icon HIs are displayed, the plurality of hold icon HIs are displayed with movement so as to be synchronized.

Further, while the hold icon HI is displayed as an animation with movement, the hold number (number hold) displayed in the hold number display area 74 is displayed without movement. More specifically, the number hold does not change (is not updated) unless the conditions for increasing or decreasing the number of holds (new prizes or digestion of hold) are met. That is, the number hold is displayed without any movement. The number of holds (number hold) displayed in the hold number display area 74 is maintained in the displayed state (continuously displayed) even when other effects such as SP reach effect are performed. ..

As described above, in the game machine 1, the information indicating the number of special symbol determination information for which the jackpot determination has not been executed (undetermined) (the number of special symbol reservations) is displayed in a plurality of modes (hold icon or number hold). Further, in the gaming machine 1, the number hold is displayed in a mode that does not involve movement, whereas the hold icon HI is displayed in a mode that involves movement.

With the above configuration, the gaming machine 1 displays the number of special figure determination information (number of holdings), and displays the one that does not move (number holding) to suppress misunderstandings and misunderstandings of the player. A moving object (hold icon) can be displayed to entertain the player's eyes.

(Example of delay display)
Next, an example of the delay display will be described with reference to FIG. 65.

As shown in FIG. 65 (a), when the first hold number is "2", "2" is displayed as a number hold in the first hold number display area 74a, and the first hold icon display area 72a is displayed. Two hold icons HI are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the game ball Q wins the first starting port 14 and the first hold number becomes "3", the number hold of the first hold number display area 74a becomes "3" at the time of winning TMa1. Along with updating from "2" to "3", a winning sound (a sound of "pocon" in the example of FIG. 65) is output. In the case of the delayed display, the winning sound is output to TMa1 at the time of winning, while the hold icon HI does not appear (the state where it does not appear).

As shown in FIG. 65 (c), a third hold icon HI appears in the effect display area 70 at the timing TMa2 after the time Ta2 (2 seconds in the present embodiment) from the winning TMa1. That is, in the delayed display, the hold icon HI appears later than in the normal display. In the present embodiment, an example in which the hold icon HI appears above the first hold icon display area 72a is shown. The appearing hold icon HI appears so as to descend toward the corresponding area (third area R3 in the example of FIG. 65 (c)) of the first hold icon display area 72a.

As shown in FIG. 65 (d), after the hold icon HI appears, it is displayed in the corresponding area of the first hold icon display area 72a (the third area R3 in the example of FIG. 64 (b)). That is, when the appearance operation of the hold icon HI is completed, the hold icon HI is displayed in each of the first area R1, the second area R2, and the third area R3, and a total of three hold icon HIs are displayed. Become.

In this way, in the case of delayed display (when a delay occurs), at the time of winning (immediately after winning), the number of holds in the hold number display area 74 (number hold) is increased and updated, and the winning sound is output. On the other hand, the hold icon HI is displayed at the timing TMa2 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the winning TMa1. From the opposite point of view, in the gaming machine 1, even if the display (appearance) of the hold icon HI is delayed, the timing at which the output of the winning sound and the number hold are updated and displayed is constant.

As a result, the gaming machine 1 improves the enjoyment of the game by giving the player a sense of discomfort while suppressing the player from misunderstanding that there was no increase in the hold when the delay display or the like is executed. Can be made to.

(Example of redisplay)
Next, an example of redisplay will be described with reference to FIG. 66.

As shown in FIG. 66 (a), when the first hold number is "2", "2" is displayed in the first hold number display area 74a, and two holds are displayed in the first hold icon display area 72a. Icon HI is displayed

As shown in FIG. 66 (b), when the game ball Q wins the first starting port 14 and the first hold number becomes "3", the number hold of the first hold number display area 74a becomes "3" at the time of winning TMa1. Along with updating from "2" to "3", a winning sound (a sound of "pocon" in the example of FIG. 64) is output. In addition, a third hold icon HI appears in the effect display area 70 at the time of winning TMa1. The appearing hold icon HI appears so as to descend toward the corresponding area (third area R3 in the example of FIG. 64B) of the first hold icon display area 72a.

As shown in FIG. 66 (c), after the hold icon HI appears, it is displayed in the corresponding area of the first hold icon display area 72a (the third area R3 in the example of FIG. 66 (c)). That is, when the first appearance operation of the hold icon HI is completed, the hold icon HI is displayed in each of the first area R1, the second area R2, and the third area R3, and a total of three hold icon HIs are displayed. It will be in a state of being.

As shown in FIG. 66 (d), the appearing hold icon HI is hidden (the hold icon HI disappears) after a time Ta1 (1 second later in this embodiment) from TMa1 at the time of winning. FIG. 66D shows an example in which the hold icon HI pops and disappears. Even if the hold icon HI is hidden (even if it disappears), the update mode of the first hold number display area 74a (display of "3" indicating that U1 = 3) is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 66 (e), the hidden hold icon HI reappears in the effect display area 70 at the timing TMa2 after the time Ta2 (2 seconds in the present embodiment) from the winning TMa1. The appearing hold icon HI appears so as to descend toward the corresponding area (third area R3 in the example of FIG. 66E) of the first hold icon display area 72a.

As shown in FIG. 66 (f), the reappearing hold icon HI is displayed in the corresponding area of the first hold icon display area 72a (third area R3 in the example of FIG. 66 (f)). That is, when the second appearance operation of the hold icon HI is completed, the hold icon HI is displayed in each of the first area R1, the second area R2, and the third area R3, and a total of three hold icon HIs are displayed. It will be in a state of being.

As described above, in the case of redisplay, the hold icon HI is displayed (appears) on TMa1 at the time of winning (immediately after winning), the number hold of the hold number display area 74 is increased and updated, and the winning sound is output. Is performed, and the hold icon HI is displayed (appears) again at the timing TMa2 after the lapse of a predetermined period from TMa1 at the time of winning. From the opposite point of view, it can be said that one hold icon HI is displayed twice in the redisplay. Further, even in the case of redisplay, the output of the winning sound and the increase update of the number hold are set to once at a fixed timing (once at the same timing as the normal display).

In this way, in the gaming machine 1, the hold icon HI is displayed (appears) at the time of winning in the normal display, while the hold icon is displayed (appears) later than the normal display in the delayed display, and the hold icon is displayed in the redisplay by 2. Display (appear) times.

In addition, as described above, in the icon appearance effect triggered by winning a prize at the first start port (icon appearance effect performed during the normal game state), the display is delayed or redisplayed as compared with the case where the normal display is performed. The jackpot expectation is higher when it is broken. In other words, in the game machine 1, in the normal game state (low probability non-time saving game state), the hold icon HI appears and is displayed in TMa1 at the time of winning, and is displayed in timing TMa2. It is said that the jackpot expectation is different (the jackpot expectation of TMa1 <timing TMa2 at the time of winning).

As a result, the gaming machine 1 can give the player a sense of discomfort, improve the interest of the game, and raise the expectation for the jackpot. In other words, in the gaming machine 1, by displaying the hold icon HI at a timing different from that in the normal display, it is possible to improve the expectation for giving a privilege such as a big hit.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has an icon appearance effect during the high-probability time-saving gaming state (an icon appearance effect performed when a prize is won in the second starting port 15 during the high-probability gaming state). , There is no difference in the jackpot expectation between the normal display and the delay display, and the jackpot expectation of redisplay is higher than that of the normal display and the delay display (normal display = delay display <redisplay). That is, in the high-probability time-saving game state, the jackpot expectation is higher when the hold icon appears twice (redisplay) than when the hold icon appears once for one prize (normal display or delayed display). Is high. As a result, the gaming machine 1 pays attention to whether or not the hold icon reappears (whether it disappears and reappears) in the game in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, and improves the interest of the game. Can be done.

Further, as described above, in the icon appearance effect (icon appearance effect performed during the normal game state) triggered by the winning of the first starting port, the delay display or redisplay is performed as compared with the case where the normal display is performed. If it is broken, there is a higher possibility that it will develop into a production with a high expectation of big hits such as SP reach (expectation of development beyond SP reach: normal display <delay display = redisplay). In other words, in the game machine 1, in the normal game state (low probability non-time saving game state), the hold icon HI appears and is displayed in TMa1 at the time of winning, and is displayed in timing TMa2. Therefore, it is said that the development probability of the production with high expectation of big hit is different (TMa1 at the time of winning <the development expectation of timing TMa2).

As a result, the gaming machine 1 gives the player a sense of discomfort while giving the game a sharpness, and also provides a more advanced guessing element (guessing information) when the player guesses whether or not a jackpot is given. be able to. That is, even if the display color of the hold icon HI is not so high in expectation of a big hit (for example, if it is a white icon or a blue icon), if a delayed display or the like is performed, it may develop into SP reach or the like. It is possible to raise expectations for subsequent productions.

Further, in the gaming machine 1, it is possible to execute redisplay in addition to the delay display. That is, in the gaming machine 1, there are cases where the hold icon HI appears at the time of winning, a case where it appears later (at timing TMa2), and a case where it appears twice at the time of winning and at timing TMa2.

As a result, the gaming machine 1 can improve the interest of the game by giving diversity to one event of "appearance of the hold icon HI".

Further, while the gaming machine 1 is provided with a plurality of timings at which the hold icon HI appears, the update timing of the hold number (number hold) displayed in the hold number display area 74 when the hold number increases. (Timing when U = +1) is fixed.

As a result, the gaming machine 1 can improve the interest of the game by changing the display timing of the holding icon, and can prevent the player from misidentifying the number of holdings.

In the present embodiment, an example in which the icon appearance effect is provided with normal display, delayed display, and redisplay under a plurality of conditions (normal gaming state and time-saving gaming state) is shown, but the gaming machine of the present invention is this. Under certain conditions, only normal display may be performed, and under other conditions, normal display and delayed display may be executed (under certain conditions, delayed display or redisplay is not performed, etc.).

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention may have different execution modes depending on the icon appearance effect performed under certain conditions and the icon appearance effect performed under other conditions. For example, in the low-probability gaming state, the execution mode may be two (normal display and delay display), and in the high-probability gaming state, the execution mode may be three (normal display, delay display, and redisplay).

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon appearance effect during the low-probability non-time-saving game state (during the normal game state), the low-probability time-saving game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state is displayed as an execution pattern (normal display, delayed display, etc.). And which of the redisplays), the jackpot expectation is different, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, under all conditions (low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, low-probability time-saving gaming state, and high-probability time-saving gaming state), the expectation of a big hit is set according to the execution pattern of the icon appearance effect. Although different examples are shown, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this.

That is, the gaming machine of the present invention also has an icon appearance effect performed under certain conditions (for example, a non-time-saving gaming state or a low-probability gaming state) and other conditions (for example, a time-saving gaming state or a high-probability gaming state). The icon appearance effect performed in and may be such that the jackpot expectation is changed according to the execution pattern (under certain conditions, the jackpot expectation is different, under certain conditions, the jackpot expectation is the same, etc.). The jackpot expectation may be the same in the icon appearance effect under all conditions (the jackpot expectation is the same under all conditions, or the jackpot expectation is different under all conditions, etc.).

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, there is no difference in the jackpot expectation depending on the execution pattern in both the icon appearance effect performed under certain conditions and the icon appearance effect performed under other conditions. (The jackpot expectation is the same under all conditions).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the jackpot expectation is changed between the normal gaming state (condition A), the low-probability time-saving gaming state (condition B), and the high-probability time-saving gaming state (condition C). However, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this, and each configuration may be changed or made common under other conditions (whether or not the jackpot expectation is common or not, execution). Various choices can be made, such as whether or not the pattern is common).

In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the determination of whether or not to perform the delay display or the like is determined for each reception of the start opening winning designation command, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. ..

For example, in the gaming machine of the present invention, when it is decided to execute "delay display" for the hold icon HI of 1 triggered by winning a prize in the start port (first start port 14 or second start port 15), after that. One or a plurality of hold icon HIs corresponding to the winning of the prizes may be displayed in a delayed manner so as to be linked with each other.

A specific example will be described with reference to FIG. 67. As shown in FIG. 67, when it is decided to display or redisplay the delay icon HI of 1, for example, the "delay flag" can be turned ON. In the following description, the hold icon HI for which the delay display is first determined may be described as "target hold icon HI" ("hold A" in FIG. 67).

Here, when the delay flag is ON, the hold icon HI (hold icon HI displayed after the target hold icon HI) corresponding to the winning of the starting port after winning the target hold icon HI is displayed as a delay. Is decided to do. The delay flag can be turned off when the target hold icon HI is digested as the variable icon TI (when the variable display ends). Further, when the delay flag is turned off, it is determined whether the hold icon HI related to the subsequent winning is executed as normal display, delay display, or redisplay, respectively.

In this way, when the delay display is determined for the hold icon HI of 1, the delay flag is turned ON until the hold icon HI is digested as the variable icon TI, and the start while the delay flag is ON. It is possible to display a delay for all of the hold icon HIs related to the oral prize. When the redisplay is decided, the redisplay flag may be turned ON, and the hold icon HI related to the subsequent winning may be redisplayed in conjunction with it.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to give a stronger impression (such as a sense of discomfort) to the player, raise the expectation, and further improve the interest of the game.

Although each aspect of the icon appearance effect performed by the gaming machine 1 has been described above, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment.

For example, in the present embodiment, the hold icon is assumed to be accompanied by movement at the time of appearance or while being displayed, but the hold icon may be not accompanied by movement. For example, the hold icon may be displayed without any movement such as rotation while staying in each area of the hold icon display area 72 except at the time of shifting.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present invention, an example in which both the delayed display and the redisplay can be executed in the icon appearance effect is shown, but the gaming machine of the present invention shows either the delayed display or the redisplay. It may be something to do.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the appearance timing of the hold icon is set to TMa1 at the time of winning in the normal display and TMa1 at the time of winning in the delayed display after time Ta2 (2 seconds later). The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment. For example, the appearance timing of the hold icon is set to 0.5 seconds after the winning in the normal display and 3 seconds after the winning in the delayed display, and the time (appearance timing) from the winning to the appearance of the hold icon is Various choices are possible.

(Example of winning flash production)
Next, an example of the winning flash effect will be described with reference to FIG. 68.

As described above, the "winning flash effect" is performed by emitting a predetermined sound output, a heso lamp 34c, or the like in a predetermined mode when the game ball is won in the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15. It is a production that is said. In the winning flash effect, when a winning is made to the starting port (the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15), the heso lamp 34c is made to emit light in a predetermined mode, and a specific sound is output.

As described above, in the winning flash effect of the present embodiment, a "weak pattern" and a "strong pattern" are provided. In the "weak pattern", the heso lamp 34c is made to emit white light, and the specific sound A is output. Further, in the "strong pattern", the heso lamp 34c is made to emit red light, and the specific sound B is output.

As shown in FIG. 69, in the winning flash effect, the heso lamp 34c starts emitting light from the time of winning in a mode (white light emission or red light emission) corresponding to the determined pattern (weak pattern or strong pattern), and is the target of the winning flash effect. The light emission of the heso lamp 34c continues until the pending icon HI becomes digested as the variable icon TI. In addition, the output of the specific sound is executed at the time of winning.

In the present embodiment, the voice output device 32 outputs the sound effect "Piki-Pi-Kean" as the weak pattern specific sound A, and the voice output device 32 outputs the sound effect "Piki-Pi-Kean" as the strong pattern specific sound B. NS.

FIGS. 68 (a) to 68 (c) show an example of a weak pattern of the winning flash effect. Further, in FIG. 68, as an example, when the number of the first hold is "2" (U1 = 2), the game ball Q wins (wins) the first start port 14, and the number of the first hold is When the value is "3" (U1 = 3), the mode of the winning flash effect, the mode of updating the first reserved number display area 74a, and the mode of the winning sound or the specific sound are shown.

As shown in FIG. 68 (a), when the first hold number is “2”, “2” is displayed in the first hold number display area 74a, and two holds are displayed in the first hold icon display area 72a. The icon HI is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 68 (b), when the game ball Q enters (wins) the first starting port 14 and the first reserved number becomes “3”, the first reserved number display area 74a is displayed in TMa1 at the time of winning. The number hold is updated from "2" to "3", and a winning sound (a sound of "pocon" in the example of FIG. 68) is output from the voice output device 32. Further, a specific sound A (sound effect of "picking") is output from the voice output device 32 to TMa1 at the time of winning, and the heso lamp 34c starts emitting white light.

At this time, the winning sound (sound of "pocon") and the specific sound A (sound effect of "pickin") are output from the voice output device 32 at the same time. The specific sound A (sound effect "Pickin") is louder than the winning sound (sound "Pocon") because it is a directing sound that players especially want to hear because it is expected to be a big hit. Alternatively, it is a sound that is output in a manner that easily appeals to the sense of hearing, such as being expressed in the high frequency range. Therefore, even if the winning sound (sound of "pocon") and the specific sound A (sound effect of "pickin") are output from the voice output device 32 at the same time, the winning sound (sound of "pocon") may be output depending on the player. May not be heard. However, when the specific sound A (sound of "pickin") is output, the sound output control is used properly according to specific conditions, such as not outputting the winning sound (sound of "pocon"). Compared with, the winning sound (sound of "pocon") and the specific sound A (sound of "piceen") are allowed to be output from the audio output device 32 at the same time (winning sound (sound of "pocon"). It is possible to reduce the control load related to the sound output of the game machine by adopting the configuration (without limiting the output of). If you want to prevent the output of a mixture of the winning sound (sound "pocon") and the specific sound A (sound effect "piceen"), the specific sound A (sound effect "piceen") ) Can be output so that the winning sound (sound of "pocon") is not output.

As shown in FIGS. 68 (c) and 69, the heso lamp 34c continues to emit white light even after winning a prize. The heso lamp 34c continues to emit white light until the hold icon HI, which is the target of the winning flash effect, is digested as the variable icon TI (until the end of the fluctuation in which the jackpot determination result is displayed as the variable icon TI). (See FIG. 69).

FIGS. 68 (d) to 68 (f) show an example of a strong pattern of the winning flash effect. As shown in FIG. 68 (d), when the first hold number is "2", "2" is displayed in the first hold number display area 74a, and two holds are displayed in the first hold icon display area 72a. The icon HI is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 68 (e), when the game ball Q enters (wins) the first starting port 14 and the first reserved number becomes "3", the first reserved number display area 74a is displayed in TMa1 at the time of winning. The number hold is updated from "2" to "3", and a winning sound (a sound of "pocon" in the example of FIG. 68) is output from the voice output device 32. Further, at the time of winning, the specific sound B (sound effect of "Piki Pikien") is output from the voice output device 32 to TMa1, and the heso lamp 34c starts emitting red light.

At this time, the winning sound (sound of "pocon") and the specific sound B (sound effect of "piki-pi-kin") are output from the voice output device 32 at the same time. The specific sound B (sound effect "Piki Pikien") is louder than the winning sound (sound "Pocon") because it is a directing sound that players especially want to hear from the purpose of expecting a big hit. Alternatively, it is a sound that is output in a manner that easily appeals to the sense of hearing, such as being expressed in the high frequency range. Therefore, even if the winning sound (sound of "pocon") and the specific sound B (sound effect of "piki-pikin") are output from the voice output device 32 at the same time, the winning sound (sound of "pocon") may be output depending on the player. May not be heard. However, when the specific sound B (the sound of "Piki Pikien") is output, the winning sound (the sound of "Pokon") is not output, and the sound output control is used properly according to the specific conditions. Compared with, the winning sound (sound of "pocon") and the specific sound B (sound of "piki-pikin") are allowed to be output from the audio output device 32 at the same time (winning sound (sound of "pocon"). It is possible to reduce the control load related to the sound output of the game machine by adopting the configuration (without limiting the output of). If you want to prevent the output of a mixture of the winning sound (sound "pocon") and the specific sound B (sound effect "Piki Pikien"), the specific sound B (sound effect "Piki Pikien") ) Can be output so that the winning sound (sound of "pocon") is not output.

As shown in FIGS. 68 (f) and 69, the heso lamp 34c continues to emit red light even after winning a prize. As shown in FIG. 69, the heso lamp 34c is used until the hold icon HI, which is the target of the winning flash effect, is digested as the variable icon TI (until the end of the fluctuation in which the jackpot determination result is displayed as the variable icon TI). , Continue to emit red light.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 can execute an effect by sound or light emission as one of the look-ahead effects, in addition to the effect performed in the effect display area 70 (image display device 31). As a result, the gaming machine 1 can improve the interest of the game by producing a (intuitive) effect that appeals to the player's intuition.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation is higher when the winning flash effect is performed than when the winning flash effect is not performed. Furthermore, the jackpot expectation is higher when the strong pattern is executed than when the weak pattern is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation is higher in the order of no winning flash effect <weak pattern <strong pattern.

As a result, the gaming machine 1 can suggest that the jackpot expectation level appeals to the player's intuition, and the player can sensuously recognize the jackpot expectation level. As a result, the gaming machine 1 can raise the player's expectation for a big hit and improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and the winning flash effect may have a different configuration, execution timing, jackpot expectation, and the like.

For example, in the winning flash effect, as in the present embodiment, one specific sound may be output for each starting opening winning (only one specific sound is output at the time of winning). The output of the specific sound may be performed a plurality of times for one start opening winning. Further, the winning flash effect is not limited to the one performed at the timing at the time of winning, and may be executed at a predetermined timing after the time of winning.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 70, the winning flash effect may include a plurality of execution timings such as a normal pattern, a delay pattern, and a re-execution pattern. For example, as a normal pattern, a specific sound is output and the heso lamp 34c is started to emit light at the time of winning, and as a delay pattern, a specific sound is output and the heso lamp 34c is output after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds later or at the time of a hold shift) from the time of winning. The light emission is started, and as a re-execution pattern, the specific sound is output at the time of winning and the light emission of the heso lamp 34c is started, and the specific sound is output again after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds later or at the time of hold shift) from the time of winning. It may be a thing.

In addition, when a re-execution pattern (when a specific sound is output twice) is provided in the winning flash effect, a weak pattern specific sound is output at the first execution, and a strong pattern specific sound is output at the second execution. A pattern (promotion pattern) for outputting the above may be provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit by both the number of times and the mode of the winning flash effect.

Further, the mode of the winning flash effect is not limited to this embodiment, and various options can be selected. For example, in the winning flash effect of the present embodiment, both the output of the sound (specific sound) and the light emission of the lamp (heso lamp 34c) are executed, but the winning flash effect is the output of the sound (specific sound) and the lamp. It may execute any of the light emission of (Heso lamp 34c).

Further, as a winning flash effect, another lamp (for example, a decorative lighting device 34, a frame lighting device 34b, etc.) may be made to emit light in place of the heso lamp 34c or in addition to the heso lamp 34c. Further, in the flash effect at the time of winning, any sound (for example, voice output of a character or output of music) may be output as a specific sound.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the winning flash effect is executed in both the non-time-saving gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this, and under certain conditions ( For example, the winning flash effect may be performed in the non-time saving game state), and the winning flash effect may not be performed under other conditions (for example, the time saving game state).

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, there is no difference in the jackpot expectation depending on whether or not the winning flash effect is executed (whether or not the winning flash effect is performed) and the execution pattern (whether it is a weak pattern or a strong pattern, etc.). It may be one (same jackpot expectation).

Further, in the present embodiment, a winning flash effect (a winning flash effect during a non-short game state) performed when a prize is given to the first starting port 14 and a winning flash effect which is performed when a prize is given to the second starting port 15 are performed. Although an example is shown in which the flash effect (winning flash effect during the time-saving game state) is common in the execution mode, the execution pattern, and the jackpot expectation, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment.

Specifically, in the gaming machine of the present invention, when the winning flash effect is performed under a plurality of conditions, the winning flash effect performed under certain conditions (for example, a non-time-saving gaming state or a low-probability gaming state). , The winning flash effect performed under other conditions (for example, a time-saving gaming state or a high-probability gaming state) may have the same or different configurations such as execution mode, execution timing, and jackpot expectation.

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention is in a non-time-saving gaming state and in a time-saving gaming state when all or part of the execution mode, execution timing, and jackpot expectation of the winning flash effect is different depending on the conditions. In addition to making it different depending on whether it is inside or not, it may be made different depending on whether it is in a low-probability gaming state or a high-probability gaming state, or even if each configuration is different under other conditions. good.

For example, under certain conditions, the jackpot expectation may differ depending on the presence or absence of execution and the execution pattern, and under other conditions, the jackpot expectation may not differ, or the jackpot expectation may indirectly differ. To explain with a specific example, in the low-probability gaming state, the weak pattern <strong pattern jackpot expectation may be set, and in the high-probability gaming state, the weak pattern = strong pattern jackpot expectation may be set. In addition, for example, in a non-time-saving game state, there is a high possibility that other effects with high expectation of big hits (such as color change of hold icon and development to SP reach) will occur in the order of no winning flash effect <with winning flash effect. (Indirectly, the jackpot expectation is high), and in the time-saving game state, the jackpot expectation may be higher in the order of no winning flash effect <with winning flash effect.

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention may have different execution modes and execution timings depending on the winning flash effect performed under certain conditions and the winning flash effect performed under other conditions. For example, in the low-probability gaming state, the execution timing may be one (specific sound output at the time of winning), and in the high-probability gaming state, the execution timing may be two (normal pattern, delay pattern, etc.).

Further, in the winning flash effect of the present embodiment, an example in which the heso lamp 34c is made to emit light is shown, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment. For example, in the winning flash effect, other lamps (such as the panel lighting device 34a and the frame lighting device 34b) may be made to emit light among the decorative lighting devices 34. Further, in the winning flash effect, the emission color of the lamp may be any.

(Color change of hold icon)
Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the timing at which the display color mode of the hold icon HI is updated (the timing at which the hold icon change effect is performed) will be described.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment changes the colors of the variable icon and the hold icon according to the change scenario determined by the sub CPU 120a.

Here, as shown in FIG. 71, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the color of the hold icon is changed in advance variation, the color change of the hold icon (hold icon change effect) is shifted within the hold icon display area. It is done when it is displayed (when shifting).

For example, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, the hold icon HI is displayed as a white blinking icon as an initial mode, and a scenario (in the case of scenario 06) in which the white blinking icon changes to a blue icon before 2 fluctuations is determined. In this case, the hold icon HI that was displayed as a white flashing icon at the time of displaying the initial mode (at the time of winning in the example of FIG. 72) is blue when it is shifted from the third area R3 to the second area R2. It changes to an icon.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the hold icon change effect is performed only when the icon is shifted. In other words, the color change of the hold icon HI is executed at a single timing (the timing is fixed).

It should be noted that the description of "single timing", "fixed timing", "limited timing", etc. in this specification means one timing for one event (for example, winning a prize at the starting port, starting fluctuation, etc.). It means that the timing for an event or one event is fixed. That is, "single timing" or "fixed timing" does not mean the timing of a fixed cycle (periodic timing, for example, timing in units of 30 seconds), but the timing for some event. It means that it is fixed.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the timing at which the hold icon HI appears (displays) is varied, while the timing at which the hold icon HI is color-changed is fixed. As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the color change of the hold icon HI is performed only at the time of icon shift, whereas the color change of the variable icon TI is during the execution of the variable effect. It is done at various timings.

As a result, the gaming machine 1 provides the player with various information such as the timing and color of display (appearance) using one tool (image) called "hold icon", and the degree of expectation of granting a privilege (big hit). Can be shown. That is, the gaming machine 1 assigns the information indicated by the time difference (delay display, etc.) and the display color information to the tool 1 called the hold icon, and the player estimates the jackpot expectation based on the information. It becomes possible to do. As a result, the gaming machine 1 can suggest various information to the player while giving diversity to the gaming. As a result, the gaming machine 1 can further improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of the present invention may emit the heso lamp 34c so as to synchronize with the display color of the hold icon HI and the variable icon TI. This makes it easier to intuitively recognize the color mode of the icon (holding icon or the variable icon). As a result, the gaming machine 1 can further enhance the effect of the effect and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the icon may not be displayed depending on the effect performed in the effect display area 70 (image display device 31). For example, when it develops into a production with a high expectation of a big hit such as SPSP reach, the variable icon or the hold icon may not be displayed. Further, when the variable icon disappears, the light emission of the heso lamp 34c may be extinguished so as to synchronize with the non-display of the icon.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, even when the icon is hidden (for example, while SPSP reach is being performed), the heso lamp 34c continues to emit light so as to correspond to the color of the icon. It may be. In such a configuration, for example, the heso lamp 34c may be continuously lit until the end of the fluctuation.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the color of the hold icon is changed only at the time of shifting, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this, and the color of the hold icon is changed. May be performed at a timing other than the shift time.

(About the fluctuating production)
Next, a specific example of the effect during the fluctuation executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 is provided with a plurality of variable effect patterns (variable effect patterns 1 to 21), and based on each variable effect pattern, the effect display area 70 (image display device 31) and the audio output device. 32, the production by the decorative lighting device 34 and the like is performed.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the variation display that displays the result of the jackpot determination related to the variation icon TI, scrolling of the effect symbol 38, action at the start of variation, dialogue notice, pseudo-ream, timer effect, stock effect, Perform each effect such as operation instruction effect. In the following description, various effects performed in the variable display may be described as "changing effects".

As shown in FIG. 74, in the effect during variation, the presence / absence of execution, the execution pattern, and the like are determined based on the effect control unit 120m receiving the variation pattern designation command. That is, each fluctuation effect is determined based on the effect control unit 120m receiving the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the start of the variation. Explaining from another viewpoint, the movement (action) of the image displayed in the changing effect and the effect symbol 38 performed in the changing effect is changed by the effect control unit 120m based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command. It can be said that it indicates that the medium production has been decided (image, etc.). For example, it can be said that the pseudo-ream notice image 214 in the pseudo-ream indicates that the effect control unit 120m has decided to execute the pseudo-ream based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command. Further, it can be said that the timer image 220 displayed in the timer effect indicates that the effect control unit 120 m has decided to execute the timer effect based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command.

As shown in FIG. 74, at the start of fluctuation, the number hold displayed in the hold number display area 74 is reduced by "1" and updated, and the hold icon HI is reduced by one.

(Scrolling operation of the production pattern)
First, referring to FIG. 75, the effect symbol 38 is fixed and stopped, the scrolling operation of the effect symbol 38 from the start of the next fluctuation to the final stop of the effect symbol 38, the mode of the small effect symbol 48, and the numbers. The update mode of the hold will be described.

FIG. 75A shows a state in which a fixed stop is performed when the first hold number is “3” (U1 = 3). As shown in FIG. 75 (a), at the time of fixed stop, three effect symbols 38 are displayed in the effect display area 70 in a stopped state. Further, at this time, the small effect symbol 48 is also stopped and displayed in the same manner as the effect symbol 38 (loss mode or jackpot mode).

As shown in FIG. 75 (b), when the fluctuation (next fluctuation) is started, the operation (scrolling) in which the three effect symbols 38 move in a flowing manner is started. More specifically, the effect display area 70 is scrolled so as to flow in a certain direction (in the present embodiment, from the upper side to the lower side) after the start of the fluctuation. Further, the effect symbol 38 scrolls while changing the speed in the order of acceleration (low speed) → high speed → deceleration (low speed) from the start of scrolling to the final stop. Further, the number hold of the first hold number display area 74a is updated and displayed in a mode in which the hold number is reduced by one (from "3" to "2" in the example of FIG. 75).

In the following description, the state in which the effect symbol 38 is scrolling (the state in which the effect symbol 38 is moving in a flowing manner) is simply described as "scrolling" regardless of whether the effect symbol 38 is in an acceleration tendency or a deceleration tendency. May be explained. In addition, when the effect symbol 38 is scrolling and scrolling at high speed (also referred to as "high speed scroll"), it may be difficult to distinguish the effect symbol 38 or it may be difficult to visually recognize the effect symbol 38. The "scroll" in the following description includes a state (high-speed scrolling) in which it is difficult to discriminate and visually recognize the effect symbol 38.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), at the start of fluctuation, the number hold of the first hold number display area 74a is reduced by "1" and updated, and the hold icon HI of the first hold icon display area 72a is displayed. It is reduced by one and displayed as a shift. Further, after the start of the fluctuation, the small effect symbol 48 is also displayed in an aspect (scrolling or the like) indicating that the effect symbol 48 is being changed in the same manner as the effect symbol 38.

As shown in FIG. 75 (c), after scrolling, the effect symbol 38 is displayed in a predetermined position (for example, substantially the center) of the effect display area 70 in a state of maintaining the position while swinging up and down (temporary stop).

The eye-catching image 250 may be displayed between the temporary stop of the effect symbol 38 and the final stop (see FIG. 89 (e)). The "eye catch image 250" is an image displayed in substantially the entire area of the effect display area 70, and for example, a model name or a character image corresponding to the model can be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 75 (d), after the effect symbol 38 is temporarily stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), the effect symbol 38 is displayed in a stopped state (fixed stop). Further, at this time, the small effect symbol 48 is also stopped and displayed in the same manner as the effect symbol 38 (loss mode or jackpot mode). Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (e), the next fluctuation is started after the fixed stop.

(Example of action at the start of fluctuation)
Next, an example of the action at the start of fluctuation will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77.

As described above, the "action at the start of fluctuation" is an effect performed immediately after the start of fluctuation.

The variation start action of the present embodiment is such that the effect symbol 38 moves differently from the normal movement (when the variation start action is not executed) (see FIG. 77).

As shown in FIG. 77 (a), in the action at the start of fluctuation of the present embodiment, the effect symbol 38 is moved to rotate in the lateral direction immediately after the start of fluctuation. Further, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), the effect symbol 38 performs an action such that it moves in a direction (upward) different from the scroll direction after the rotation operation.

As shown in FIG. 77 (c), scrolling is started after the action at the start of fluctuation. In other words, when the action at the start of fluctuation is not executed (when the action at the start of fluctuation is not executed), scrolling is performed immediately after the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 76 (a)), whereas the action at the start of fluctuation is performed. When is executed, scrolling is started after the action at the start of fluctuation is completed (see FIG. 76 (b)).

As described above, the jackpot expectation is higher when the fluctuation start action is performed than when the fluctuation start action is not performed (no fluctuation start action <with fluctuation start action). Therefore, the gaming machine 1 can raise the expectation of the player, for example, by executing the action at the start of the fluctuation, the production will be further developed to have a higher expectation of a big hit in the future.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and the action at the start of fluctuation may be configured differently from that of the present embodiment.

For example, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the action at the start of fluctuation is performed using the effect symbol 38, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and the action at the start of fluctuation is a character image or the like. , The effect may be performed using an image other than the effect symbol 38, or an effect or the like may be displayed at the start of fluctuation. Further, it is possible to perform an action at the start of the fluctuation by performing an action longer than the normal action effect while performing some action effect at the start of the fluctuation at each start of the fluctuation.

Further, in the variation start action of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the image (effect symbol 38) that performs the variation start action is accompanied by movement, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the action at the start of fluctuation may be performed using an image that does not involve movement.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the execution pattern of the action at the start of fluctuation is one type (one type of action in which the effect symbol 38 rotates), but the action at the start of fluctuation is provided with a plurality of execution patterns. It may be. In addition, when multiple execution patterns are provided for the action at the start of fluctuation, the jackpot expectation may differ depending on the execution pattern (character type, effect color, movement, etc.), and the execution pattern type may be different. Regardless, the jackpot expectation may be the same.

Further, in the variation start action of the present embodiment, both the variation start action performed under a certain condition (non-time saving gaming state) and the variation start action performed under another condition (time saving gaming state) are common. Although the execution pattern (one type of execution pattern) to be performed is shown as an example, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the content and type of the execution pattern may be different between the fluctuation start action performed under certain conditions and the fluctuation start action performed under other conditions ( One type under certain conditions, three types under other conditions, etc.).

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the action at the start of fluctuation is executed in both the non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state) and the time-saving gaming state, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. , The fluctuation start action may be executed under certain conditions, and the fluctuation start action may not be executed under other conditions.

Further, in the variation start action of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the jackpot expectation is different depending on the presence or absence of the variation start action, but when the variation start action is executed or not, or when a plurality of execution patterns are provided, There is no difference in the jackpot expectation depending on the execution pattern (the jackpot expectation is the same), or it suggests the development to other productions depending on the execution presence / absence and the execution pattern (indirectly, the jackpot expectation is different). You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation start action is executed under a plurality of conditions (non-time-saving gaming state and time-saving gaming state), and the fluctuation start action performed under certain conditions (non-time-saving gaming state) and An example in which the jackpot expectation differs depending on whether or not the fluctuation start action is executed for both the fluctuation start action performed under other conditions (time-saving gaming state) (the jackpot expectation differs under all conditions). However, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the fluctuation start action performed under certain conditions and the fluctuation start action performed under other conditions share the same jackpot expectation depending on whether or not they are executed and the execution pattern (all conditions). It may be the same as the jackpot expectation below (common to the jackpot expectation), or it may be changed (the jackpot expectation is the same under some conditions, the jackpot expectation is different under other conditions, etc.).

(Example of dialogue notice)
Next, an example of the dialogue notice will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 78.

As described above, the "line notice" means that lines and characters suggesting the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed are displayed in the effect display area 70 (image display device 31), and the voice corresponding to the lines is voiced. This is an effect of outputting from the output device 32.

As shown in FIG. 76 (c), the dialogue notice is given after the time Tb has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation (for example, 2 seconds later). In other words, a dialogue notice may occur after a time Tb from the start of fluctuation. That is, in the present embodiment, the dialogue notice occurs at a single timing (after the time Tb from the start of the fluctuation) (the timing is fixed).

As shown in FIG. 78 (a), scrolling is first started immediately after the start of fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 78 (b), the character image 210 and the dialogue image 212 are displayed after a time Tb from the start of the fluctuation. More specifically, in the dialogue notice, in addition to displaying the character and the like together with the frame image, the dialogue image 212 is displayed. Further, the voice corresponding to the dialogue image 212 is output from the voice output device 32. In the present embodiment, an example in which the voice corresponding to the dialogue is output in the dialogue notice is shown, but the voice may not be output.

Further, as described above, in the dialogue notice, the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the display color of the dialogue image 212 and the content of the dialogue. Specifically, in the dialogue image 212, the jackpot expectation is higher in the order of white <red <gold <rainbow (correct).

The character image 210 and the dialogue image 212 are displayed at predetermined positions (for example, the left side or the lower side of the effect display area 70). Further, the character image 210 and the dialogue image 212 do not change in the display position or size from the time they are displayed until they disappear. That is, the images (character image 210 and dialogue image 212) displayed in the dialogue notice are displayed without movement. On the other hand, the dialogue notice suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit depending on the mode such as the display color of the dialogue. As a result, the gaming machine 1 can increase the interest of the player in matters such as whether or not the dialogue notice is generated, or in what color the dialogue is displayed, and can improve the interest of the game.

In this way, while the dialogue notice states that there is only one execution timing (fixed execution timing), the dialogue mode (display color, dialogue content, etc.) suggests the jackpot expectation (the jackpot expectation is). different).

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and the dialogue notice may be configured differently from the present embodiment.

For example, in the present embodiment, an example in which both the character image 210 and the dialogue image 212 are displayed in the dialogue advance notice is shown, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and the dialogue advance notice is only the dialogue image 212. It may be performed by using.

Further, in the dialogue notice of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the displayed image (character image 210 or dialogue image 212) is not accompanied by movement, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the image (character image 210 or dialogue image 212) displayed in the dialogue notice may be accompanied by movement. For example, the dialogue notice may be accompanied by movements such as the frame of the dialogue image 212 swinging or the character's mouth moving so as to match the dialogue (lip-syncing).

Further, the timing at which the dialogue notice is generated is not limited to 2 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and may be performed after a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation.

Further, the dialogue advance notice of the present embodiment is a common execution pattern for both the dialogue advance notice performed under certain conditions (non-time-saving gaming state) and the dialogue advance notice performed under other conditions (time-saving gaming state). Is shown as an example, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the content and type of the execution pattern may be different between the serif notice performed under certain conditions and the serif notice performed under other conditions (under certain conditions). 1 type, 3 types under other conditions, etc.).

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the dialogue notice is executed in both the non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state) and the time-saving gaming state, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. It is possible that the dialogue notice is executed under the condition and the dialogue notice is not executed under other conditions.

Further, in the dialogue notice of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the jackpot expectation is different depending on the presence or absence of the dialogue notice, but there is no difference in the jackpot expectation depending on the execution presence or absence of the dialogue notice and the execution pattern (the jackpot expectation is different). (Same), or something that suggests development to other productions depending on the presence or absence of execution and the execution pattern (indirectly different jackpot expectations).

Further, in the present embodiment, the dialogue notice is executed under a plurality of conditions (non-time saving gaming state and time saving gaming state), and the dialogue notice performed under certain conditions (non-time saving gaming state) and other conditions. An example is shown in which the jackpot expectation is different depending on whether or not the dialogue is executed (the jackpot expectation is different under all conditions) for both the dialogue notice performed in the (short-time game state), but the game of the present invention is shown. The machine is not limited to this. That is, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the dialogue notice performed under certain conditions and the dialogue notice performed under other conditions share the same jackpot expectation level depending on the presence / absence of execution and the execution pattern (big hit expectation under all conditions). It may be (common in degree) or may have a change (the jackpot expectation is the same under certain conditions, the jackpot expectation is different under other conditions, etc.).

(Pseudo-ren)
Next, the pseudo-ream will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 84. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of pseudo-reams may be performed once or the number of pseudo-reams may be performed twice during one fluctuation.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of pseudo-reams executed during one fluctuation is a maximum of two (reaching the pseudo-3), but the gaming machine of the present invention is limited to the present embodiment. Instead, the pseudo-ream may be performed three or more times.

As described above, in the pseudo-ream of the present embodiment, a normal pseudo (N pseudo) and a post-reach pseudo (R post-pseudo) are provided. As described above, the "normal pseudo" indicates that the two effect symbols 38 develop into a pseudo-ream (in a non-reach state) without becoming a reach. Further, the "post-reach pseudo" indicates that the two effect symbols 38 develop into a pseudo-ream after reaching the reach.

In the case of pseudo-two stays, there is one case where the normal pseudo (N pseudo) that develops into a pseudo-ream without becoming a reach is performed once, and the case where the post-reach pseudo (pseudo after R) that develops into a pseudo-ream after the reach is performed once. It may be done.

Further, in the case of reaching pseudo-3, the case where the normal pseudo is performed after the normal pseudo is performed (N pseudo → N pseudo) and the case where the post-reach pseudo is performed after the normal pseudo is performed (N pseudo → R). There are three patterns: post-reach pseudo) and post-reach pseudo after reach pseudo (post-R pseudo → pseudo after R).

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the normal simulation is not performed after the reach-post-simulation is performed during one fluctuation. That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the post-reach pseudo is performed during one fluctuation, the post-reach pseudo is always executed for the pseudo series performed thereafter.

As described above, the high degree of expectation of big hit is that there is no pseudo-ream <pseudo 2 stay <pseudo 3 reached, and N pseudo <R after pseudo <N pseudo + N pseudo <N pseudo + R after pseudo <R after. It is pseudo + R and then pseudo.

When the pseudo-ream is performed, the pseudo-variation is performed a plurality of times. For example, as shown in FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b), in the case of one pseudo-ream number (in the case of pseudo-two stays), the second pseudo-variation after the first pseudo-variation (pseudo-one variation). (Pseudo 2 fluctuation) is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 80, when the number of pseudo-reams is 2 (when the pseudo 3 is reached), the second pseudo variation (pseudo 2 variation) is performed after the first pseudo variation (pseudo 1 variation). After the second pseudo-variation (pseudo-two variation), the third pseudo-variation (pseudo-three variation) is performed.

In addition, when a pseudo-ream is performed, a pseudo-ream notice is performed. In the pseudo-ream notice, an image (pseudo-ream notice image 214) suggesting that the pseudo-ream is performed is displayed. In the present embodiment, the character image of "continuation" is displayed as the pseudo-continuous notice image 214 (see FIG. 81 (a)).

As shown in FIGS. 79A and 80, in the case of the normal pseudo, the pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed after a time Tc1 from the pseudo-continuous notice (display of the pseudo-continuous notice image 214). Further, as shown in FIGS. 79 (b) and 80, in the case of pseudo after reach, the pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed after a time Tc2 from the pseudo-continuous notice (display of the pseudo-continuous notice image 214).

As shown in FIG. 81A, in the pseudo-continuous notice, the pseudo-continuous notice image 214 is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) so as to sway after being enlarged and displayed once when it appears in the effect display area 70. That is, the pseudo-continuous notice image 214 is displayed with movement.

As shown in FIG. 81 (c), a pseudo-series image 216 indicating the start of the pseudo-series is displayed after a time Tc1 after the pseudo-series preview image 214 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the character image of "NEXT" is displayed as the pseudo-continuous image 216 (see FIG. 81 (c)). When the pseudo-continuous image 216 appears in the effect display area 70, the pseudo-continuous image 216 is once enlarged and displayed, then moves in a swaying manner, and then stops and is displayed. That is, the pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed with movement.

Hereinafter, a specific example of the normal pseudo in the case of the pseudo 2 stay, a specific example of the post-reach pseudo in the case of the pseudo 2 stay, and a specific example in the case where the post-reach pseudo is performed after the normal pseudo in the case of reaching the pseudo 3. , Each will be explained.

(An example of normal pseudo in the case of pseudo 2 stay)
FIG. 81 shows an example of a normal pseudo in the case of pseudo 2 stay. As shown in FIG. 79 (a), the pseudo-continuous notice (display of the pseudo-continuous notice image 214) is performed at a predetermined timing after the start of the fluctuation (during the pseudo 1 fluctuation). Further, the pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed at the timing when the time Tc1 has elapsed from the pseudo-continuous notice.

As shown in FIG. 81 (a), a pseudo-continuous notice is given during the pseudo 1 fluctuation after the start of the fluctuation. Specifically, the pseudo-ream notice image 214 is displayed during the pseudo-one variation, suggesting that the pseudo-ream is performed.

As shown in FIG. 81 (b), the two effect symbols 38 are displayed without reaching during the pseudo 1 variation. More specifically, two effect symbols 38 showing different numbers (“5” and “7” in the example of FIG. 81 (b)) descend (scroll) from above toward the substantially center to produce the effect. It is displayed in the substantially center of the display area 70 (non-reach symbol display).

As shown in FIG. 81 (c), after the two effect symbols 38 are displayed without reaching, the pseudo continuous image 216 is displayed. Further, the pseudo-continuous image 216 is highlighted (enlarged and displayed, displayed together with an effect, etc.) when it is displayed. In this way, the pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed at the timing after the time Tc1 (after the non-reach symbol is displayed) after the pseudo-continuous notice image 214 (character image of "continuation" in FIG. 81) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 81 (d), the pseudo-continuous image 216 disappears (disappears) after being displayed, and the pseudo-two variation is performed. In the pseudo-two variation, two effect symbols 38 showing the same number (“5” in the example of FIG. 81) descend (scroll) from above toward the substantially center and are displayed in the substantially center of the effect display area 70. Is done (reach pattern display). It should be noted that the timing at which the pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed or the timing after the pseudo-continuous image 216 disappears indicates the number of pseudo fluctuations (currently pseudo 2 or pseudo 3). The variation number display image 217 (the image of "x2" in FIG. 81 (d)) may be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 81 (e), in the pseudo 2 variation, the two effect symbols 38 are displayed in the reach state.

As shown in FIG. 81 (f), an image showing development to SP reach after reaching reach (in the example of FIG. 81, a development notification image 218 of “SP development”) is displayed.

(An example of pseudo after reach in the case of pseudo 2 stay)
FIG. 82 shows an example of post-reach pseudo in the case of pseudo 2 stay. As shown in FIG. 79 (b), the pseudo-continuous notice (display of the pseudo-continuous notice image 214) is performed at a predetermined timing after the start of the fluctuation (during the pseudo 1 fluctuation). Further, the pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed at the timing when the time Tc2 has elapsed from the pseudo-continuous notice.

As shown in FIG. 82 (a), a pseudo-continuous notice is given during the pseudo 1 fluctuation after the start of the fluctuation. Specifically, the pseudo-ream notice image 214 is displayed during the pseudo-one variation, suggesting that the pseudo-ream is performed.

As shown in FIG. 82 (b), two effect symbols 38 showing the same number (“5” in the example of FIG. 81) descend (scroll) from above toward substantially the center during the pseudo 1 fluctuation. In addition, the two effect symbols 38 descend while decelerating so as to fuel whether or not they reach.

As shown in FIG. 82 (c), two effect symbols 38 are displayed as reach in the effect display area 70. The two effect symbols 38 are once enlarged and highlighted, and are displayed at substantially the center of the effect display area 70.

As shown in FIG. 82 (d), after the two effect symbols 38 are displayed as reach, the pseudo continuous image 216 is displayed. Further, the pseudo-continuous image 216 is highlighted (enlarged and displayed, displayed together with an effect, etc.) when it is displayed.

As described above, in the post-reach pseudo, the pseudo continuous image 216 is displayed after the time Tc2 (after the reach symbol is displayed) after the pseudo continuous preview image 214 is displayed. Further, in the post-reach pseudo, when the two effect symbols 38 are displayed, reach fanning or the like occurs. Therefore, the time from the display of the pseudo-series preview image 214 to the display of the pseudo-series image 216 is longer in the case where the post-reach pseudo is performed than in the case where the normal pseudo is performed (time Tc1 <time Tc2). ). In other words, the pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed after the pseudo-continuous image is generated in the post-reach pseudo case, rather than the timing at which the pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed after the pseudo-continuous notice is generated in the normal pseudo case. The timing to be done is later.

As shown in FIG. 82 (e), the pseudo-continuous image 216 disappears (disappears) after being displayed, and the pseudo-two variation is performed. In the pseudo-two variation, two effect symbols 38 showing the same number (“5” in the example of FIG. 82) descend (scroll) from above toward the substantially center and are displayed in the substantially center of the effect display area 70. Is done (reach pattern display). It should be noted that the timing at which the pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed or the timing after the pseudo-continuous image 216 disappears indicates the number of pseudo fluctuations (currently pseudo 2 or pseudo 3). The variation number display image 217 (the image of "x2" in FIG. 82 (e)) may be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 82 (f), an image showing the development to SP reach after reaching reach (in the example of FIG. 82, the development notification image 218 of “SP development”) is displayed.

(Example in case of reaching pseudo 3)
FIG. 83 shows an example of the case where the pseudo 3 is reached and the post-reach pseudo is performed after the normal pseudo is performed. As shown in FIG. 80, the pseudo-continuous notice (display of the pseudo-continuous notice image 214) is performed at predetermined timings during the pseudo 1 fluctuation and the pseudo 2 fluctuation. Further, the first pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed at the timing when the time Tc1 has elapsed from the first pseudo-continuous notice, and the second pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed at the timing when the time Tc2 has elapsed from the second pseudo-continuous notice. Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 83 (a), the first pseudo-continuous notice is given during the pseudo 1 fluctuation after the start of the fluctuation. Specifically, the first pseudo-ream notice image 214 is displayed during the pseudo-one variation, suggesting that the pseudo-ream is performed.

As shown in FIG. 83 (b), the two effect symbols 38 are displayed without reaching during the pseudo 1 variation. More specifically, two effect symbols 38 showing different numbers (“5” and “7” in the example of FIG. 81) descend (scroll) from above toward the substantially center, and the effect display area 70 It is displayed in the center of the (non-reach pattern display).

As shown in FIG. 83 (c), after the two effect symbols 38 are displayed without reaching, the first pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed. Further, the pseudo-continuous image 216 is highlighted (enlarged and displayed, displayed together with an effect, etc.) when it is displayed. In this way, the pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed at the timing after the time Tc1 (after the non-reach symbol is displayed) after the pseudo-continuous notice image 214 (character image of "continuation" in FIG. 83) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 83 (d), the pseudo-continuous image 216 disappears (disappears) after being displayed, and the pseudo-two variation is performed. It should be noted that the timing at which the pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed or the timing after the pseudo-continuous image 216 disappears indicates the number of pseudo fluctuations (currently pseudo 2 or pseudo 3). The variation number display image 217 (in FIG. 83 (d), an image of “x2” indicating that the variation is pseudo-2 variation) may be displayed. During the pseudo 2 fluctuation, the second pseudo continuous notice is given. Specifically, it is suggested that the second pseudo-ream notice image 214 is displayed during the pseudo-two variation, and that the pseudo-ream is further performed.

As shown in FIG. 83 (e), in the pseudo-two variation, two effect symbols 38 showing the same number (“5” in the example of FIG. 83) descend (scroll) from above toward substantially the center. In addition, the two effect symbols 38 descend while decelerating so as to fuel whether or not they reach.

As shown in FIG. 83 (f), two effect symbols 38 are displayed as reach in the effect display area 70. The two effect symbols 38 are once enlarged and highlighted, and are displayed at substantially the center of the effect display area 70.

As shown in FIG. 84 (a), after the two effect symbols 38 are displayed as reach, the second pseudo continuous image 216 is displayed. Further, the pseudo-continuous image 216 is highlighted (enlarged and displayed, displayed together with an effect, etc.) when it is displayed. In this way, the pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed at the timing after the time Tc2 after the pseudo-continuous notice image 214 is displayed (after the reach symbol is displayed).

As shown in FIG. 84 (b), the pseudo continuous image 216 displayed for the second time disappears (disappears) after being displayed, and the pseudo 3 variation is performed. It should be noted that the timing at which the pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed or the timing after the pseudo-continuous image 216 disappears indicates the number of pseudo fluctuations (currently pseudo 2 or pseudo 3). The variation number display image 217 (in FIG. 84 (b), an image of “x3” indicating that the variation is pseudo-3 variation) may be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 84 (b), in the pseudo-two variation, two effect symbols 38 showing the same number (“5” in the example of FIG. 84) descend (scroll) from above toward the substantially center. It descends while decelerating to fuel whether or not it will reach.

As shown in FIG. 84 (c), an image showing the development to SP reach after reaching reach (in the example of FIG. 84 (c), the development notification image 218 of “SP development”) is displayed.

In this way, when the pseudo-ream is performed, regardless of whether the number of pseudo-reams is 1 (pseudo 2 stays) or the number of pseudo reams is 2 (pseudo 3 reached), in the case of the normal pseudo, The pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed before the reach is established (after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the pseudo-variation and before the reach is established), and in the case of the pseudo-continuous image after the reach, the pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed at the timing after the reach is established. Is displayed. More specifically, regardless of whether it is the first pseudo-ream (pseudo 2) or the second pseudo-ream (pseudo 3), the pseudo-ream notice image 214 is displayed in the case of the normal pseudo. The pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed after the time Tc1 and the pseudo-continuous image 216 is displayed after the time Tc2 after the pseudo-continuous notice image 214 is displayed in the case of pseudo after reach.

In addition, the jackpot expectation is N pseudo (pseudo 2 consecutive stays) <R after pseudo (pseudo 2 consecutive stays) <N pseudo + N pseudo (reaches pseudo 3) <N pseudo + R post pseudo (reaches pseudo 3) <R The order is post-pseudo + R post-pseudo (reaches pseudo 3).

As a result, the gaming machine 1 can attract interest in whether or not it will reach in the pseudo-ream, and whether or not it will stay in the pseudo-2 or reach the pseudo-three, and can improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and the configuration of the pseudo-ream may be different from that of the present embodiment.

For example, in the present embodiment, the pseudo-continuous notice image 214 and the pseudo-continuous image 216 are shown as an example with movement, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the pseudo-ream advance notice image 214 and the pseudo-ream image 216 displayed in the pseudo-ream may be displayed without movement.

For example, the pseudo-ream notice image 214 is not limited to the character image of "continuation" of the present embodiment, but is not limited to a predetermined motif (for example, an image with a butterfly motif) or a character dialogue image (for example, "I'm still going!"". , "I'll go more", etc.), etc.

Further, the pseudo continuous image 216 does not have to be stopped and displayed. For example, the pseudo-continuous image 216 may be displayed so as to sway when highlighted, or may be displayed so as to be repeatedly enlarged / reduced. That is, the pseudo continuous image 216 may be any image as long as it is an image displayed at a predetermined position in the effect display area 70 (for example, substantially the center of the effect display area 70). Further, the pseudo-series image 216 may represent a number (for example, 3 or 5), other characters (such as "ream"), and a predetermined motif image (for example, an image with a butterfly as a motif). It may be anything, such as a character dialogue image (for example, "I'm going!").

Further, in the present embodiment, a big hit is made depending on the execution pattern such as the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, the number of pseudo-reams (whether it is once or twice), and the content (whether it is a normal pseudo or a post-reach pseudo). Although the expectations are different, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment.

For example, the gaming machine of the present invention may have no difference in the jackpot expectation depending on the presence or absence of the pseudo-ream and the execution pattern (the jackpot expectation is the same). In addition, the jackpot expectation may be indirectly different depending on the presence or absence of pseudo-ream and the execution pattern. Specifically, although there is no difference in the jackpot expectation itself depending on whether or not the pseudo-ren is executed and the execution pattern, it suggests the development of other productions (indirectly suggests the jackpot expectation). It may be.

For example, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation is higher in the case where the post-reach pseudo is performed than in the case where the normal pseudo is performed (N pseudo <R post pseudo). The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and the jackpot expectation may be the same between the case where the normal pseudo is performed and the case where the post-reach pseudo is performed (N pseudo = R post-pseudo). Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the higher the number of pseudo-reams, the higher the expectation of a big hit (pseudo 2 stay <pseudo 3 reached), but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment. It may be assumed that there is no difference in the jackpot expectation depending on the difference in the number of pseudo-runs (pseudo 2 stay = pseudo 3 reached).

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the development to SP reach or higher is determined regardless of whether the normal simulation is performed or the post-reach simulation is performed. The gaming machine of the invention is not limited to this. More specifically, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the degree of expectation of development to SP reach or higher is that there is no pseudo-ream <normal pseudo = post-reach pseudo (development to 100% SP reach or more by pseudo-ream generation). An example of this is shown. However, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if a pseudo-ream occurs, it may not develop beyond SP reach, or when post-reach pseudo is performed, the degree of expectation for development beyond SP reach is higher than when normal pseudo is performed. (Expected development to SP reach or higher: Normal pseudo <pseudo after reach), the expected development to SP reach or the like may differ depending on the timing of pseudo-continuous occurrence.

Further, in the present embodiment, as an example, a common execution pattern is used for both the pseudo-ream performed under a certain condition (non-time-saving gaming state) and the pseudo-ream performed under another condition (time-saving gaming state). As shown, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the content and type of the execution pattern may be different between the pseudo-ream performed under certain conditions and the pseudo-ream performed under other conditions (under certain conditions). Normal pseudo only, under other conditions normal pseudo and post-reach pseudo, etc.).

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the pseudo-ream is executed in both the non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state) and the time-saving gaming state, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. Pseudo-ream may be executed under the conditions, and pseudo-ream may not be executed under other conditions.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pseudo-ream is executed under a plurality of conditions (non-time-saving gaming state and time-saving gaming state), and the pseudo-ream performed under certain conditions (non-time-saving gaming state) and other conditions. An example is shown in which the jackpot expectation is different depending on whether or not the pseudo-ren is executed and the execution pattern (the jackpot expectation is different under all conditions) for both the pseudo-ren performed in the (short-time game state). The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the pseudo-ream performed under certain conditions and the pseudo-ream performed under other conditions share the same jackpot expectation depending on the presence / absence of execution and the execution pattern (big hit expectation under all conditions). It may be (common in degree) or may have a change (the expectation of big hit is the same under some conditions, the expectation of big hit is different under other conditions, etc.).

(Example of timer production)
Next, an example of the timer effect executed by the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 85.

As described above, the "timer effect" is an effect that suggests that any of a plurality of events that expect the jackpot game to be executed in the process of executing the variable effect, and the timing at which the event occurs. be. In the timer effect, it is difficult for the player to determine the type of event when the event is executed, and the type of event can be determined when the event occurs.

More specifically, the timer effect is a predetermined event during the variable effect by displaying the timer image 220 indicating the subtraction of the time in the effect display area 70 and performing the countdown display (subtraction display) of the timer time. Is generated, and it is an effect that suggests the timing when a predetermined event occurs. In the following description, the occurrence of a predetermined event that is the target of the timer effect may be described as "timer activation".

As described above, in the present embodiment, as the events suggested by the timer effect, pseudo-ream generation (or continuation of pseudo-ream), development to SP reach, development to SPSP reach, revival, full rotation reach, etc. are suggested. It is set as an event. The event suggested by the timer effect is not limited to the present embodiment, and may be another event (for example, winning notification, icon color change, occurrence of cut-in, etc.).

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of patterns of timer types (three types of short timer, middle timer, and long timer) having different timer times are provided, and the order is short timer <middle timer <long timer. The timer time is long, and the expectation for big hits is high. That is, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot expectation is higher when the timer time is longer than when the timer subtraction time is short.

FIG. 85 shows, as an example, a case where a middle timer is determined as a timer type and the development to SPSP reach is notified as a suggestion event.

As shown in FIG. 85A, a timer image 220 is displayed at a predetermined position of the effect display area 70 (in the example of FIG. 85, the lower right side of the effect display area 70) after a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, and the timer effect is displayed. To be started.

In the present embodiment, the timer image 220 is displayed as not accompanied by movement. Specifically, in the present embodiment, after the timer image 220 is displayed, it is continuously displayed until the timer is activated while maintaining the size and position. Further, the timer image 220 is displayed with the timer time updated as needed while keeping the size and position as they are.

As shown in FIGS. 85 (b) and 85 (c), after the timer image 220 is displayed, the timer time of the timer image 220 is subtracted.

As shown in FIGS. 85 (d) and 85 (e), after the subtraction time of the timer image 220 becomes "0 seconds", an image (development notification image 222) for notifying the development to SPSP reach is displayed. For example, as the development notification image 222, an image such as "SPSP development" as shown in FIG. 85 (e) can be displayed.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the timer effect is performed twice during one fluctuation (when the timer is twice), when the first timer effect is a short timer, the second timer effect is a middle timer. Alternatively, when the long timer is determined and the first timer effect is the middle timer, the long timer is determined in the second timer effect (see FIG. 51 (b)). That is, in the present embodiment, when the timer effect is performed a plurality of times, the timer subtraction time of the timer effect performed after the timer subtraction time of the timer effect performed earlier is longer than the timer subtraction time of the timer effect performed earlier (the first timer). Time <second timer time).

In the timer effect of the present embodiment, when the number of timers is two (multiple times), the first timer is activated after the two timer images 220 appear and are displayed at the same time, and then the second time. Timer is activated (displayed at the same time and activated with a time lag). Specifically, when the number of timers is 2, a relatively short timer time (short timer or middle timer) is determined in the first timer effect, and a relatively long timer time (long) is determined in the second timer effect. Timer) is determined. That is, in the present embodiment, when the number of timers is two, two timer images 220 appear and be displayed at the same time, and then the first timer (short timer or middle timer) is activated first, and then. The second timer (long timer) is activated.

Further, when the number of timers is two, the effect with a higher expectation of a big hit is often performed in the case of the second timer activation than in the case of the first timer activation. For example, when the first timer is activated, a pseudo-ream occurs, when the second timer is activated, the development to SP reach is notified, or when the first timer is activated, the development to SPSP reach is notified, and the second timer is notified. When activated, an event with a higher expectation of a big hit is performed with a timer that is activated later, such as a revival effect (see FIG. 52 (b)).

Explaining this in chronological order from the player's point of view, when the timer effect is performed twice (when the number of timers is two), the expectation for the jackpot held for the first timer activation and the second time It will be different from the big hit expectation that you have for the timer activation. Specifically, from the player's point of view, the player's expectation for the jackpot for the second timer activation is greater than the player's expectation for the jackpot for the first timer activation. It means that it is big. In other words, the jackpot expectation that the player estimates is higher in the second timer effect than in the first timer effect (first timer <second timer).

As a result, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can raise the expectation of the player in chronological order and improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and the timer time of the later timer effect is shorter than the timer time of the earlier timer effect, or the timer time of the earlier timer effect and the later timer effect. May be the same as the timer time of (1st timer time ≥ 2nd timer time).

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, when the timer effect is executed a plurality of times, the first timer is activated after the plurality of timer images 220 appear and are displayed at the same time as in the present embodiment. The second timer may be activated (displayed at the same time and activated with a time lag). Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, two timers may be activated at the same time (displayed at the same time and activated at the same time). Further, the second timer image 220 may be displayed between the time when the first timer image 220 is displayed and the time when the first timer image 220 is activated (displayed with a time difference and before the first timer is activated). The second timer image 220 appears).

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and the timer effect may have a configuration different from that of the present embodiment other than the above-described configuration.

For example, in the present embodiment, the timer image 220 is displayed without movement (the frame image of the timer image 220 is displayed in a stopped state, and the time display portion of the timer is updated and displayed). However, the timer image may be displayed with movement. For example, the timer image 220 is displayed so as to sway during the subtraction of the timer, and is enlarged and displayed (highlighted) at the timing of the subtraction time of "0 seconds", or is displayed at a predetermined timing (timer time "0"). , The timing of starting the countdown, etc.) may be accompanied by movement, such as moving to the substantially center of the effect display area 70.

Further, in the timer effect of the present embodiment, a common execution pattern (timer type) is used for both the timer effect performed under a certain condition (non-time saving game state) and the timer effect performed under another condition (time saving game state). And the number of timers) is shown as an example, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the content and type of the execution pattern may be different between the timer effect performed under certain conditions and the timer effect performed under other conditions (under certain conditions). 1 type, 3 types under other conditions, etc.).

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the timer effect is executed in both the non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state) and the time-saving gaming state, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. The timer effect may be executed under the condition, and the timer effect may not be executed under other conditions.

Further, in the timer effect of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the jackpot expectation is different depending on the presence / absence of the timer effect and the execution pattern, but there is no difference in the jackpot expectation depending on the execution presence / absence and the execution pattern of the timer effect (big hit). It may be the one with the same expectation (the same expectation), or the one that suggests the development to other productions depending on the execution presence / absence and the execution pattern (indirectly, the jackpot expectation is different).

When the timer effect is performed a plurality of times, the jackpot expectation may be the same for the first timer effect and the second and subsequent timer effects. For example, there may be no difference in the jackpot expectation between the event performed by the first timer activation and the event performed by the second timer activation. Explaining this event in chronological order from the player's point of view, when the timer effect is performed twice (when the number of timers is two), the expectation for the jackpot held for the first timer activation and the second time. It means that there is no difference from the big hit expectation that you have for the timer activation. Specifically, from the player's point of view, the player's expectation for the jackpot for the first timer activation is the same as the player's expectation for the jackpot for the second timer activation. It turns out that. In other words, the jackpot expectation estimated by the player is the same between the first timer effect and the second timer effect (first timer = second timer).

With such a configuration, it is possible to widen the range of production and improve the interest of the game without unnecessarily raising or lowering the tension of the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, the timer effect is executed under a plurality of conditions (non-time saving game state and time saving game state), the timer effect performed under a certain condition (non-time saving game state), and other conditions. For both the timer effect and the timer effect performed in the (short-time game state), an example is shown in which the jackpot expectation is different depending on whether or not the timer effect is executed and the execution pattern (the jackpot expectation is different under all conditions). The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the timer effect performed under certain conditions and the timer effect performed under other conditions share the same jackpot expectation depending on the presence / absence of execution and the execution pattern (big hit expectation under all conditions). It may be (common in degree) or may have a change (the jackpot expectation is the same under certain conditions, the jackpot expectation is different under other conditions, etc.).

(Example of stock production)
Next, an example of the stock effect will be described with reference to FIG. 86.

As described above, the “stock effect” is an effect that suggests that any of a plurality of events that expect the jackpot game to be executed occurs in the process of executing the variable effect. In the stock effect of the present embodiment, the color change of the variable icon (the variable icon change effect) is executed at the time of stock release.

More specifically, the stock effect is an effect that suggests that a predetermined event occurs during the variable effect by displaying the stock icon 225 in the effect display area 70. In the timer effect, the timing at which the suggestion event occurs is suggested by subtracting the timer time, whereas in the stock effect, the timing at which the suggestion event occurs is not suggested.

The stock effect of the present embodiment is supposed to be performed during SP reach or during SPSP reach. The stock effect is not limited to that performed during SPSP reach or SPSP reach, and may be performed at other timings such as during pseudo fluctuation.

FIG. 86 shows an example of stock production. In the example of FIG. 86, the case where there is one stock icon 225 is shown. Further, in the example of FIG. 86, the case where the variable icon TI changes from the white icon to the red icon due to the stock effect is shown.

First, the start of SP reach will be described. FIG. 86A shows an example of an image displayed at the start of SP reach. As shown in FIG. 86 (a), at the start of SP reach or SPSP reach, the title image 224 of SP reach or SPSP reach is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 86 (b), the stock icon 225 is displayed at a predetermined position of the effect display area 70 (lower right side of the effect display area 70 in the example of FIG. 86 (b)) after a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation. Further, in the vicinity of the stock icon 225, an image indicating that the stock icon 225 is waiting (character image of "STANDBY" in the example of FIG. 86) is displayed.

The stock icon 225 is displayed with movement. Specifically, the stock icon 225 is displayed so as to sway over the period from its appearance to its activation. As a result, the gaming machine 1 can presage that some event will occur due to the activation of the stock icon 225, and can raise the expectation of the player.

As shown in FIG. 86 (c), when the end timing of the waiting time of the stock icon 225 approaches, a countdown display is performed in the vicinity of the stock icon 225.

As shown in FIG. 86 (d), when the waiting time of the stock icon 225 ends and the stock icon 225 is activated, the stock icon 225 is directed to cover the variable icon TI and the stock icon 225 is activated. ..

As shown in FIG. 86 (e), when the stock icon 225 is activated, the color of the variable icon TI is changed. More specifically, the variable icon TI (white icon in the example of FIG. 86 (c)) displayed before the activation of the stock icon 225 is the image after the icon color change (example of FIG. 86 (e)). Then it is updated to the red icon) and displayed.

Here, as described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of patterns are provided for the execution pattern of the stock effect. Specifically, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, one stock icon 225 is displayed over the waiting time A during one fluctuation, and one stock icon 225 waits during one fluctuation. A pattern displayed over time B and two stock icons 225 may be displayed during one fluctuation. The length of the waiting time is such that the waiting time A <the waiting time B.

Here, in the stock effect of the present embodiment, when a plurality of stock icons 225 are displayed (when there are a plurality of stock icons), the plurality of stock icons 225 appear and are displayed at the same time. Also, after the first stock icon 225 is activated, the second stock icon 225 is activated (appears at the same time, activated with a time lag).

When a plurality of stock icons are displayed, a plurality of stock icons may appear at the same time and be activated with a time difference (appear at the same time, be activated with a time difference), or may be activated at the same time. Good (appears at the same time, activates at the same time). Also, when multiple stock icons are displayed, multiple stock icons will appear with a time lag (regardless of whether it is before or after the previous stock icon is activated), and they will be activated with a time lag. It may be present (appears with a time difference, activated with a time difference), or may be activated at the same time (appears with a time difference, activated with a time difference).

Further, as described above, in the stock production of the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation level is in the order of one stock icon (short waiting time A) <one stock icon (long waiting time B) <two stock icons. It's getting higher.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and the stock effect may be different from that of the present embodiment.

For example, in the present embodiment, the stock icon 225 is displayed with movement, but the stock icon 225 may be displayed without movement.

Further, in the stock effect of the present embodiment, a common execution pattern (waiting time) is used for both the stock effect performed under a certain condition (non-time saving game state) and the stock effect performed under another condition (time saving game state). And the number of stock icons) is shown as an example, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the content and type of the execution pattern may be different between the stock effect performed under certain conditions and the stock effect performed under other conditions (under certain conditions). 1 type, 3 types under other conditions, etc.).

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the stock effect is executed in both the non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state) and the time-saving gaming state, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. The stock effect may be performed under the conditions, and the stock effect may not be performed under other conditions.

Further, in the stock effect of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the jackpot expectation is different depending on the presence / absence of the stock effect and the execution pattern, but there is no difference in the jackpot expectation depending on the execution presence / absence and the execution pattern of the stock effect (big hit). It may be the one with the same expectation (the same expectation), or the one that suggests the development to other productions depending on the presence / absence of execution and the execution pattern (indirectly different expectation of big hit).

Further, in the present embodiment, the stock effect is executed under a plurality of conditions (non-time-saving gaming state and time-saving gaming state), and the stock effect performed under certain conditions (non-time-saving gaming state) and other conditions. An example in which the jackpot expectation is the same depending on whether or not the stock is executed and the execution pattern (the jackpot expectation is different under all conditions) for both the stock effect performed in the (short-time game state). As shown, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the stock effect performed under certain conditions and the stock effect performed under other conditions share the same jackpot expectation depending on the presence / absence of execution and the execution pattern (common under all conditions). The jackpot expectation may be the same (for example, the jackpot expectation is the same), or it may be changed (the jackpot expectation is the same under certain conditions, the jackpot expectation is different under other conditions, etc.).

(Example of operation instruction production and cut-in display)
Next, an example of the effect when the cut-in display is performed as the target of the operation instruction effect will be described with reference to FIG. 87.

As described above, the “cut-in” means that the cut-in image 240 is displayed and the display color of the cut-in image 240 indicates the degree of expectation of a big hit.

As described above, the "operation instruction effect" causes the player to display the operation instruction image 230 indicating the device (for example, the effect button 35) that can be operated by the player, and causes the player to operate the device (for example, the effect button 35) (for example). , "Press!", "PUSH", "Continuous hit!", Etc.). During the operation instruction effect, an image (valid period suggestion image 231 showing a meter or the like) showing a period (valid period) for accepting an operation on the device (effect button 35) is displayed together with the operation instruction image 230.

In the operation instruction effect of the present embodiment, as the operation instruction image 230, an image showing the effect button 35 (see FIG. 87 (a)) is displayed together with a character image of “PUSH” instructing to press the effect button 35. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, as an effect targeted for the operation instruction effect (invocation target effect), a plurality of types of effects such as display of the cut-in image 240 and a winning notification effect are performed. In the example shown in FIG. 87, the cut-in image 240 is displayed by the operation instruction effect (the display of the cut-in image 240 is set as the activation target effect).

As shown in FIG. 87 (a), the operation instruction image 230 is displayed during the SP reach effect or at a predetermined timing during the SPSP reach effect (for example, the final stage of the SP reach effect). In addition, the operation instruction image 230 and the validity period suggestion image 231 showing the validity period are displayed. The validity period suggestion image 231 suggests the remaining time of the validity time, for example, the gauge decreases with the passage of time.

As shown in FIG. 87 (a), the operation instruction image 230 shown as an example in the present embodiment is displayed so as to swing up and down or left and right (displayed with movement). More specifically, the operation instruction image 230 alternately alternates between a non-operation mode indicating a state in which the effect button 35 is not operated and an operation mode indicating a state in which the effect button 35 is operated. Displayed with repeated animation actions.

As shown in FIG. 87 (b), after the operation instruction image 230 is displayed, the cut-in image 240 is displayed at a predetermined timing.

Here, when the non-auto button mode is set, the cut-in image 240 is displayed at the timing of device operation or the timing after the expiration of the valid period. More specifically, when the auto button mode is not set (when the non-auto button mode is set), if the device is not operated during the valid period, the cut-in image 240 is performed at the timing after the valid period has elapsed. Is displayed, and if the device operation is performed during the valid period, the cut-in image 240 is displayed at the timing of the device operation.

Further, as described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the buttons are operated when the auto button mode is set depending on whether the mountain mode is set or the river mode is set. It is said that the timing of determining the result is different.

More specifically, when the auto button mode is set and the effect mode A (mountain mode) is set, the timing after the time Td1 from the start of the valid period (1/3 of the valid period) ) Activates the auto button (cut-in image 240 is displayed). If the auto button mode is set and the production mode B (river mode) is set, the auto button is set at the timing after the time Td2 from the start of the valid period (2/3 of the valid period). Is activated (cut-in image 240 is displayed).

That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the timing at which the effect targeted for the operation instruction effect (display of the cut-in image 240 in the present embodiment) is generated differs depending on the determined mode. Specifically, when the mountain mode is set, the auto button is activated at an early timing, and when the river mode is set, the auto button is activated at a late timing.

As is clear from the above description, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the device is not operated, the activation target effect is performed at the timing after the expiration of the validity period, and before the expiration of the validity period. There are cases where the activation target effect is performed at the timing (when the activation target effect is performed at the timing when the auto button is activated). Further, as is clear from the above description, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the activation target effect may be performed at the timing when the device operation is performed.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the timing at which the activation target effect is generated differs depending on the activation timing of the auto button or the presence or absence of the player's device operation, while the jackpot expectation due to the difference in the timing at which the activation target effect occurs. There is no difference in the degree (the jackpot expectation is the same even if the timing is different). Further, while the jackpot expectation does not change depending on the timing at which the activation target effect occurs, the background color of the cut-in image 240 displayed in the activation target effect suggests the jackpot expectation.

As a result, the gaming machine 1 can improve the interest of the game by giving diversity to the timing at which the effect suggesting the jackpot expectation degree such as the cut-in display is generated.

As shown in FIG. 87 (c), the cut-in image 240 can display, for example, a character image or the like, and the jackpot expectation degree can be suggested by the background of the cut-in image 240 or the like. As described above, in the cut-in image 240, the jackpot expectation is higher in the order of green background <red background <gold background <. In the present embodiment, the cut-in image 240 is displayed without movement in the cut-in display.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and may have a configuration different from that of the present embodiment in terms of cut-in display and operation instruction effect.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 87, the occurrence of cut-in (display of the cut-in image 240) has been described as the effect to be activated, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and is shown in FIG. 88. As shown in the example, the winning notification may be set as the effect to be activated, the gimmick falls, the background image suggesting the jackpot expectation is displayed (expectation suggesting background image is displayed), the development to SP reach, etc. Various choices are possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the activation timing of the auto button is changed according to the mode set by the player's selection, but the activation timing of the auto button is not limited to the present embodiment. For example, the activation timing of the auto button may be different depending on the expectation of the privilege such as the expectation of a big hit or the development of an advantageous production (for example, SP reach). For example, when the jackpot expectation is high, the auto button is activated at a later timing, and when the jackpot expectation is low, the auto button is activated at an earlier timing.

Further, the timing of activating the auto button may be any timing as long as it is during the valid period.

Further, in the operation instruction effect of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the operation instruction image 230 is accompanied by movement, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the operation instruction image 230 may be an image that does not involve movement. Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the cut-in image 240 is displayed without movement in the cut-in display, but the cut-in image 240 may be displayed with movement. good.

Further, in the cut-in display of the present embodiment, a common execution pattern is used for both the cut-in display performed under certain conditions (non-time-saving gaming state) and the cut-in display performed under other conditions (time-saving gaming state). Although (three types of cut-in patterns) are shown as an example, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the content and type of the execution pattern may be different between the cut-in display performed under certain conditions and the cut-in display performed under other conditions (certain conditions). 2 types below, 3 types under other conditions, etc.).

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the cut-in display is executed in both the non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state) and the time-saving gaming state, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. The cut-in display may be performed under certain conditions, and the cut-in display may not be performed under other conditions.

Further, in the cut-in display of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the jackpot expectation is different depending on the execution pattern of the cut-in display (which pattern is green, red, or gold). There is no difference in the jackpot expectation depending on the pattern (the jackpot expectation is the same), or it suggests the development to other productions depending on the presence or absence of execution and the execution pattern (indirectly, the jackpot expectation is different). May be good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the cut-in display is executed under a plurality of conditions (non-time-saving gaming state and time-saving gaming state), and the cut-in display performed under certain conditions (non-time-saving gaming state) and other cut-in displays. An example in which the jackpot expectation according to the execution pattern of the cut-in display is the same for both the cut-in display performed under the condition (time saving game state) (the jackpot expectation is different in common under all conditions). However, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the gaming machine of the present invention, there is no difference in the jackpot expectation depending on the execution pattern between the cut-in display performed under certain conditions and the cut-in display performed under other conditions (under all conditions). The jackpot expectation may be the same in common), or it may be changed (the jackpot expectation is the same under certain conditions, the jackpot expectation is different under other conditions, etc.).

(Example of winning notification effect)
Next, an example of the winning notification effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91.

The "winning notification effect" is an effect of notifying the result of the jackpot determination.

In the case of a big hit, a winning notification effect of a mode of notifying the big hit (big hit mode) is performed. In addition, in the winning notification effect of the jackpot mode, a success effect is performed.

In the case of a loss, a winning notification effect of a mode of notifying the loss (loss mode) is performed. In addition, in the winning notification effect of the loss mode, a failure effect is performed.

Further, as a mode of notifying the jackpot of the winning notification effect, there is a case where the effect of notifying the loss is performed, and then the winning notification effect (revival mode) of the resurrection mode in which the jackpot is notified is performed. In the winning notification effect of the revival mode, the revival effect is performed.

To explain the winning notification effect of the revival mode in more detail, after performing the effect showing the loss mode (failure effect), the effect is as if the revival or reversal is performed. Therefore, in the revival effect, at least a part of the effect is common to the effect showing the loss mode (failure effect, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 88, at the final stage of the fluctuation effect (immediately before the winning notification), the operation instruction effect is performed with the winning notification as the activation target effect. More specifically, at the end of the fluctuation effect, the operation instruction image 230 is displayed, and the winning notification is produced by activating the button.

In the following production example of the winning notification effect, first, an example of the winning notification effect of the jackpot mode will be described, then an example of the winning notification effect of the losing mode will be described, and then an example of the winning notification effect of the resurrection mode will be described. ..

(An example of a winning notification effect of a jackpot mode (non-revival))
FIG. 88 shows an example of a winning notification effect in a jackpot mode (at the time of non-revival). As shown in FIG. 88 (a), in the present embodiment, an operation instruction effect is performed with the winning notification (success effect or failure effect) as the activation target effect. In the operation instruction effect, the operation instruction image 230 is displayed to urge the player to operate the device.

As for the operation instruction effect, detailed description will be omitted because the activation timing and the configuration of the operation instruction image 230 and the like are the same as when the cut-in display described above is used as the activation target effect.

As shown in FIG. 88 (a), the operation instruction image 230 is displayed before the winning notification.

As shown in FIG. 88 (b), at a predetermined timing (after the expiration of the valid period, the timing of device operation or the timing of activation of the auto button), an effect of notifying whether or not the jackpot is a big hit is performed. In the case of a big hit, a success effect (in the example of FIG. 88 (b), an effect indicating that the woman and the man have succeeded in meeting) is performed.

As shown in FIG. 88 (c), after the success effect, three effect symbols 38 showing the same number (“5” in the example of FIG. 88 (c)) are displayed (big hit mode). Then, the three effect symbols 38 are once highlighted and then stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the effect display area 70 (fixed stop). In addition, when the winning notification effect for notifying the jackpot is performed and the revival effect is not performed (at the time of non-revival), the eye-catching image 250 described later is not displayed.

(An example of a winning notification effect in a lost mode)
FIG. 89 shows an example of a winning notification effect in a lost mode.

As shown in FIG. 89A, the operation instruction image 230 is displayed before the winning notification.

As shown in FIG. 89 (b), at a predetermined timing (after the expiration of the valid period, the timing of device operation or the timing of activating the auto button), an effect of notifying whether or not the jackpot is a big hit is performed. If the necklace is lost, a failure effect (in the present embodiment, the effect display area 70 is darkened and the necklace is broken) is performed.

As shown in FIG. 89 (c), after the failure effect, the third effect symbol 38 descends toward the substantially center of the effect display area 70 in a mode showing a loss (a loss mode such as 575).

As shown in FIG. 89 (d), after the three effect symbols 38 are displayed in the substantially center of the effect display area 70 in a lost manner, the three effect symbols 38 maintain their positions while swaying up and down (temporary stop). ).

As shown in FIG. 89 (e), the eye-catching image 250 is displayed after the temporary stop is performed. The eye-catching image 250 is an image indicating the end of SP reach or the like, and can be displayed in substantially the entire area of the effect display area 70 as a background image accompanied by a predetermined character, a model name, or the like. The eye-catching image 250 is displayed without any movement.

As shown in FIG. 89 (f), after the eye-catching image 250 is displayed, the background image of the effect display area 70 returns to the normal background (for example, the background image corresponding to the effect mode), and the three effect symbols 38 are predetermined. The temporary stop is continued for the time (temporary stop time Te1).

As shown in FIG. 90 (a), at the timing when the temporary stop time Te1 elapses, the effect symbol 38 (the effect symbol 38 that was temporarily stopped) showing the three losing modes that were swaying and swaying is completely stopped. Is displayed (fixed stop). Further, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), the next fluctuation is started after the fixed stop.

(Example of winning notification effect of revival mode)
FIG. 91 shows an example of a winning notification effect of the resurrection mode.

As described above, in the winning notification effect of the resurrection mode, at least a part of the winning notification effect is common to the winning notification effect of the losing mode. In the winning notification effect of the revival mode of the present embodiment, the winning notification of the losing mode is from the display of the operation instruction image 230 (operation instruction effect) to the failure effect, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 38, and the display of the eye-catching image 250. A production that is common to the production is performed. In the following explanation of the winning notification effect of the revival mode, the explanation from the display of the operation instruction image 230 to the display of the third effect symbol 38 is omitted, and after the temporary stop of the three effect symbols 38 (temporary stop of the lost eye). The flow of is explained.

As shown in FIG. 91 (a), after the failure effect, the three effect symbols 38 are displayed in the substantially center of the effect display area 70 in a lost manner, and then the three effect symbols 38 sway up and down to move their positions. Maintain (temporary stop of lost eyes).

As shown in FIG. 91 (b), the eye-catching image 250 is displayed after the temporary stop is performed.

As shown in FIG. 91 (c), after the eye-catching image 250 is displayed, the background image of the effect display area 70 returns to the normal background (for example, the background image corresponding to the effect mode), and the three effect symbols 38 are predetermined. The temporary stop is continued for the time (temporary stop time Te2). The temporary stop time Te2 of the effect symbol 38 in the case of the resurrection effect is longer than the temporary stop time Te1 of the effect symbol 38 in the loss mode (temporary stop time Te1 in the case of loss <temporary stop in the case of resurrection). Time Te2).

As shown in FIG. 91 (d), after the temporary stop, the three effect symbols 38 start scrolling again. Further, in the effect display area 70, a revival effect (in the example of FIG. 91 (d), the broken necklace is restored and the time seems to go back) is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 91 (e), a success effect is performed after the revival effect.

As shown in FIG. 91 (f), after the revival effect and the success effect, three effect symbols 38 (the effect symbol 38 in the jackpot mode) showing the same number (“5” in the example of FIG. 91 (f)) are highlighted. After that, it is displayed in a completely stopped state (confirmed stop).

As described above, in the revival mode, the eye-catching image 250 is displayed after the three effect symbols 38 show the lost mode (see FIG. 91 (a)) (see FIG. 91 (b)). Further, after the eye-catching image 250 is displayed, the three effect symbols 38 continue to flutter up and down over the temporary stop time Te2 (see FIG. 91 (c)), and then the effect symbols 38 scroll again. (Fluctuates again), and then the effect symbol 38 is displayed in a stopped state in the jackpot mode (fixed stop).

Further, as described above, the temporary stop time Te2 of the effect symbol 38 in the revival mode is longer than the temporary stop time Te1 of the effect symbol 38 in the lost mode (temporary stop time Te1 <temporary stop time Te2). In other words, when the revival effect is performed (in the case of a big hit), the time from the display of the eye-catching image 250 to the final stop of the effect symbol 38 is longer than in the case of loss. As a result, the gaming machine 1 can be expected to be revived and become a big hit even when the loss is notified.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and the winning notification effect may be configured differently from that of the present embodiment.

For example, in the present embodiment, an example in which the eye-catching image 250 is displayed as an animation image without movement is shown, but the eye-catching image 250 may be displayed with movement (animation). good.

Further, although an example is shown in which the operation instruction effect is performed before the winning notification effect of the present embodiment, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and the operation instruction effect is performed before the winning notification effect. May not be performed.

(An example of production during a jackpot game)
Next, an example of the effect during the jackpot game will be described with reference to FIG. 92.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol ends, the character "BIG BONUS" indicating that the jackpot game is a 10R jackpot game in the image showing the type of the jackpot game (in the example shown in FIG. 92A). Image) is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 92B, a right-handed notification image 260 suggesting right-handedness is displayed in the effect display area 70.

As shown in FIG. 92 (c), when the game ball passes through the normal map gate 44 provided in the right game area after the stop time of the first special symbol is completed, the first round game of the first jackpot game is started. NS. In addition, the round effect image is displayed, and the round number image 262 showing the number of rounds (continuation number) is displayed on the upper left of the screen of the effect display area 70. Further, a right-handed notification image 260 suggesting right-handedness is displayed on the upper right of the effect display area 70.

(An example of production during a time-saving game state)
Next, the effect of the gaming machine 1 during the time-saving game state (during the low-probability time-saving game state and during the high-probability time-saving game state) will be described. As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has icons in both the normal gaming state (during the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state) and the time-saving gaming state (during the low-probability time-saving gaming state and the high-probability gaming state). Pre-reading effects such as appearance effect, winning flash effect, and icon change effect (icon color change) can be executed.

Further, as described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is in both the normal gaming state (during the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state) and the time-saving gaming state (during the low-probability time-saving gaming state and the high-probability time-saving gaming state). So, it is possible to execute the action during the change such as the action at the start of the change, the notice of dialogue, and the pseudo-ream.

(An example of icon appearance production during a time-saving game state)
First, an example of the icon appearance effect performed during the time-saving game state will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95.

The hold icon HI and the variable icon TI are displayed with a movement that always rotates, as in the normal game state, even during the time-saving game state. In the following description of each effect example, the description of the movement of the hold icon HI and the variable icon TI will be omitted, but it is assumed that the movement is always displayed with the movement (as a periodic animation).

As described above, in the present embodiment, three patterns of normal display, delayed display, and redisplay are provided for the appearance mode of the hold icon HI. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the execution pattern (normal display, delay display, and redisplay) and execution mode (appearance timing and appearance of the hold icon HI) are performed in both the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state. How) is common.

Hereinafter, each execution pattern of the icon appearance effect during the time-saving game state and these modes will be described with reference to the drawings.

In FIGS. 93 to 95, as an example, when the number of the second hold is "2" (U2 = 2), the game ball Q wins (wins) the second start port 15, and the number of the second hold is When it becomes "3" (U2 = 3), the appearance mode of the hold icon HI, the update mode of the second hold number display area 74b, the mode of the winning sound, and the timing at which these are performed are shown.

(Example of normal display)
First, with reference to FIG. 93, an example of a normal display in the icon appearance effect during the time-saving game state will be described. FIG. 93 shows an example of a case where the normal display is performed in the icon appearance effect during the time saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 93 (a), when the second hold number is "2", "2" is displayed in the second hold number display area 74b, and the second hold icon display area 72b has two holds. The icon HI is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 93 (b), when the game ball Q enters (wins) the second starting port 15 and the second hold number becomes "3", the second hold number display area 74b is displayed in TMa1 at the time of winning. The display is updated from "2" to "3", and a winning sound (a sound of "pocon" in the example of FIG. 93) is output from the voice output device 32. In addition, a third hold icon HI appears in the effect display area 70 at the time of winning TMa1. In the example of FIG. 93 (b), an example in which the hold icon HI appears above the second hold icon display area 72b is shown. The appearing hold icon HI appears so as to descend toward the corresponding area (third area R3 in the example of FIG. 93B) of the second hold icon display area 72b.

In this way, in the icon appearance effect during the time-saving game state, in the case of normal display, the appearance (display) of the hold icon HI and the hold number display area 74 (number hold) are displayed on TMa1 at the time of winning (immediately after winning). ) Will be increased and updated, and the winning sound will be output.

As shown in FIG. 93 (c), after the hold icon HI appears, it is displayed in the corresponding area of the second hold icon display area 72b (the third area R3 in the example of FIG. 93 (b)). That is, when the appearance operation of the hold icon HI is completed, the hold icon HI is displayed in each of the first area R1, the second area R2, and the third area R3, and a total of three hold icon HIs are displayed. Become. In this way, even in the icon appearance effect during the time-saving game state, the hold icon HI is displayed in the hold icon display area 72 (second hold icon display area 72b) on the right side, but during the non-time-saving game state. It is displayed in the same display mode as in the case of the icon appearance effect.

As described above, the hold icon HI is displayed with movement. More specifically, the hold icon HI is said to move periodically so as to rotate (periodic animation). Further, when a plurality of hold icon HIs are displayed, the plurality of hold icon HIs are displayed with movement so as to be synchronized.

Further, while the hold icon HI is displayed as an animation accompanied by movement, the hold number (number hold) displayed in the hold number display area 74 does not involve movement. More specifically, the display of the number hold does not change unless the conditions for increasing or decreasing the number of holds (new winning or the digestion of the hold) are satisfied. The number of holds (number hold) displayed in the hold number display area 74 is maintained in the displayed state (continuously displayed) even when other effects such as SP reach effect are performed. ..

(Example of delay display)
Next, an example of the delay display in the icon appearance effect during the time-saving game state will be described with reference to FIG. 94. FIG. 94 shows an example of the case where the delay display is performed.

As shown in FIG. 94 (a), when the second hold number is "2", "2" is displayed in the second hold number display area 74b, and the second hold icon display area 72b has two holds. The icon HI is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 94 (b), when the game ball Q wins the second starting port 15 and the first hold number becomes "3", the display of the second hold number display area 74b is "2" on TMa1 at the time of winning. Is updated to "3", and a winning sound (a sound of "pocon" in the example of FIG. 94) is output. In the case of the delayed display, the winning sound is output to TMa1 at the time of winning, while the hold icon HI does not appear (the state where it does not appear).

As shown in FIG. 94 (c), a third hold icon HI appears in the effect display area 70 at the timing TMa2 after the time Ta2 (2 seconds in the present embodiment) from the winning TMa1. That is, in the delayed display, the hold icon HI appears later than in the normal display. In the present embodiment, an example in which the hold icon HI appears above the second hold icon display area 72b is shown. The appearing hold icon HI appears so as to descend toward the corresponding area (third area R3 in the example of FIG. 94C) of the second hold icon display area 72b.

As shown in FIG. 94 (d), after the hold icon HI appears, it is displayed in the corresponding area of the second hold icon display area 72b (the third area R3 in the example of FIG. 94 (d)). That is, when the appearance operation of the hold icon HI is completed, the hold icon HI is displayed in each of the first area R1, the second area R2, and the third area R3, and a total of three hold icon HIs are displayed. Become.

In this way, even when the delay display is performed in the icon appearance effect during the time-saving game state (when a delay occurs), the mode is the same as when the delay display is performed in the icon appearance effect during the non-time-saving game state. .. That is, in the delayed display, the number of holds in the hold number display area 74 (number hold) is increased and updated and the winning sound is output at the time of winning (immediately after winning), whereas the holding icon HI is displayed at the time of winning. It is performed at the timing TMa2 after a predetermined time has elapsed from TMa1. From the opposite point of view, in the gaming machine 1, even if the display (appearance) of the hold icon HI is delayed, the output of the winning sound and the increase update timing of the number hold are fixed.

(Example of redisplay)
Next, an example of redisplay in the icon appearance effect during the time-saving game state will be described with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 shows an example of a case where redisplay is performed.

As shown in FIG. 95 (a), when the second hold number is "2", "2" is displayed in the second hold number display area 74b, and the second hold icon display area 72b has two holds. Icon HI is displayed

As shown in FIG. 95 (b), when the game ball Q wins the second starting port 15 and the second hold number becomes "3", the display of the second hold number display area 74b is "2" on TMa1 at the time of winning. Is updated to "3", and a winning sound (a sound of "pocon" in the example of FIG. 95) is output. In addition, a third hold icon HI appears in the effect display area 70 at the time of winning TMa1. The appearing hold icon HI appears so as to descend toward the corresponding area (third area R3 in the example of FIG. 95 (b)) of the second hold icon display area 72b.

As shown in FIG. 95 (c), after the hold icon HI appears, it is displayed in the corresponding area of the second hold icon display area 72b (the third area R3 in the example of FIG. 95 (c)). That is, when the first appearance operation of the hold icon HI is completed, the hold icon HI is displayed in each of the first area R1, the second area R2, and the third area R3, and a total of three hold icon HIs are displayed. It will be in a state of being.

As shown in FIG. 95 (d), the appearing hold icon HI is hidden (the hold icon HI disappears) after the time Ta1 (for example, 1 second) after the winning TMa1. FIG. 95 (d) shows an example in which the hold icon HI pops and disappears. Even if the hold icon HI is hidden (even if it disappears), the update mode of the second hold number display area 74b (display of "3" indicating that U2 = 3) is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 95 (e), the hidden hold icon HI reappears in the effect display area 70 at the timing TMa2 after the time Ta2 (2 seconds in the present embodiment) from the winning TMa1. The appearing hold icon HI appears so as to descend toward the corresponding area (third area R3 in the example of FIG. 95 (e)) of the second hold icon display area 72b.

As shown in FIG. 95 (f), the reappearing hold icon HI is displayed in the corresponding area of the second hold icon display area 72b (third area R3 in the example of FIG. 95 (f)). That is, when the second appearance operation of the hold icon HI is completed, the hold icon HI is displayed in each of the first area R1, the second area R2, and the third area R3, and a total of three hold icon HIs are displayed. It will be in a state of being.

As described above, when the icon appearance effect in the time-saving game state is redisplayed, the mode is the same as the case where the icon appearance effect in the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) is redisplayed. .. That is, in the redisplay, the display (appearance) of the hold icon HI, the increase update of the hold number in the hold number display area 74 (number hold), and the output of the prize sound are displayed on TMa1 at the time of winning (immediately after winning). At the same time, the hold icon HI is displayed (appears) again at the timing TMa2 after the lapse of a predetermined period from TMa1 at the time of winning. From the opposite point of view, it can be said that one hold icon HI is displayed twice in the redisplay. Further, even in the case of redisplay, the output of the winning sound and the increase update of the number hold are set to once at a fixed timing (once at the same timing as the normal display).

In this way, in the gaming machine 1, even in the icon appearance effect during the time-saving game state (icon appearance effect performed during the time-saving game state), the hold icon HI appears and is displayed at the time of winning in the normal display, while the delayed display is displayed. Then, the hold icon is displayed (appears) later than the normal display, and when it is redisplayed, the hold icon is displayed (appears) twice.

Here, as described above, in the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the execution pattern of the icon appearance effect (whether it is a normal display, a delayed display, or a redisplay). Specifically, in the icon appearance effect during the low-probability non-time-saving game state, the jackpot expectation is higher in the order of normal display <delayed display <redisplay.

On the other hand, in the icon appearance effect during the low-probability time-saving game state, the jackpot expectation of normal display <delayed display = redisplay is set. That is, in the low-probability time-saving game state, the jackpot expectation is higher when the hold icon HI appears after a predetermined time from the time of winning than when it appears at the time of winning (the later the appearance of the hold icon HI). High expectation for big hits). As a result, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can increase the interest of the player with respect to the appearance timing of the hold icon HI and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the icon appearance effect during the high-probability time-saving game state, normal display = delayed display <redisplay jackpot expectation. That is, in the high-probability time-saving game state, the jackpot expectation is higher when the hold icon HI appears twice than when the hold icon HI appears once for one prize. As a result, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can increase the interest of the player with respect to the number of appearances of the hold icon HI and improve the interest of the game.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the jackpot expectation degree can be set so that normal display = delayed display = redisplay (see FIG. 41 (d)). Specifically, in the icon appearance effect performed under a predetermined condition (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state), depending on whether the display is normal display, delayed display, or redisplay (depending on the execution pattern). It may be assumed that there is no difference in the jackpot expectation (the jackpot expectation is the same). In the modified example of the icon appearance effect determination table referred to during the high-probability time-saving game state shown in FIG. (Regardless of whether it is a big hit or a loss, the normal display is determined at a rate of 33%, the delayed display is determined at 33%, and the redisplay is determined at a rate of 33%). Therefore, in the modified example of the icon appearance effect determination table referred to during the high-probability time-saving game state shown in FIG. 41 (d), there is a difference in the jackpot expectation even when the hold icon HI appears at any timing. There is no.

As described above, in the modified example icon appearance effect of the icon appearance effect determination table referred to during the high-probability time-saving game state shown in FIG. 41 (d), there is no difference in the jackpot expectation depending on the execution pattern (the jackpot expectation is the same). ). That is, in the modified example of the icon appearance effect determination table referred to during the high-probability time-saving game state shown in FIG. 41 (d), the hold icon HI appears at what timing (appears at the time of winning or appears later). There is no difference in the jackpot expectation, and there is no difference in the jackpot expectation depending on how many times the hold icon HI appears for one prize. From another point of view, even if a certain hold icon HI appears as a red icon with a delay (even in the case of delayed display) during a high-probability time-saving game state, or as a red icon at the time of winning (normal display). Even if the hold icon HI appears multiple times, in each case it only suggests the jackpot expectation as a red icon, whether it appeared late, at the time of winning, or how many times. There is no difference in the jackpot expectation depending on whether it appears. As a result, the gaming machine 1 can improve the enjoyment of the game by giving unexpectedness and sharpness in the game in the high-probability gaming state without unnecessarily raising or lowering the tension of the player.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the icon appearance effect performed in the time-saving game state and the low-probability gaming state (low-probability time-saving gaming state), the delay display or redisplay is determined by the variation effect pattern. The probabilities are different.

For example, in the present embodiment, in the icon appearance effect during the low-probability time-saving game state, the delay display is determined at a rate of 15% when the SP reach is performed, whereas the delay display is determined when the SPSP reach is performed. Is determined at a rate of 30%. Further, when the same SP reach is performed, the delay display is determined at a rate of 15% regardless of whether it is a big hit or a loss. In the icon appearance effect during the low-probability time-saving game state, as described above, the degree of expectation of development beyond SP reach is normally displayed <delay = redisplay.

In this way, the icon appearance effect during the low-probability time-saving game state develops into other effects (effects with high jackpot expectations) depending on the execution pattern (depending on whether the display is normal display, delayed display, or redisplay). The probability of a jackpot is increasing, indirectly suggesting a jackpot expectation (the jackpot expectation is indirectly different). That is, in the low-probability time-saving game state, depending on when the hold icon HI appears (depending on whether it appears at the time of winning or is delayed), the hold icon may appear late (delayed display) or the hold icon. If appears twice (redisplayed), there is a high possibility that it will develop into SP reach or the like.

As a result, the gaming machine 1 gives the player a sense of discomfort while giving the game a sharpness, and also provides a more advanced guessing element (guessing information) when the player guesses whether or not a jackpot is given. be able to. That is, even if the display color of the hold icon HI is not so high in expectation of a big hit (for example, if it is a white icon or a blue icon), if a delayed display or the like is performed, it may develop into SP reach or the like. It is possible to raise expectations for subsequent productions.

(Prize-winning flash production triggered by winning a prize at the second starting port)
Next, the winning flash effect (the winning flash effect during the time-saving game state) performed when the second starting port 15 is won will be described.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has the same configuration as the winning flash effect during the normal gaming state (during the non-time-saving gaming state), and the winning flash effect is performed even during the time-saving gaming state. Further, the winning flash effect during the time-saving game state has the same mode and execution pattern as the winning flash effect during the non-time-saving game state.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and the winning flash effect during the time-saving gaming state may have a different configuration from the winning flash effect during the normal gaming state. For example, the gaming machine of the present invention performs a winning flash effect for either the winning of the first starting port 14 or the winning of the second starting port 15 (either in the non-time-saving gaming state or in the time-saving gaming state). On the other hand, the winning flash effect may not be performed.

Further, when the winning flash effect is performed during the time-saving game state, the specific sound may be output with a delay (delay pattern) as described in the explanation of the winning flash effect during the non-time-saving game state. However, a specific sound may be output a plurality of times (re-execution pattern), or a promotion pattern may be provided.

Further, when a delay pattern is provided in the winning flash effect performed when the second starting port 15 is won, the timing at which the specific sound is delayed and output is set when the first starting port 14 is won. The timing may be different from the timing in the delay pattern of the flash effect (for example, when the first start port 14 is won and a delay occurs, a specific sound is output 2 seconds later, whereas the second start port is output. If a prize is won in 15 and a delay occurs, a specific sound is output after 1 second, etc.).

Further, with respect to the winning flash effect during the time-saving game state, the jackpot expectation may be the same depending on the execution presence / absence and the execution pattern, or the jackpot expectation may be indirectly different. For example, if white light is emitted at the time of winning, the jackpot expectation due to the winning flash effect itself is not different from that at the time of non-execution, but there is a high possibility that the icon color will change after that. For example, other effects (effects with high expectation of big hits) may be more likely to occur.

(About the icon change effect during the time saving game state)
Next, the icon color change (icon change effect during the time-saving game state) related to the second hold will be described.

Each hold icon HI related to the second hold shifts from the second hold icon display area 72b toward the change icon display area 73 after each change. For example, the hold icon HI displayed in the first area R1 is shifted to the change icon display area 73 and displayed as the change icon TI, and the hold icon HI displayed in the second area R2 is the first area R1. It is displayed by shifting to. Further, the hold icon HI displayed in the third area R3 is shifted to the second area R2 and displayed.

Further, when the color of the hold icon HI related to the second hold is changed, it is performed at the time of shift as in the case of the hold icon HI related to the first hold. That is, the color change of the hold icon HI related to the second hold is performed only at the timing at the time of shift.

(About the fluctuation production of the second special symbol)
Next, the variation effect of the second special symbol (variation effect during the time-saving game state) will be described.

At the start of the change of the second special symbol (at the start of the change during the time-saving game state), the second reserved number display area is the same as at the start of the change of the first special symbol (at the start of the change during the non-time-saving game state). The number of holds displayed in 74b is subtracted by "1" and displayed for update. The timing and mode in which the number of holds (number hold) in the second hold number display area 74b is updated is the same as the timing and mode in which the number of holds in the first hold number display area 74a is updated.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has an action at the start of fluctuation, a dialogue notice, a pseudo-ream, a timer effect, and a stock effect in both the variation effect during the non-time saving game state and the variation effect during the time saving game state. Performs variable effects such as cut-in display and winning notification effect. The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and during the time-saving game state, the variable start action, dialogue notice, pseudo-ream, timer effect, stock effect, cut-in display, winning notification effect, etc. Some or all of them may not be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, both the variation effect during the non-time saving game state and the variation effect during the time reduction game state are common to each variation effect (execution mode and jackpot expectation). Therefore, in the following description, detailed description of the changing effect during the time-saving game state (the changing effect of the second special symbol) will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the fluctuating effect performed during the change of the first special symbol (the fluctuating effect during the non-time saving game) and the fluctuating effect performed during the change of the second special symbol (during the time saving game state). Although an example is shown in which the effect during fluctuation is common (execution mode and jackpot expectation), the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment.

For example, while a pseudo-ream is performed during a change under certain conditions (for example, a non-time-saving game state or a low-probability game state), a pseudo-ream is performed during a change under another condition (for example, a time-saving game state or a high-probability game state). The number of types of fluctuating effects under certain conditions and the number of types of fluctuating effects under other conditions may be different, such as no pseudo-ream.

Further, the number of types of effects performed under certain conditions and the number of types of effects performed under other conditions may be different (the types of effects to be executed may differ depending on the conditions). For example, in the normal game state (normal time), "display of hold icon", "scroll", "pseudo-ream", "timer effect", "stock effect", "operation instruction effect (decision effect)", " While seven types of "winning notification effect (including resurrection mode)" are provided, less than these types may be performed during the high-probability time-saving game state (high probability middle), and many types are performed. It may be a scroll.

Further, in one type of effect, the number of types of effects provided with a plurality of timings to be executed (for example, an icon appearance effect provided with a plurality of timings at which the hold icon appears) is different from a certain condition and another condition. (For example, during the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state, during the high-probability game state and during the low-probability game state, etc.), they may be different.

For example, a delay display is provided for the icon appearance effect, and a delay pattern is provided for the winning flash effect (when the icon appearance effect and the winning flash effect are provided as effects having a plurality of execution timings), and the icon appearance effect and the winning flash effect are normally performed. The winning flash effect is performed (normally, there are two types of icon appearance effect and the winning flash effect), and the icon appearance effect is performed during the time-saving game state, and the winning flash effect is not performed (one type of icon appearance effect during the time-saving game state). ) May be.

(Error type and detection and cancellation conditions for each error)
Next, a plurality of types of errors (in other words, abnormalities) that may occur in the gaming machine 1 will be listed and described with reference to FIG. 96.

As described above, in the present specification, "error occurrence" is, strictly speaking, when an irregular event defined as an error occurs, such as an event such as power restoration or an abnormal winning frequency. , It may be understood that it means to detect the occurrence of the irregular event.

For example, although the event of "power restoration" is not an error of the gaming machine 1 itself, the state in which the gaming machine 1 is supplied with power to be used for the player's game is a normal state (in other words, normal). From the viewpoint of the state), the event that the power of the gaming machine 1 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state can be said to be a kind of abnormality (error).

The error shown in FIG. 96 is only a part of the error that can occur and the error that can be detected, and there are various other errors. The gaming machine 1 can detect the presence or absence of various errors (each error that can occur in the gaming machine 1) including the one shown as an example in FIG. 96.

In the following description, regarding any error, shifting from the state in which the error has occurred to the state in which the error has not occurred will be described as "error resolution" or "error cancellation". ..

Hereinafter, the content of each error, the detection conditions, and the like will be described with reference to FIG. 96.

(1. RAM clear)
RAM clear is detected on condition that a RAM clear operation is detected. Specifically, the main control board 110 is subject to the condition that the gaming machine 1 is switched from the power-off state to the power-on state (RAM clear operation is performed) while the RAM clear switch 111a is ON. Detects RAM clear. Since clearing RAM is not an "error (abnormality)" in a strict sense, the event is resolved when the main control board 110 detects it.

The "RAM clear operation" is an operation in which the administrator or the like turns on the power while pressing the RAM clear switch 111a (while the RAM clear switch 111a is ON).

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an example is obtained in which there is no concept of setting change, but a detection of a RAM clear operation in the case of a gaming machine having a concept of setting change (a gaming machine having a setting change mode). Is on the condition that the gaming machine 1 is switched from the power-off state to the power-on state without the setting change mode activation operation (when the setting key is OFF) and when the RAM clear switch is ON. Can be detected.

(2. Power restoration)
Power recovery is detected on condition that a power recovery operation is detected. Specifically, the main control board 110 turns off the power of the gaming machine 1 without turning on the RAM clear switch 111a (when the RAM clear switch 111a is off) when recovering from an unexpected power failure or the like. Power recovery is detected on condition that the power is switched from the state to the power ON state (power recovery operation is performed). Since power restoration is not an "error (abnormality)" in a strict sense, the event is resolved when the main control board 110 detects it.

The "power restoration operation" is an operation in which the administrator or the like turns on the power while the RAM clear switch 111a is OFF.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an example is obtained in which there is no concept of setting change, but a detection of a power recovery operation in the case of a gaming machine having a concept of setting change (a gaming machine having a setting change mode). Is on the condition that the gaming machine 1 is switched from the power-off state to the power-on state without the setting change mode activation operation (when the setting key is OFF) and when the RAM clear switch is OFF. Can be detected.

(3. Abnormal winning error)
An abnormal winning error occurs when the game ball detection switch continues to maintain the detection state for a certain period of time (for example, 1 second), or when the game ball detection switch detects a predetermined number or more of game balls within a predetermined time (for example,). Detected in 3) in 0.5 seconds. Further, the main control board 110 cancels the event by the abnormal winning error flag clearing process at the time of power restoration or RAM clearing.

In the present embodiment, an example in which the game ball detection switch for detecting the abnormal winning error is the large winning opening detection switch 16a will be described, but the game ball detection switch for detecting the abnormal winning error is another switch. (For example, the first start port detection switch 14a, the second start port detection switch 15a, the general winning opening detection switch 12a, etc.) may be used, or a plurality of switches of the large winning opening detection switch 16a and other switches. May be targeted.

Further, the conditions such as the detection time of the game ball detection switch and the number of game balls when detecting the abnormal winning error are not limited to this embodiment and can be selected in various ways.

In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the abnormal winning error is canceled by the abnormal winning error flag clearing process when the power is restored or when the RAM is cleared, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment. .. For example, the abnormal winning error may be canceled by executing RAM clear, and may not be canceled by power recovery.

(4. Magnetic detection error)
The magnetic detection error is detected when the magnetic sensor 17 detects magnetism for a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms). Specifically, the main control board 110 causes a magnetic detection error when an ON signal of the magnetic sensor 17 is continuously output, such as when an abnormal magnetism (magnetic field) is applied to the game machine 1. Detect. Further, the main control board 110 cancels the event by executing the magnetic detection error flag clearing process at the time of power restoration or RAM clearing.

In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the magnetic detection error is released by the magnetic detection error flag clearing process when the power is restored or when the RAM is cleared, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment. .. For example, the magnetic detection error may be cleared by executing RAM clear, but may not be cleared by power restoration.

(5. Abnormal winning frequency error)
The winning frequency abnormality error is detected when the number of winnings within the reference time is equal to or greater than the threshold value and the number of winnings reaches a specified number of times. Specifically, the main control board 110 has a specified number for firing a reference number during a low base state (whether or not it is in a non-time-saving gaming state or a high-probability gaming state). When the game ball of No. 1 wins the first starting port 14 (for example, when it is detected that 20 game balls out of 100 shots have won the first starting port 14), the winning frequency abnormality count number X is set. Update "1". It should be noted that the update of the winning frequency abnormal count number X may be performed regardless of whether the counter value is added or subtracted. Further, when it is determined that the winning frequency abnormality count number X has reached 5 (X ≧ 5), the main control board 110 detects the winning frequency abnormality error. The number of shots of the game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch 11a. Further, the main control board 110 cancels the event by executing the winning frequency abnormality error flag clearing process at the time of power restoration or RAM clearing.

In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the winning frequency abnormality error is released by the winning frequency abnormality error flag clearing process when the power is restored or the RAM is cleared, but the gaming machine of the present invention is in the present embodiment. Not limited. For example, the winning frequency abnormality error may be canceled by executing RAM clear, and may not be cleared by power restoration.

(6. Door opening error)
The door opening error is detected by detecting the OFF state of the door opening switch 133 (a state indicating that the glass frame 50 is in the open state). Specifically, the main control board 110 detects a door opening error when the glass frame 50 is open with respect to the outer frame 60 (when the door opening switch 133 is OFF). The door opening switch 133 is a switch that detects whether the glass frame 50 is in the closed state or the open state. When the glass frame 50 is in the closed state, an ON signal is output and the glass frame 50 is opened. When in the state, an OFF signal is output. Further, when the main control board 110 detects the ON state of the door opening switch, the main control board 110 cancels the event.

(7. Switch unconnected error)
The switch unconnected error is detected on condition that the switch unconnected state is detected. Specifically, the main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a switch unconnected error when the actual connection of the switch to be connected to the main control board 110 is defective (including completely unconnected). .. Further, when the main control board 110 detects the switch connection state, the main control board 110 cancels the event.

(8. Plate full tank error)
The dish full tank error is detected on condition that the dish full tank detection switch 136 is detected in the ON state. Specifically, the main control board 110 is detected when the saucer 40 is full. More specifically, the dish full tank detection switch 136 can detect whether or not the dish 40 is full, and when the dish 40 is full, it outputs an ON signal while outputting an ON signal. If not, an OFF signal is output. The main control board 110 detects a dish full tank error when an ON signal is output from the dish full tank detection switch 136. Further, when the main control board 110 detects the OFF state of the dish full tank detection switch 136, the main control board 110 cancels the event.

In the present embodiment, a saucer 40 is provided as a storage plate for the game balls, and the plate full tank detection switch 136 shows an example in which the saucer 40 is full, but the game of the present invention is shown. The machine is not limited to this embodiment. For example, when the gaming machine is provided with an upper plate and a lower plate, a plate full tank error is detected on condition that at least one of the upper plate and the lower plate is detected as full. You may.

As described above, in the game machine 1, at least eight kinds of errors (1) of RAM clear, power recovery, abnormal winning error, magnetic detection error, winning frequency abnormal error, door opening error, switch unconnected error, and dish full tank error (1). ~ 8 error) can occur.

Here, the abnormal winning error and the magnetic detection error are serious events that cannot be recovered unless the power is turned on / off or the RAM clear operation is performed (RAM clear, power recovery, etc.). In this specification, serious events (errors) such as RAM clearing, power recovery, abnormal winning error, and magnetic detection error are described as "serious events" or "serious errors". In some cases (see FIG. 96).

Further, the door opening error, the switch non-connection error, and the dish full tank error are minor events that can be resolved without the RAM clear operation or the power-on. Further, the winning frequency abnormal error is a minor error as compared with the abnormal winning error and the magnetic detection error. In addition, while a security signal is output when a serious error such as an abnormal winning error or magnetic detection error occurs, a winning frequency error, a door opening error, a switch disconnection error, and a full plate error occur. However, no security signal is output. Therefore, in this specification, minor events (errors) such as winning frequency abnormality error, door opening error, switch unconnected error, and dish full tank error are described as "minor event" or "minor error". (See FIG. 96).

As will be described in detail later, when a serious error such as RAM clear occurs, a security signal described later is output. Specifically, when a RAM clear, an abnormal winning error, or a magnetic detection error occurs, a security signal is output. On the other hand, even if a minor error such as a winning frequency abnormality error occurs, the security signal is not output.

(Notification mode of each error)
Next, the notification start condition and end condition of each error, and the error notification mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 106. FIG. 97 shows a notification start condition, a notification end condition, and a notification mode for each error.

As described above, in the description in the present specification, the notification of an error (error event) performed by the image display device 31 (effect display area 70), the lamp of the decorative lighting device 34, etc., and the sound output device 32 is generically referred to. , "Error notification" may be described and explained.

Further, in the following description, among the decorative lighting devices 34, the lamps used for error notification may be collectively referred to as "decorative lamp 37". In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the board lighting device 34a and the frame lighting device 34b are used as decorative lamps 37 for error notification. The lamp used for error notification is not limited to this embodiment, and various lamps can be selected.

In each error notification, the timing at which the effect control unit 120m starts the error notification after the main control board 110 detects the error is a timing common to each error notification (constant timing).

(1. Notification of RAM clear)
As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the sub CPU 120a starts the RAM clear notification on condition that the RAM clear command is received. Further, the sub CPU 120a ends the RAM clear notification 120 seconds after the start of the RAM clear notification (reception of the RAM clear command from the main control board 110).

As shown as an example in FIG. 98, in the RAM clear notification, the image display device 31 displays an error notification dedicated image 300A (in the example of FIG. 98, an image including the characters “RAM clear”) on the full screen (entire area). Is continuously executed for 120 seconds. Further, in the RAM clear notification, all the decorative lamps 37 are lit for 1 second each in R (red) → G (green) → B (blue) as one set, and the notification of the one set is repeated for 120 seconds. Will be executed. Further, in the RAM clear notification, the mode in which the voice (voice) of "RAM cleared" is output for 2 seconds and the warning sound effect (for example, siren sound A) is output for 3 seconds is set as one set for 5 seconds. The notification of the set is repeatedly executed for 120 seconds.

The RAM clear notification (RAM clear notification by sound) performed by the voice output device 32 outputs a warning sound effect (for example, a dedicated BGM) different from the siren sound A at the time of power restoration notification, which will be described later. May be. Further, the voice output time of the RAM clear notification may be longer than the output time of the warning sound effect (voice output time> warning sound effect output time), or the voice output and the warning sound effect output are the same time (voice). Output time = warning sound effect output time). Further, in the RAM clear notification by sound, the voice output may be executed only once at the start of the notification (for example, only the warning sound effect is output after the voice output). Further, in the RAM clear notification by sound, the output of only the warning sound effect may be executed without the voice output.

Further, the error notification dedicated image 300A in the RAM clear notification does not have to be displayed on the entire screen (entire area) of the image display device 31, but is displayed on a part of the image display device 31. It may be (see FIGS. 106 (a) and 106 (b)). That is, the RAM clear notification by the image may be such that another image (for example, a normal effect) can be visually recognized on the image display device 31. An example (see FIG. 106) in which the error notification dedicated image 300A is displayed on a “part” of the image display device 31 will be described later.

(2. Notification of power restoration)
As shown in FIGS. 97 and 99, the sub CPU 120a starts the power restoration notification on condition that the power restoration command is received. The power recovery notification (display of the power recovery screen) by the image display device 31 ends on condition that the next command is received regardless of whether 30 seconds have passed from the start of the error notification, whereas the decorative lamp 37 ends. The power restoration notification by the voice output device 32 is completed by satisfying both the reception of the next command and the elapse of 30 seconds from the start of the error notification. That is, the notification by the sound and the lamp is continuously performed for 30 seconds from the start of the error notification even if the next command is received 30 seconds before the start of the error notification (the notification for 30 seconds is guaranteed).

As described above, the "next command" includes, for example, a fluctuation start command (variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main CPU 110a, a fluctuation stop command, a customer waiting state specification command, an opening specification command, and a round specification. Commands that occur over time, such as commands and ending designation commands (excluding start opening winning designation commands).

As shown in FIG. 99, in the power recovery notification, the image display device 31 displays the error notification dedicated image 300B (in the example of FIG. 99, the image including the characters “power restored”) on the full screen (entire area). Notification is executed. Further, in the power restoration notification, the notification is executed in which all the decorative lamps 37 are turned on and off in white for 1 second and 2 seconds, respectively. Further, in the power restoration notification, the voice of "power is turned on" is output for 2 seconds, and the warning sound effect (for example, siren sound A) is output for 3 seconds as one set for 5 seconds. Is repeatedly executed.

In the power restoration notification (power restoration notification by sound) performed by the voice output device 32, a warning sound effect (for example, siren sound B) different from the warning sound effect at the time of RAM clear notification may be output. good. Further, the voice output time of the power recovery notification may be longer than the output time of the warning sound effect (voice output time> warning sound effect output time), or the voice output and the warning sound effect output are the same time (voice). Output time = warning sound effect output time). Further, in the power restoration notification by sound, the voice output may be executed only once at the start of the notification (for example, only the warning sound effect is output after the voice output). Further, in the power restoration notification by sound, the output of only the warning sound effect may be executed without the voice output.

Further, the error notification dedicated image 300B in the power recovery notification does not have to be displayed on the full screen (entire area) of the image display device 31, but is displayed on a part of the image display device 31. It may be (see FIGS. 106 (a) and 106 (b)). That is, the power restoration notification by the image may be such that another image (for example, a normal effect) can be visually recognized on the image display device 31. An example (see FIG. 106) in which the error notification dedicated image 300B is displayed on a “part” of the image display device 31 will be described later.

(3. Notification of abnormal winning error)
As shown in FIGS. 97 and 100, the sub CPU 120a starts the abnormal winning error notification on condition that the abnormal winning error designation command is received. Further, the sub CPU 120a ends the abnormal winning error notification on condition that the power is turned off.

More specifically, the termination condition of the abnormal winning error notification will be described more specifically. In the present embodiment, the abnormal winning error is eliminated by the processing of clearing the abnormal winning error flag at the time of power restoration or RAM clearing. Therefore, the abnormal winning error occurs when the power is turned on (whether the RAM clear operation is performed) with the RAM clear switch 111a ON after the power is cut off, or when the RAM clear switch 111a is OFF. The error disappears when the power is turned on, regardless of whether is turned on (whether the power recovery operation is performed). That is, it can be said that the abnormal winning error ends when the power is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 100, in the abnormal winning error notification, the image display device 31 displays the error notification dedicated image 300C (in the example of FIG. 100, the image including the characters "abnormal winning has been detected") on the full screen (entire area). The notification of the mode to be displayed on the screen is continuously executed until the power is turned off. Further, in the abnormal winning error notification, all the decorative lamps 37 are turned on in all red, and the notification is continuously executed until the power is turned off. Further, in the abnormal winning error notification, the voice of "abnormal winning has been detected" is output for 2 seconds, and the warning sound effect (for example, siren sound A) is output for 3 seconds. Is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off.

In the abnormal winning error notification, the decoration lamp 37 may execute the notification in a mode (blinking) of repeating turning on and off.

Further, in the abnormal winning error notification (abnormal winning error notification by sound) performed by the voice output device 32, the warning sound effect may be the siren sound B or the dedicated siren sound C. Further, the voice output time of the abnormal winning error notification may be longer than the output time of the warning sound effect (voice output time> warning sound effect output time), or the voice output and the warning sound effect output are the same time (voice output time> warning sound effect output time). Voice output time = warning sound effect output time) may be used. Further, in the abnormal winning error notification by sound, the voice output may be executed only once at the start of the notification (for example, only the warning sound effect is output after the voice output). Further, in the abnormal winning error notification by sound, the output of only the warning sound effect may be executed without the voice output.

Further, the error notification dedicated image 300C in the abnormal winning error notification does not have to be displayed on the full screen (entire area) of the image display device 31, but is displayed on a part of the image display device 31. It may be (see FIGS. 106 (a) and 106 (b)). That is, the abnormal winning error notification by the image may be such that another image (for example, a normal effect) can be visually recognized on the image display device 31. An example (see FIG. 106) in which the error notification dedicated image 300C is displayed on a “part” of the image display device 31 will be described later.

(4. Notification of magnetic detection error)
As shown in FIGS. 97 and 101, the sub CPU 120a starts the magnetic detection error notification on condition that the magnetic detection error designation command is received. Further, the sub CPU 120a ends the magnetic detection error notification on condition that the power is turned off.

More specifically, the termination condition of the magnetic detection error notification will be described more specifically. In the present embodiment, the magnetic detection error is eliminated by the processing of clearing the magnetic detection error flag at the time of power restoration or RAM clearing. Therefore, the magnetic detection error occurs when the power is turned on (whether the RAM clear operation is performed) when the RAM clear switch 111a is ON after the power is cut off, or when the RAM clear switch 111a is OFF. The error disappears when the power is turned on, regardless of whether is turned on (whether the power recovery operation is performed). That is, it can be said that the magnetic detection error ends when the power is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 101, in the magnetic detection error notification, the image display device 31 displays the error notification dedicated image 300D (in the example of FIG. 101, an image including the characters “magnetic detection”) on the full screen (entire area). Notification is continuously executed until the power is turned off. Further, in the magnetic detection error notification, all the decorative lamps 37 are turned on in all red, and the magnetic detection error notification is continuously executed until the power is turned off. Further, in the magnetic detection error notification, the mode of outputting the voice of "magnetism detected" for 2 seconds and the warning sound effect (for example, siren sound A) for 3 seconds is set as one set for 5 seconds. The notification is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off.

In the magnetic detection error notification, the decorative lamp 37 may execute the notification in a mode (blinking) of repeating turning on and off.

Further, in the magnetic detection error notification (magnetic detection error notification by sound) performed by the voice output device 32, the warning sound effect may be the siren sound B or the dedicated siren sound D. Further, the voice output time of the magnetic detection error notification may be longer than the output time of the warning sound effect (voice output time> warning sound effect output time), or the voice output and the warning sound effect output are the same time (voice output time> warning sound effect output time). Voice output time = warning sound effect output time). Further, in the magnetic detection error notification by sound, the voice output may be executed only once at the start of the notification (for example, only the warning sound effect is output after the voice output). Further, in the magnetic detection error notification by sound, the output of only the warning sound effect may be executed without the voice output.

Further, the error notification dedicated image 300D in the magnetic detection error notification does not have to be displayed on the entire screen (entire area) of the image display device 31, but is displayed on a part of the image display device 31. It may be (see FIGS. 106 (a) and 106 (b)). That is, the magnetic detection error notification by the image may be such that another image (for example, a normal effect) can be visually recognized on the image display device 31. An example (see FIG. 106) in which the error notification dedicated image 300D is displayed on a “part” of the image display device 31 will be described later.

(5. Notification of abnormal winning frequency error)
As shown in FIGS. 97 and 102, the sub CPU 120a starts the winning frequency abnormality error notification on condition that the winning frequency abnormality error designation command is received. Further, the sub CPU 120a ends the winning frequency abnormality error notification on condition that the power is turned off.

More specifically, the end condition of the winning frequency abnormality error notification will be described more specifically. In the present embodiment, the winning frequency abnormality error is eliminated by the clearing process of the winning frequency abnormality error flag at the time of power restoration or RAM clearing. Therefore, the winning frequency abnormality error occurs when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 111a is ON (whether the RAM clear operation is performed) or when the RAM clear switch 111a is OFF after the power is cut off. Regardless of whether the power is turned on (whether the power restoration operation is performed), the error is resolved when the power is turned on. That is, it can be said that the winning frequency abnormality error ends when the power is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 102, in the winning frequency abnormality error notification, an error notification dedicated image 300E (in the example of FIG. 102, an image including the characters “winning frequency abnormality error”) is displayed on the screen (image display device 31) on the image display device 31. Notification of a mode to be displayed in a part (for example, the upper right corner) is continuously executed until the power is turned off. Further, in the winning frequency abnormality error notification, all the decorative lamps 37 are repeatedly turned on and off in red (blinking in all red), and are continuously executed until the power is turned off. Furthermore, in the winning frequency abnormality error notification, the mode in which the voice of "Call the staff" is output for 2 seconds and the warning sound effect (for example, siren sound A) is output for 3 seconds is set as 1 set for 5 seconds. The notification is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off.

In the winning frequency abnormality error notification, the decoration lamp 37 may be notified in such a manner that it lights up in all red.

Further, in the winning frequency abnormality error notification (winning frequency abnormality error notification by sound) performed by the voice output device 32, the warning sound effect may be siren sounds B to D or a dedicated siren sound E. Further, the voice output time of the winning frequency abnormality error notification may be longer than the output time of the warning sound effect (voice output time> warning sound effect output time), or the voice output and the warning sound effect output are the same time. (Voice output time = warning sound effect output time) may be used. Further, in the winning frequency abnormality error notification by sound, the voice output may be executed only once at the start of the notification (for example, only the warning sound effect is output after the voice output). Further, in the winning frequency abnormality error notification by sound, the output of only the warning sound effect may be executed without the voice output.

(6. Notification of door opening error)
As shown in FIGS. 97 and 103, the sub CPU 120a starts the door opening error notification on condition that the door opening start designation command is received. Further, the sub CPU 120a ends the door opening error notification on condition that the door opening end designation command is received.

As shown in FIG. 103, in the door opening error notification, an image 300F dedicated to error notification (an image including the characters "door opening" in the example of FIG. 103) is displayed on the image display device 31 as a part of the screen (image display device 31). The notification of the mode displayed in (for example, the upper right corner) is continuously executed until the completion of the door opening end notification (notification that the door is closed) described later. Further, in the door opening error notification, all the decorative lamps 37 are repeatedly turned on and off in red (blinking all red), and are continuously executed until the completion of the door opening end notification (notification that the door is closed). NS. Further, in the door opening error notification, the mode in which the voice of "door is open" is output for 2 seconds and the warning sound effect (for example, siren sound A) is output for 3 seconds is set as 1 set for 5 seconds. The notification is repeatedly executed until the door open end specification command is received.

When a door opening error is detected, a door / frame opening signal, which will be described later, is output as an external information signal.

When the sub CPU 120a receives the door opening end designation command, the sub CPU 120a notifies that the door is closed (door opening end notification, in FIG. 103, a sound of "door closed" and a sound effect of "ping pong". Output) is output from the audio output device 32. Further, the display of the error notification dedicated image 300F and the notification by the decorative lamp 37 are continuously performed until the completion of the door opening end notification (completion of voice output).

In the door opening error notification, the decoration lamp 37 may be notified in such a manner that it lights up in all red.

Further, in the door opening error notification (door opening error notification by sound) performed by the voice output device 32, the warning sound effect may be siren sounds B to E or a dedicated siren sound F. Further, the voice output time of the door opening error notification may be longer than the output time of the warning sound effect (voice output time> warning sound effect output time), or the voice output and the warning sound effect output are the same time (voice output time> warning sound effect output time). Voice output time = warning sound effect output time) may be used. Further, in the door opening error notification by sound, the voice output may be executed only once at the start of the notification (for example, only the warning sound effect is output after the voice output). Further, in the door opening error notification by sound, the output of only the warning sound effect may be executed without the voice output.

(7. Notification of switch disconnection error)
As shown in FIGS. 97 and 104, the sub CPU 120a starts the switch non-connection error notification on condition that the switch non-connection error start designation command is received. Further, the sub CPU 120a ends the switch non-connection error notification on condition that the switch non-connection error end designation command is received.

As shown in FIG. 104, in the switch unconnected error notification, an error notification dedicated image 300G (an image including the characters "switch not connected error" in the example of FIG. 104) is displayed on the screen (image display device 31) on the image display device 31. Notification of the mode to be displayed in a part (for example, the upper right corner) is continuously executed until the switch unconnected error end specification command is received. Further, in the switch non-connection error notification, all the decorative lamps 37 are repeatedly turned on and off in red (blinking all red), and are continuously executed until the switch non-connection error end designation command is received. Further, in the switch non-connection error notification, the mode in which the voice of "Switch non-connection error" is output for 2 seconds and the warning sound effect (for example, siren sound A) is output for 3 seconds is set as 1 set for 5 seconds. Is repeatedly executed until the switch unconnected error end specification command is received.

In the switch non-connection error notification, the decoration lamp 37 may be notified in such a manner that it lights up in all red.

Further, in the switch non-connection error notification (switch non-connection error notification by sound) performed by the voice output device 32, the warning sound effect may be siren sounds B to F or a dedicated siren sound G. Further, the voice output time of the switch unconnected error notification may be longer than the output time of the warning sound effect (voice output time> warning sound effect output time), or the voice output and the warning sound effect output are the same time. (Voice output time = warning sound effect output time) may be used. Further, in the switch non-connection error notification by sound, the voice output may be executed only once at the start of the notification (for example, only the warning sound effect is output after the voice output). Further, in the switch non-connection error notification by sound, the output of only the warning sound effect may be executed without the voice output.

(8. Notification of dish full tank error)
As shown in FIGS. 97 and 105, the sub CPU 120a starts the dish full tank error notification on condition that the dish full tank error start designation command is received. Further, the sub CPU 120a ends the dish full tank error notification on condition that the dish full tank error end designation command is received.

As shown in FIG. 105, in the dish full tank error notification, the image display device 31 is displayed on the screen (image display device 31) with the error notification dedicated image 300H (in the example of FIG. 105, the image including the characters “please pull out the ball”). Notification of the mode to be displayed in a part (for example, the upper right corner) is continuously executed until the reception of the dish full tank error end specification command. Further, in the dish full tank error notification, all the decorative lamps 37 are repeatedly turned on and off in red (blinking all red), and are continuously executed until the dish full tank error end designation command is received. Further, in the dish full tank error notification, the mode of outputting the voice of "please pull out the ball" for 2 seconds and the warning sound effect (for example, siren sound A) for 3 seconds is set as one set for 5 seconds, and the one set is set. The notification is repeatedly executed until the command to specify the end of the full tank error is received.

In addition, in the dish full tank error notification, the decoration lamp 37 may execute the notification in such a manner that it lights up in all red.

Further, in the dish full tank error notification (dish full tank error notification by sound) performed by the voice output device 32, the warning sound effect may be siren sounds B to F or a dedicated siren sound H. Further, the voice output time of the dish full tank error notification may be longer than the output time of the warning sound effect (voice output time> warning sound effect output time), or the voice output and the warning sound effect output are the same time (voice output time> warning sound effect output time). Voice output time = warning sound effect output time) may be used. Further, in the dish full tank error notification by sound, the voice output may be executed only once at the start of the notification (for example, only the warning sound effect is output after the voice output). Further, in the dish full tank error notification by sound, the output of only the warning sound effect may be executed without the voice output.

Since the dish full tank error is a particularly minor event among the minor errors, in the dish full tank error notification, only the notification for performing a predetermined display on the image display device 31 is performed without performing the notification by sound. May be.

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, an example of error notification dedicated images 300A to D in the case of notifying a serious error such as RAM clear, power recovery, abnormal winning error, and magnetic detection error will be described.

In FIGS. 98 to 101, with respect to the error notification dedicated images 300A to D when a serious error is notified, the entire area of the image display device 31 is darkened (the entire area other than the character image portion becomes a solid area), and the like. Although the example in which the image of the above is invisible is shown, as described above, the error notification dedicated images 300A to D may be visible in other images.

For example, as shown in FIG. 106 (a), the images for notifying a serious error (error notification dedicated images 300A to 300D) have a transparent region in at least a part of the error notification dedicated image. Although it is provided and it is difficult to visually recognize the other image, the other image may be visible in the transparent region (error notification dedicated image 310 in FIG. 106 (a)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), the images (images 300A to 300D dedicated to error notification) for notifying a serious error are character images related to the error notification (in the example of FIG. 106 (b), "abnormal prize winning". Is detected) is displayed so as to occupy a large area in the effect display area 70, and the area other than the character image part (the area where other images can be seen) is small, making it difficult to see other images. However, it may be an image (image 320 dedicated to error notification in FIG. 106 (b)) in which other images can be visually recognized in areas other than the character image.

That is, the error notification dedicated image (such as the error notification dedicated image 320) that notifies a serious error is the "part" when the error notification dedicated image is displayed on the "part" of the image display device 31. It is desirable that the area is wider than the "part" when the error notification dedicated images 300E to 300H are displayed on the "part" of the image display device 31 at the time of error notification relating to a minor error described later.

More specifically, when the error notification dedicated images 300A to 300D are displayed in a "part" of the image display device 31 (effect display area 70), the "partial" range is the effect display area. When the area occupied by the error notification dedicated image is defined as the "notification occupied area" for the entire area of 70, the error notification dedicated image 300 related to serious error notification is the error notification dedicated image related to minor error notification. It is desirable that the area occupied by the notification is larger than 300 (wide area).

(About external information signals)
Next, the external information signal will be described. The external information signal is output to the outside (hall computer, etc.) via the external terminal board 30 by the command of the main control board 110 when an error occurs or other conditions are satisfied (starting port winning, etc.). It is a signal to be made.

(External terminal board)
FIG. 107 is a plan view of the external terminal board 30. As shown in FIG. 107, the output circuits OC [1] to OC [n], the output terminal portions CN [1] to CN [n], and the connection connector CN11 are mounted on the external terminal board 30 (here, the connection connector CN11). n = 10), each of the output circuits OC [1] to [n] includes a photocoupler PC and a resistance element R. In addition, "n" is an arbitrary integer of 2 or more.

The external terminal board 30 shown in FIG. 107 is provided with 10 output terminal portions CN (output terminal units CN1 to 10).

(Structure of external terminal board)
Each output terminal portion CN is composed of a pair of terminals. For each output terminal portion CN, a pair of terminals are connected to an external device (not shown) via a pair of wirings (electric wires). A part or all of the output terminal portion CN may be connected to the hall computer via the data display, or may be connected to the hall computer without the data display.

As the external information signals output from the main control board 110 to the external terminal board 30, there are n types (10 types in this embodiment) of external information signals. The external information signal includes, for example, a start signal (in other words, start information) indicating that the special symbol that has been variablely displayed has been stopped and displayed, and a jackpot signal (in other words, jackpot) indicating that the jackpot game is being executed. Information), a probability variation signal (in other words, probability variation information) indicating that the gaming state of the game machine 1 is in a high-probability time-saving gaming state, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls have been paid out. Various signals (in other words, information) such as a prize ball signal (in other words, prize ball information) and an error detection signal (in other words, error detection information) indicating that some error has been detected in the game machine 1. included.

As shown in FIG. 107, the output terminal portions CN1 to CN10 are arranged in a row along the longitudinal direction of the external terminal board 30. Further, each output terminal portion CN includes an output terminal portion CN1, an output terminal portion CN2, an output terminal portion CN3, an output terminal portion CN4, an output terminal portion CN5, and an output terminal portion CN6 along the longitudinal direction of the external terminal board 30. The output terminal portion CN7, the output terminal portion CN8, the output terminal portion CN9, and the output terminal portion CN10 are arranged in this order.

The external information signals (external information) of the game machine 1 of the present embodiment are "prize ball signal", "door / frame opening signal", "external signal 1", "external signal 2", "external signal 3", and "external signal 3". There are a total of 10 types of "external signal 4", "external signal 5", "security signal", "external signal 7", and "external signal 8".

In the following description, the external information signal (external information) may be described simply as "signal".

The output terminal portions CN1 to CN10 correspond to the above-mentioned signals. Specifically, the output terminal part CN1 is used as a prize ball signal, the output terminal part CN2 is used as a door / frame opening signal, the output terminal part CN3 is used as an external signal 2, the output terminal part CN5 is used as an external signal 3, and the output terminal part is used as an output terminal part. CN6 corresponds to an external signal 4, output terminal CN7 corresponds to an external signal 5, output terminal CN8 corresponds to a security signal, output terminal CN9 corresponds to an external signal 7, and output terminal CN10 corresponds to an external signal 8. ..

Next, the details of each signal and the time when the signal is turned on and the time when the signal is turned off will be described.

The prize ball signal is a signal (in other words, prize ball information) indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls have been paid out. The prize ball signal is turned on for 50 ms each time the counting switch detects the passage of 10 game balls (see FIG. 108 (a)).

The door / frame opening signal is a signal used to output the opening of the door (the opening of the glass frame 50 with respect to the outer frame 60) to the outside (such as a hall computer). The door / frame opening signal is turned on while the door is open (see FIG. 108 (b)).

The external signal 1 is a signal indicating that the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been stopped (stopped and displayed) (in other words, a special symbol confirmation signal). That is, the external signal 1 is a signal indicating that the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and the precondition for starting the next fluctuation (condition for receiving the fluctuation start command) is satisfied. .. In other words, the external signal 1 is a start signal indicating the start of fluctuation, and the undetermined determination information (number of pending numbers) increased by winning a prize in the first start port 14 or the second start port 15 is reduced by one. It can also be said that it is an update signal indicating that (the number of undetermined information has decreased). The external signal 1 is turned on for 0.2 seconds and turned off for 0.2 seconds after the fluctuation stop of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (see FIG. 108 (c)).

The external signal 2 is a signal indicating that the first start port detection switch 14a or the second start port detection switch 15a has detected the passage of the game ball (in other words, the start port winning signal). That is, the external signal 2 indicates that one undetermined determination information triggered by winning a prize in the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15 has been added (the number of undetermined information has increased). It can be said that it is an update signal. When the first start port detection switch 14a or the second start port detection switch 15a detects the passage of the game ball, the external signal 2 is turned on for 0.2 seconds and turned off for 0.2 seconds (FIG. 108 (FIG. 108). d) See).

The external signal 3 is a signal (in other words, a jackpot signal) indicating that the jackpot game is being executed. The external signal 3 displays a combination of symbols for which the condition device is activated, and is turned ON from the time when the display time after the symbol is confirmed to the end of the operation of the condition device (FIG. 108 (e). )reference).

The external signal 4 is a signal (in other words, an electric support signal) indicating that the gaming state is in the reduced working hours gaming state. The external signal 4 is turned on when the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol display device is activated (during the time saving game state) (see FIG. 108 (f)).

The external signal 5 is a signal used to detect the number of game balls that have passed through the out port 11 (in other words, an out ball detection signal). The external signal 5 adds the number of passing game balls by the out ball detection switch 11a, and is turned on for 50 ms seconds every time the addition result counts 10 (see FIG. 108 (g)).

A security signal is a signal indicating the occurrence of a serious event. More specifically, the security signal is a signal indicating that either an abnormal winning error or a magnetic detection error (board surface abnormality) has been detected, or that a RAM clear operation has been performed. In other words, RAM clear, abnormal winning error, and magnetic detection error can be said to be error events in which a security signal is output. The security signal is turned on for 0.2 seconds and turned off for 0.2 seconds from the time when either an abnormal winning error or a magnet detection error is detected, or when the RAM is cleared and the game is ready to play (the security signal is turned on for 0.2 seconds). (See FIG. 108 (h)).

The external signal 7 is a signal used to specify the number of game balls to be paid out (main prize ball signal). The external signal 7 adds the number of prize balls paid out when each prize ball switch detects the passage of the game ball, and is turned on for 0.2 seconds and turned off for 0.2 seconds every time 10 prize balls are counted. (See FIG. 108 (i)).

The external signal 8 is a signal indicating that the game ball has passed through the gate 13 (in other words, a normal map gate signal). The external signal 8 is turned on for 0.2 seconds and turned off for 0.2 seconds each time the game ball passes through the gate detection switch 13a (see FIG. 108 (j)).

The arrangement of the output terminal portions CN1 to CN10 is arbitrary. For example, the output terminal portion CN8 responsible for outputting a security signal for a serious error and the output terminal portion CN4 responsible for outputting an external signal 4 indicating a start port winning are one or more of the other ones as in the present embodiment. The output terminal portions may be arranged or may be adjacent to each other. The same applies to the arrangement of other output terminals.

Here, in the gaming machine 1, various events such as winning a prize in the starting port (the first starting port 14 and the second starting port 15) and the occurrence of an error may occur in duplicate. Further, when these events occur, signals (external information signals) may be output in duplicate.

FIGS. 109 and 110 show overlapping patterns when signals (external information signals) are output in duplicate (hereinafter, may be referred to as “overlapping signals”). In addition, in FIG. 109 and FIG. 110, the case where the security signal and the external signal 2 (starting port winning signal) are output in duplicate is shown as an example. In this example, the overlapping pattern of the security signal and the start opening winning signal is shown as an example, but the same applies even when other signals overlap.

"Signal duplication" includes the case where these signals are output so that the ON period or the OFF period of the two signals coincide with each other.

For example, as shown in FIG. 109 (a), the entire OFF period of one signal (for example, a security signal) and the entire ON period of another signal (for example, a start opening winning signal) overlap, and these signals are overlapped. May be output.

Further, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), the entire ON period of one signal (for example, a security signal) and the entire ON period of another signal (for example, a start opening winning signal) overlap, and these signals are overlapped. May be output.

Further, as shown in FIG. 109 (c), the entire ON period of one signal (for example, a security signal) and the entire OFF period of another signal (for example, a start opening winning signal) overlap, and these signals are overlapped. May be output.

Further, the "signal duplication" includes a case where at least a part of the ON period or the OFF period of one signal overlaps with at least a part of the ON period or the OFF period of another signal.

For example, as shown in FIG. 110 (a), of the entire ON period of one signal (for example, a security signal), a part of the ON period and a part of the OFF period of another signal (for example, a start opening winning signal). Overlapping, a part of the OFF period of one signal (for example, a security signal) and a part of the OFF period of another signal (for example, a start opening winning signal) may overlap, and these signals may be output. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 110 (b), a part of the ON period of one signal (security signal) and a part of the ON period of another signal (for example, a start opening winning signal) overlap, and one signal (for example, a start port winning signal) overlaps. A part of the OFF period of the security signal) and a part of the OFF period of another signal (for example, a start opening winning signal) may overlap and these signals may be output.

Further, as shown in FIG. 110 (c), a part of the ON period of one signal (for example, a security signal) overlaps with a part of the OFF period of another signal (for example, a start opening winning signal), and these A signal may be output.

Further, as shown in FIG. 110 (d), a part of the OFF period of one signal (for example, a security signal) overlaps with a part of the ON period of another signal (for example, a start opening winning signal), and these A signal may be output.

As described above, "signal duplication" means that at least a part of the ON period and the OFF period of two or more signals overlaps with at least a part of the ON period and the OFF period of another signal. Means.

(When the error notification and other effects overlap)
Next, a mode in which the timing of error notification and the timing of performing other effects overlap will be described.

In the following, we will first explain the case where the timing of error notification related to a minor error and the timing of performing other effects overlap, and then the timing of error notification related to a serious error and other effects. The case where the timing at which is performed overlaps with the timing is described.

In the following example, the "other effect" that overlaps with the timing of the error notification will be described by taking the icon appearance effect as an example.

In the following description, the "other effect" (for example, an icon appearance effect) may be described as "effect X". Further, the image displayed in the effect X (for example, the hold icon) or the image displayed as a result of the effect X may be described as "image GX". Further, when a plurality of timings for displaying the image GX are provided in the effect X, the previous timing is described as "timing TX1" at the timing for displaying the image GX (for example, the appearance timing of the hold icon). The timing after the timing TX1 may be described as "timing TX2".

(In the case of error notification related to minor errors)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the occurrence of a minor error (in other words, an error in which a security signal is not output) overlaps with the timing at which the effect X is performed, the error notification and the effect related to the minor error occur. Execute both of X.

FIG. 111 shows, as an example, a case where the effect X is performed so that a plate full tank error occurs and overlaps with the plate full tank error notification.

As shown in FIG. 111, an error notification related to a minor error (dish full tank error in FIG. 111) is started prior to the start opening prize (dish full tank error notification in FIG. 111), and then the start opening prize is given. When it is determined that the effect X is performed at the time of winning (timing TX1) with the start opening winning as an opportunity, both the error notification and the effect X are performed. As described above, no security signal is output when a minor error occurs.

Specifically, since the error notification related to a minor error is displayed on a part (corner, etc.) of the image display device 31 (effect display area 70) (see FIG. 105 and the like), the effect display area 70 is large. The part is visible. Therefore, even if an error notification related to a minor error is performed, the player can visually recognize the effect X without hindering the visual recognition of the effect X.

The same applies to the case where the image GX displayed in the effect X is displayed at the timing TX2 (for example, after a predetermined time from the time of winning).

In this way, when the error notification related to the minor error is performed, the effect X is executed. Further, when the effect X has a plurality of execution timings (when it can be executed by either one or both of the timing TX1 and the timing TX2), the effect X is performed regardless of the timing (when the effect X is performed (). The effect X is performed regardless of whether the timing TX1 or the timing TX2).

Further, although not shown, the effect X is performed regardless of whether the execution timing of the effect X is earlier or later than the occurrence of a minor error.

(In the case of error notification related to a serious error)
Next, a case where the timing at which the error notification related to the serious error is performed and the timing at which the effect X is performed overlap will be described.

In the following description, the error notification and the execution timing of the effect X, as well as the signal output timing related to these will be described. Further, the signal related to the effect X (for example, the start opening winning signal) may be described as "another signal" and described.

(When the security signal overlaps with other signals)
First, a mode in which a security signal and another signal are output in duplicate will be described. The “signal duplication” is as described with reference to FIGS. 109 and 110, and may be a case where two signals are overlapped in any pattern.

As shown in FIG. 112, when the timing is such that the signal related to the serious error (security signal) and the other signal related to the effect X (for example, the external signal 2 which is the start opening winning signal) are output in duplicate, an error occurs. While the notification is executed, the execution of the effect X is restricted.

Specifically, when a serious error (for example, a magnetic detection error) occurs, an image related to error notification (error notification dedicated image 300) is displayed in the entire area of the image display device 31 (effect display area 70) (FIG. 101). Further, when the security signal and another signal are output in duplicate, the execution timing of the effect X (for example, the timing of the appearance of the hold icon in the icon appearance effect) is irrelevant (timing TX1). The image GX (for example, the hold icon) of the effect X cannot be visually recognized because it is hindered by the image related to the error notification (regardless of whether the timing is TX2 or not). That is, since the error notification dedicated image 300 is displayed in the entire area on the image display device 31, the image GX related to the effect X is not displayed, and as a result, the effect X is not performed.

Further, when the images for notifying a serious error (error notification dedicated images 300A to 300D) are displayed on a part of the image display device 31 (such as the error notification dedicated image 310 and the error notification dedicated image 320). Even if it is, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the effect X (image GX).

For example, as shown in FIG. 106 (a), the images for notifying a serious error (error notification dedicated images 300A to 300D) have a different transmittance from the character image in a portion other than the character image. As a result, even when the image on the lower layer side can be seen through in a portion other than the character image (such as the image 310 dedicated to error notification), it becomes difficult to grasp the image GX related to the effect X. That is, since the error notification dedicated image 300 is displayed so as to occupy most of the area of the image display device 31, it becomes difficult to visually recognize and grasp the image GX related to the effect X, and as a result, the execution of the effect X is restricted. ..

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), an image for notifying a serious error (an image dedicated to error notification) is displayed so as to occupy most of the image display device 31 (effect display area 70). If it is (such as an image 320 dedicated to error notification), the proportion of the character portion of the image dedicated to error notification occupies a large proportion in the effect display area 70, and the visual priority of other images is lowered, or an error occurs. Since the notification-only image hides a part of other images, it becomes difficult to grasp the image GX related to the effect X. That is, since the error notification dedicated image is displayed so as to occupy most of the area of the image display device 31, it becomes difficult to visually recognize and grasp the image GX related to the effect X, and as a result, the execution of the effect X is restricted.

In addition, "when the image dedicated to error notification is displayed in" a part "of the image display device 31 (effect display area 70)" means that the image dedicated to error notification has at least a part of transparency. As a result, an image on the lower layer side (for example, the effect symbol 38 or the hold icon) is difficult to see but is visible (see FIG. 106 (a)), or an image dedicated to error notification is displayed in the effect display area 70. It occupies most of the display, and as a result, images on the lower layer side (for example, the effect symbol 38 and the hold icon) are difficult to see but are visible (see FIG. 106 (b)). Is done.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1, when the security signal overlaps with the signal related to the effect X (another signal), the execution of the effect X is restricted. Even if the security signal and another signal overlap (regardless of the pattern in which they overlap) and the execution of the effect X is restricted (not executed), the security is secured. Both the signal and other signals are output.

Further, in the case where an error notification related to a serious error is performed, when the effect X has a plurality of execution timings (when it can be executed by either one or both of the timing TX1 and the timing TX2). , Regardless of the timing at which the effect X is performed (whether the timing TX1 or the timing TX2), the execution of the effect X is restricted.

In the above description, as an example of the signal output so as to overlap with the security signal, the start port winning signal (external signal 2) has been described as an example, but other signals and the effect X are limited to the above description. However, it may be an external signal 1 (special figure confirmation signal) which is a premise of the start of fluctuation, an external signal 3 indicating that a jackpot is being made, or a signal other than these. Further, the effect X is not limited to the icon appearance effect, and may be a pre-reading effect such as a winning flash effect or an icon color change, or an effect performed during fluctuations such as a pseudo-ream or a timer effect, during a jackpot game. It may be a production. The same applies to the following description (when the signals do not overlap).

(When the security signal and other signals do not overlap)
Next, a mode in which the security signal and other signals are not output in duplicate (in the case of non-overlapping signals) will be described. In the following description, a case where a security signal is output after another signal will be described first, and then a case where another signal is output after the security signal will be described.

FIG. 113 shows a case where another signal (for example, a start opening winning signal) is output and a security signal related to a serious error (for example, a magnetic detection error) is output after the output of the other signal is completed.

As shown in FIG. 113, when another signal is output and the security signal is output after the output of the other signal is completed and the execution timing of the effect X is earlier than the output timing of the security signal, the effect X is May be done. For example, when the effect X is performed at the timing TX1, the effect X is performed when the timing TX1 is earlier than the output timing of the security signal. That is, the image GX related to the effect X is displayed before the display of the error notification dedicated image 300 related to the error notification, and at least a part of the effect X (until the error notification dedicated image 300 is displayed) is executed. NS.

When another signal is output and the security signal is output after the output of the other signal is completed, the effect X is performed even if the execution timing of the effect X is earlier than the output timing of the security signal. It may not be.

For example, as shown in FIG. 113, when the effect X is performed at the timing TX2, the execution of the effect X is restricted when the timing TX2 is later than the output timing of the security signal. That is, the display of the error notification dedicated image 300 related to the error notification makes it difficult to visually recognize and grasp the image GX related to the effect X, and as a result, the execution of the effect X is restricted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 114, when the timing TX1 in the effect X is later than the output timing of the security signal, the execution of the effect X is similarly restricted.

Next, a case where another signal is output after the security signal will be described. FIG. 115 shows a case where a security signal is output and another signal (for example, a start opening winning signal) is output after the output of the security signal is completed.

As shown in FIG. 115, when the security signal is output and another signal is output after the output of the security signal is completed, the effect X is performed regardless of whether the execution timing of the effect X is the timing TX1 or the timing TX2. Execution is restricted. That is, the display of the error notification dedicated image 300 related to the error notification makes it difficult to visually recognize and grasp the image GX related to the effect X, and as a result, the execution of the effect X is restricted. Further, when the timing TX1 in the effect X is later than the output timing of the security signal, the execution of the effect X is similarly restricted.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the execution of another effect (effect X) may be restricted depending on the relationship between the output timing of the security signal and the output timing of the other signal.

(Behavior when the power is turned on and off)
Next, a case where the power supply is cut off occurs at the timing until the effect X is performed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 116, if a power failure occurs between the timing TX1 and the timing TX2 after the execution of the effect X is determined, the image GX of the effect X may not appear. Specifically, when it is decided to display the image GX (for example, the hold icon) at the timing TX2 (for example, 2 seconds after the winning command) when the effect X is determined (for example, when the start opening winning command is received). If the power is cut off before the timing TX2, the image GX is not displayed although it is determined to display the image GX.

Here, a case where the effect X is an icon appearance effect will be described with reference to FIG. 116. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the appearance timing of the hold icon is determined at the time of winning, and the icon non-appearance flag is turned ON. When the appearance of the hold icon is completed, the icon non-appearance flag is cleared. The icon non-appearance flag is backed up in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 120c.

As shown in FIG. 116, when the power is cut off while the icon non-appearance flag is ON and then the power is restored (when the power is turned on / off), the effect control unit 120 m redetermines the icon appearance effect. (See FIG. 59). Further, in the redetermination process, the appearance timing of the hold icon (either normal display, delayed display, or redisplay) is redetermined. In other words, when the power is turned on and off, the appearance timing of the hold icon before the power is turned off is discarded, and the appearance timing of the hold icon is redetermined after the power is restored (when the screen is restored).

As shown in FIG. 116, when the "normal display" is determined in the redetermination process, the hold icon appears and is displayed when the screen is returned. When "delayed display" is determined, the hold icon appears and is displayed 2 seconds after the screen returns. In this way, the gaming machine 1 discards the execution timing (either normal display, delayed display, or redisplay) for the appearance of the hold icon determined before the power is cut off, and powers the machine 1. After recovery, determine the execution timing again.

Further, when the power is restored, the power restoration notification (error notification) is performed, but the display of the error notification dedicated image 300 in the power restoration notification is when other commands (for example, customer waiting state specification command, fluctuation start command, etc.) are received. After the end, the notification by the decorative lamp 37 and the audio output device 32 is continuously performed for 30 seconds after the power is restored.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when there is an unappearing hold icon when the power is cut off (when there is an icon non-appearance flag), at what timing the hold icon appears when the screen is returned. It is decided to perform the icon appearance effect redetermination process to determine. Specifically, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the power is cut off while there is an unappearing hold icon, after the power is restored (at the time of returning to the screen, after a predetermined time from the time of returning to the screen, or at the time of returning to the screen, and so on. Make the hold icon appear after a predetermined time (both).

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the power is cut off in a state where there is an unappearing hold icon (a state where there is an icon non-appearance flag) and then the RAM is cleared, the icon non-appearance flag is generated. Is cleared. That is, if the power is cut off between the winning of the start port and the appearance of the hold icon (with the hold icon that has not appeared), and then the RAM is cleared, it will not appear. The pending icon does not appear.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and when there is an unappearing hold icon (between the winning of the starting port and the appearance of the hold icon), the power is cut off, and then the power is turned on. The icon non-appearance flag may be cleared when the restoration is performed. That is, even if the power is cut off when there is an unappearing hold icon and the power is restored after that, even if the RAM is cleared, the icon non-appearance flag is set in any case. It may be cleared and the hold icon does not appear after the power is restored (if the power is cut off between the winning of the starting port and the appearance of the hold icon, the hold icon does not always appear).

Although the embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention has been described above, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment.

For example, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has shown an example in which the game machine 1 is shifted to a high-probability gaming state for a predetermined number of times after the completion of the first jackpot game, the second jackpot game, and the fourth jackpot game. The gaming machine of the invention is not limited to this. For example, the gaming machine of the present invention may shift to a high-probability gaming state for a predetermined number of times after the end of all jackpot games, and further, the jackpot 16 opened in a specific round game of the jackpot game. When the game ball passes through a specific area provided inside, the player may shift to a high-probability gaming state for a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, although the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment shows an example in which one large winning opening is provided, the gaming machine of the present invention may be provided with two or more large winning openings.

In addition, when the player shifts to the high-probability gaming state after all the jackpot games are completed and wins the fall lottery executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state, the high-probability gaming state is normally terminated. It may be a gaming machine that returns to the gaming state.

Further, when the type of the jackpot special symbol is a normal symbol, the player may shift to the low-probability non-time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, or when the type of the jackpot special symbol is a specific symbol, the jackpot special symbol is a jackpot. It may be a gaming machine that shifts to a high-probability time-saving gaming state a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the end of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. However, it may be a gaming machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the first special symbol has priority. It may be executed.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to pachinko gaming machines, but can also be used for rotating drum-type gaming machines (so-called slot machines). Furthermore, it can also be used for pachinko and pachinko machines.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the scope of claims, and is intended to include the meaning equivalent to the scope of claims and all modifications within the scope.

1 Pachinko machine 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
110b main ROM
110c main RAM
120 Production control board 120a Sub CPU
120b sub ROM
120c sub RAM
120m production control unit 150 image control unit

Claims (1)

Judgment means for determining whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player,
It has an effect control means capable of controlling an effect according to a determination result of the determination means.
The effect control means
After performing a predetermined effect indicating that the predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific effect is performed, and then
The predetermined effect is performed at a predetermined timing, and is performed.
When the specific effect is performed at either one of the first timing and the second timing after the first timing, and
There are cases where the specific effect is performed at both the first timing and the second timing.
A gaming machine in which the expectation of the special game differs between the specific effect performed at the first timing and the specific effect performed at the second timing.

Images